Alfa Romeo 159 Owner`s manual

Alfa 159 cop. LUM GB:Alfa 159 cop. LUM GB
7-04-2010
11:19
Pagina 1
ENGLISH
OWNER HANDBOOK
ALFA
159
Alfa Services
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:47
Pagina 1
Dear Customer,
thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 159 has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of
Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety and respect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 159.
The enclosed Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a
car, but the tranquillity that comes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organization is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
Have a good trip.
This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 159, so you should only consider the information concerning the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:47
Pagina 2
MUST BE READ!
REFUELLING
K
Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of
other products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due to the
damage caused.
ENGINE STARTING
Petrol engines: ensure that the handbrake is up, fully press the clutch pedal, without pressing the accelerator, put
the gear lever neutral, fit the electronic key into the ignition device to stop limit, briefly press the START/STOP button.
Diesel engines: ensure that the handbrake is up, fully press the clutch pedal, without pressing the accelerator, put
the gear lever neutral, fit the electronic key down into the ignition device until it stops. The instrument panel warning
light m will turn on, wait for the warning light m to turn off. The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will happen,
briefly press the START/STOP button as soon as the warning light m turns on.
PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine
needles or any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.
RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted in your car.
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:47
Pagina 3
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
쇵
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the required load.
CODE CARD (for versions/markets, where provided)
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.
THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (car well-being).
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:47
Pagina 4
Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the car was purchased, the subsidiary company or to our branch offices or any point of the Alfa Romeo Network.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new car and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics and low running costs of your car. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guide
This contains the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. The services can be recognized by the presence of the Alfa Romeo
badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organization in Italy can be found in the telephone book under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this
booklet are fitted as standard to the car. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo
Dealers.
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:47
Pagina 5
THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should,
in particular, be closely studied.
PERSONAL
SAFETY
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
Warning: partially or
fully ignoring these rules may lead
to serious injury.
This indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to prevent
the car from damaging the environment.
CAR SAFETY
Warning: partially or fully ignoring these
rules may lead to serious damage
being caused to the car which, in some
circumstances, may cause forfeiture of the
warranty cover.
The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the car at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes during production, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer's sales network.
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 6
7
INSTRUMENT PANEL .........................................
8
SYMBOLS .......................................................
9
ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM ...............................
9
ELECTRONIC KEY ..............................................
11
ALARM ...........................................................
17
IGNITION DEVICE...............................................
19
INSTRUMENTS..................................................
21
MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ...................................
25
RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY..........
30
SEATS ............................................................
45
HEAD RESTRAINTS.............................................
48
STEERING WHEEL .............................................
49
REARVIEW MIRRORS .........................................
50
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...............................
53
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...................
55
AUTOMATIC TWO-/THREE-ZONE
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ...............................
58
ADDITIONAL HEATER .........................................
69
EXTERNAL LIGHTS .............................................
70
CRUISE CONTROL .............................................
CEILING LIGHTS ................................................
CONTROLS .......................................................
INTERIOR FITTINGS............................................
SUNROOF ........................................................
DOORS ...........................................................
POWER WINDOWS ...........................................
BOOT ..............................................................
BONNET ..........................................................
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ......................................
HEADLIGHTS.....................................................
ABS SYSTEM ...................................................
VDC SYSTEM ...................................................
EOBD SYSTEM .................................................
SOUND SYSTEM PRESETTING..............................
ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ..........
INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC DEVICES ..
PARKING SENSORS ...........................................
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(T.P.M.S.) ........................................................
AT THE FILLING STATION ....................................
WINDOW WASHING .........................................
73
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT ........................ 127
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD ....................................................
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
6
76
78
81
83
93
96
99
101
105
106
106
108
110
115
116
116
117
118
122
125
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 7
A0E0056m
1. Adjustable swivel side air vents - 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents - 3. External lights control lever - 4. Instrument panel - 5. Driver’s air bag and horn - 6. Windscreen wiper control lever - 7. Upper central vent - 8. Adjustable swivel centre air vents - 9. Fuel level gauge/engine coolant temperature gauge/engine oil temperature gauge (petrol versions)
or turbocharger pressure gauge (diesel versions) - 10. Passenger’s air bag - 11. Passenger’s knees air bag (for versions/markets, where provided) - 12. Glove box - 13. Sound system (for versions/markets, where provided) - 14. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 15. Engine START/STOP button - 16. Ignition device - 17. Driver’s knees air bag 18. Sound system controls on the steering wheel (where provided) - 19. Cruise Control lever (for versions/markets,
where provided) - 20. Bonnet opening lever - 21. Dashboard fusebox lid - 22. Switches for external lights, trip meter reset and headlamp aiming device.
INDEX
fig. 1
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
DASHBOARD
7
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 8
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Multifunction display
h c m Warning lights on
diesel versions only
On diesel versions the rev counter
end scale value is at 6000 rpm.
fig. 2 - Versions with multifunction display
A0E0312m
fig. 3 - Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display
A0E0422m
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8
A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Reconfigurable multifunction display
c m Warning lights on diesel
versions only
On diesel versions the rev counter
end scale value is at 6000 rpm.
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 9
A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Multifunction display
A0E0870m
fig. 3/b - 1750 TURBO BENZINA versions with reconfigurable multifunction display
A0E0871m
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 3/a - 1750 TURBO BENZINA versions with multifunction display
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
INDEX
A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Reconfigurable multifunction display
9
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 10
ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM
SYMBOLS
Special coloured labels have been attached near or actually on some of the
components of your car. These labels
bear symbols that remind you of the precautions to be taken as regards that particular component.
To further protect you car from theft, it
has been fitted with an engine immobilising system. This system is automatically activated when the electronic
key is removed.
The plate summarising the symbols used
fig. 4 can be found under the bonnet.
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
10
fig. 4
A0E0138m
An electronic device, in fact, is fitted in
each electronic key grip. The device
transmits a radio-frequency signal when
the engine is started through a special
aerial built into the ignition switch on the
dashboard. The modulated signal, which
changes each time the engine is started, is the “password”, by means of
which the control unit recognises the
electronic key and enables to start the
engine.
The code is sent only if the Alfa Romeo
CODE system control unit has recognised
the code transmitted from the electronic key.
If the code has not been recognised correctly, the warning light Y turns on (on
certain versions a dedicated message
is displayed) (see section “Warning
lights and messages”).
In this case, the electronic key should
be removed from the ignition device and
then refitted; if the lock continues, possibly try again with the other keys provided with the car. If it is still not possible to start the car contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services
SAFETY
DEVICES
If the warning light Y turns on this
means that the system is running a selftest (for example for a voltage drop).
The electronic components inside the key may
be damaged if the key is
submitted to sharp knocks.
If the warning light Y stays on, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
IMPORTANT Every electronic key has
its own code, which must be memorised
by the system control unit. To memorise
new keys, up to a maximum of eight,
apply solely to Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services taking with you all the keys in
your possession, the CODE card, a personal identity document and the car’s
possession documents. The codes of the
keys not provided during the new memorising procedure are erased from the
memory. This is to ensure that any lost
or stolen keys can no longer be used
to start the car.
If 2 seconds after fitting
the electronic key into
the ignition switch, the
warning light Y comes on again
flashing (on certain versions a
dedicated message is displayed), this means that the
code of the keys has not been
memorised, thus the car is not
protected by the Alfa Romeo
CODE system against attempted theft. In this case, contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service
to have the key codes memorised.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Each time the electronic key is fitted into the ignition switch, the Alfa Romeo
CODE system control unit sends a recognition code to the engine control unit
to deactivate the inhibitor.
Warning light Y coming on
when driving
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
OPERATION
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 11
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
11
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
12
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 12
ELECTRONIC KEY
CODE CARD
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The CODE card fig. 5 delivered with the
keys, contains the mechanical code A
and the electronic one B.
The code numbers on the CODE card
must be kept in a safe place, not in the
car.
If the car changes owner, the new owner must
be given the electronic
key and the CODE card.
fig. 5
A0E0023m
ELECTRONIC KEY fig. 6
The car is delivered with two copies of
the key with remote control.
The electronic key operates the ignition
switch.
Button Á shall be used for central locking of doors, tailgate and fuel cap with
alarm activation (for versions/markets,
where provided).
fig. 6
A0E0021m
Button Ë shall be used for central opening of doors and fuel cap with alarm deactivation (for versions/markets, where
provided).
Button ` shall be used to open the
tailgate.
When unlocking the doors by pressing
button Ë, if by 2.5 minutes no door or
the boot is opened, the system will automatically lock the car again.
Pagina 13
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
The electronic key fig. 7 is fitted with
a metal insert A, that can be extracted
by pressing button B.
❒ windows opening/closing;
❒ switch (for versions/markets, where
provided) for deactivating the passenger’s air bag and knees air bag
(for versions/markets, where provided);
❒ safe-lock device (for versions/markets, where provided);
A0E0022m
fig. 7
IMPORTANT Never expose the electronic key to direct sunlight: risk of damages.
IMPORTANT Remote control frequency may be disturbed by radio transmissions outside the car (e.g. mobile
phones, hams, etc…). In this event remote control may be failing.
❒ emergency unlocking of electronic
key from ignition switch.
WARNING
Never leave the electronic key unattended
to prevent anyone, especially
children, from holding it and
pressing button B-fig. 7 inadvertently.
fig. 8
A0E0021m
Replacing the battery of the
electronic key
If when pressing button Ë, Á, or `,
control given is refused or failing, the
battery should be replaced with an
equivalent one that can be purchased at
common stores.
To be sure that the battery is to be replaced, try again to press buttons Ë,
Á, or ` with another electronic key.
When closing the tailgate again, protection sensors are restored and direction indicators will flash once.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
❒ central door locking/unlocking
through the driver's door lock (with
run-down car battery only the driver's
door will open);
SAFETY
DEVICES
The metal insert operates the following:
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
13
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 14
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
SAFE LOCK DEVICE
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
This safety system inhibits the operation
of the car door handles.
14
fig. 9
A0E0035m
To change the battery fig. 9 proceed
as follows:
❒ take out the metal insert A by pressing button B;
❒ remove the snap-fitted case Bfig. 10 (red) by levering with the
metal insert A of the electronic key
in the point shown in the figure;
❒ remove the battery D-fig. 9 from
the case taking note of the bias (in
the figure the positive pole is facing
downwards);
❒ put the new battery into the case
with the correct bias;
❒ put the case down into its seat and
refit the metal insert.
fig. 10
A0E0242m
IMPORTANT Never touch the electric
contacts of the key and prevent fluid or
dust infiltration inside it.
Used batteries are
harmful to the environment. They should be
disposed of as specified by law
in the special containers provided, or take them to Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
which will deal with their disposal.
The safe lock device represents top protection against break in attempts. Activate it each time you park the car.
WARNING
Once the safe lock device has been actuated,
doors cannot be opened from
inside the car in any way
whatsoever. For this reason,
make sure there are no persons left inside the car.
WARNING
If the key battery is
flat, the safe lock device can only be deactivated by
unlocking the doors by turning
the metal insert of the key into the driver’s door lock or by
fitting the key into the ignition
device.
fig. 11
A0E0021m
Device activation
The device is automatically activated on
every door in the following cases:
❒ turning twice the metal insert of the
electronic key into the driver door to
locking position;
❒ pressing twice the electronic key button Á.
Should one of the doors be not perfectly closed, the safe lock device is not activated, thus preventing that a person
getting into the car from the open door
remains blocked inside the passenger’s
compartment when he/she closes the
door.
Device deactivation
The device is deactivated automatically
on every door in the following cases:
❒ when unlocking the doors;
❒ when unlocking only the driver’s door
(where possible);
❒ when fitting the electronic key into
the ignition switch.
SAFETY
DEVICES
If the car battery is
down, the safe lock device can be activated only using the metal insert of the
electronic key on the driver’s
door revolving plug: in this
case the safe lock device is active on front passenger’s door
and rear doors.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
Device activation is signalled by three
flashes of the led on the driver’s door
panel and, only if activated by pressing
the electronic key button Á, of direction
indicators.
WARNING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 15
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
15
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
16
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 16
The main functions that can be activated with the electronic key or with the emergency metals insert are the following:
Doors,
tailgate
and fuel cap
unlocking
Doors,
tailgate
and fuel cap
locking
Window
Window
Safe lock
and sunroof
and sunroof (for versions/
opening
closing
markets,
(for versions/ (for versions/
where
markets,
markets,
provided)
where
where
provided)
provided)
Electronic
key
Brief press on
button Ë (*)
Brief press on
button Á
Prolonged
pressing
(over 2 seconds)
on button Ë
Emergency
metal
insert
Electronic key
rotation
clockwise (*)
Electronic key
rotation
counter-clockwise
Electronic key
rotation
for over
2 seconds
clockwise
Direction
indicators
flashing
2 flashings
1 flashing
2 flashings
Led on
driver’s door
Deterrence
led off
Turning on fixed
for 3 seconds,
followed by
deterrence led
flashing
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
–
Double pressing
(within 1 second)
on button Á
Electronic key Double electronic
rotation
key rotation
within 1
for over
second
2 seconds
counter-clockwise counter-clockwise
1 flashing
Deterrence led off Turning on fixed
for about
3 seconds,
followed by
deterrence led
flashing
Tailgate
opening
Brief press on
button `
–
3 flashings
2 flashings
Double
flashing,
followed by
deterrence led
flashing
–
(*) On certain versions it is possible to set the option “Unlocking front door only” through the “Setup Menu” (see paragraph “Reconfigurable multifunction
display” in this section). In this case pressing button Á and turning the metal insert of the electronic key counter-clockwise will unlock the driver’s door
only. To unlock all the doors, press twice button Ë within 1 second or turn twice the metal insert of the electronic key counter-clockwise.
IMPORTANT Window and sunroof opening operations are a consequence of a door unlocking control. Window and sunroof closing operations are a consequence of a door locking control.
Pagina 17
WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
The alarm comes into action in the following cases:
❒ unlawful opening of doors, bonnet
and boot (perimetral protection);
❒ attempt to start the engine with
unauthorised electronic key;
❒ battery cable cutting;
❒ presence of moving bodies in the passenger’s compartment (volumetric
protection);
❒ abnormal raising/sloping of the car
(for versions/markets where applicable);
Volumetric and anti-raising protections
can be cut off by operating the front ceiling light controls(see paragraph “Volumetric protection/Anti-raising sensor”
on the following pages).
A maximum number of sound/sight cycles is however envisaged. Once the
alarm cycle is over, the system will restore its normal operation.
IMPORTANT Central door unlocking
by the emergency electronic key will not
deactivate the alarm, therefore with
alarm on the siren will activate when
opening one of the doors or the boot.
To deactivate the siren see paragraph
“How to deactivate the alarm”.
IMPORTANT The engine immobiliser
function is guaranteed by the Alfa
Romeo CODE system, which is automatically activated when the electronic
key is removed from the ignition device.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Depending on the markets, the triggering of the alarm will activate the siren
and the hazard warning lights (for about
26 seconds). The methods of operation
and the number of cycles may vary depending on the versions/markets.
fig. 12
A0E0025m
HOW TO ACTIVATE
THE ALARM
With the doors, bonnet and boot shut
and electronic key removed from ignition switch, point the electronic key in
the direction of the car, then press and
release the button Á.
With the exception of certain markets,
the system sounds a “beep” and the
doors are locked.
Engagement of the alarm is preceded
by a self-diagnostic test characterised by
a different flashing of the round led located around the door lock/unlock button (see fig. 12): if a fault is detected the system sounds a further warning
“beep”.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
ALARM
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
17
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
18
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 18
Surveillance
When the system has been turned on,
the led A-fig. 12 will flash to indicate
that the system is in the surveillance
mode. The led will flash continuously
while the system is under surveillance.
IMPORTANT Operation of the alarm
is adapted at the origin to the regulations of the different countries.
Self-diagnosis and monitoring
of doors/bonnet/boot
If, after the alarm has been activated, a
second acoustic signal is heard, turn the
system off by pressing button Ë, check
for proper locking of doors, bonnet and
boot, then turn the system on again by
pressing button Á.
Otherwise if a door or bonnet/boot lid
is not correctly closed it will not be controlled by the system. If the control signal is repeated when the doors and bonnet/boot are closed properly this means
that the self-diagnosis function has detected a system operating fault, in which
case it is necessary to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
HOW TO DEACTIVATE
THE ALARM
Press button Ë. The system will react as
follows (with the exception of certain
markets):
❒ two brief flashes of the direction indicators;
❒ two brief “beeps”;
❒ door unlocking.
The alarm can be deactivated by fitting
the electronic key into the ignition
switch.
IMPORTANT On certain versions any
attempt to break in detected by the system will be indicated by a warning message on the instrument panel display
when fitting the electronic key into the
ignition switch.
fig. 13
A0E0480m
VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION/
ANTI-RAISING SENSORS
To make sure that the protection sensors
are working properly, check that windows and sunroof (for versions/markets,
where provided) are shut.
This function can be cut out (for example if you leave animals on the car) by
pressing button A-fig. 13 on the front
ceiling light within 1 minute after instrument panel turning off.
When this function is off the button led
will turn on. Volumetric protection/antiraising sensors cut out shall be repeated
at each instrument panel turning off.
To deactivate the alarm system completely (for instance during prolonged
inactivity of the car) simply lock the car
by rotating the metal insert (provided
inside the electronic key) into the driver’s door lock.
The ignition device is located on the
dashboard and it consists of the following:
MINISTERIAL
HOMOLOGATION
In keeping with the laws in force in each
country on the subject of radio frequency, for markets in which the transmitter needs to be marked the certification number is given on the component. For certain versions/markets, the
code may also be marked on the transmitter and/or on the receiver.
SAFETY
DEVICES
IGNITION DEVICE
❒ electronic key reading device Afig. 14 (set near the steering wheel);
❒ button START/STOP (set under the
electronic key reading device).
IMPORTANT To prevent running
down the battery do not leave the electronic key into the ignition device when
the engine is off.
WARNING
If the ignition device is
tampered with (for example during an attempted
break-in) have it checked over
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services before travelling again.
A0E0219m
fig. 14
WARNING
When leaving the car
always remove the
electronic key from the ignition
device to prevent any passenger in the car from inadvertently activating the controls.
Remember to engage the
handbrake and if the car is facing uphill, first gear and if the
car is facing downhill, reverse.
Never leave children unattended in the car.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
HOW TO CUT OFF
THE ALARM SYSTEM
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 19
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
19
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 20
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
INDEX
TURNING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL OFF
Proceed as follows:
With engine off and clutch and brake
pedals released, press button START/
STOP or remove the electronic key
from the ignition device.
❒ fit the electronic key into the ignition
device;
SAFETY
DEVICES
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
20
TURNING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL ON
fig. 15
A0E0028m
ENGINE STARTING
See paragraph “Engine starting” in section “Correct use of the car”.
START/STOP BUTTON
fig. 15
Button START/STOP, set on the
dashboard, controls car electric systems
and engine starting/stopping.
Button START/STOP is fitted with
knurled ring and led. When the led and
the instrument panel are on, the engine
can be started.
❒ if the electronic key is fitted yet, press
button START/STOP without
pressing the clutch or brake pedal.
To safeguard the battery, when leaving
the car with the instrument panel on,
electric and electronic devices will be deactivated after approx. 1 hour.
IMPORTANT Fit completely the electronic key into the ignition device until
it locks into place.
IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the instrument panel fails to turn on.
IMPORTANT If when fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, the
warning light Y on the instrument panel comes on (on certain versions together with a message on the display),
check whether the electronic key is the
proper one and then try to refit it into
the ignition device. If the problem persists contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
A few seconds after the instrument panel display will turn off gradually.
IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services if the instrument panel fails to turn off.
The steering column lock will engage
5 seconds after removing the electronic key from the ignition device and if the
following conditions are present:
❒ engine off;
❒ instrument panel off with car at a
standstill;
❒ electronic key removed from ignition
device.
Disengaging
The steering column lock will disengage
after fitting the electronic key into the
ignition device.
IMPORTANT Switching the engine off
when the car is running will not engage
the steering column lock till next switching off with car stopped. In this event
warning light > (where provided) on the
instrument panel will come on (or as an
alternative, on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed).
IMPORTANT Steering column lock
failure is indicated by the instrument
panel warning light > (where provid-
INSTRUMENTS
IMPORTANT If after trying to turn on
the instrument panel and/or to start the
engine, the instrument panel warning
light > (where provided) (or as an alternative, on certain versions the message "Vehicle protection system not
available" is displayed), repeat the operation moving the steering wheel in order to release the steering lock. The displayed warning message will not impair
steering lock operation.
Rev counter shows engine rpm. The red
zone at the scale bottom indicates that
the engine is running at excessive rpm
dangerous for mechanical components.
Do not drive with the pointer in this area.
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after-market operation
involving steering system or
steering column modifications
(e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affect
performance and safety, cause
the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of
the car with homologation requirements.
REV. COUNTER
IMPORTANT The electronic injection
control system gradually shuts off the
flow of fuel when the engine is “overrevving” (rev counter pointer in the red
area) resulting in a gradual loss of engine power, in order to bring engine rpm
below to the safety limit.
The rev counter may, when the engine
is idling, indicate gradual or sudden increase of engine revs as the case may
be; such behaviour is normal and must
not be interpreted as a faulty condition
as it occurs during normal operation, for
instance when climate control or electric
fan are switched on. In particular, slow
revs variation helps keep the battery
charged.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Engaging
ed) (or as an alternative, on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed). In this event contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
STEERING COLUMN LOCK
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 21
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
21
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 22
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 18
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
This shows the temperature of the engine coolant fluid and begins working
when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
22
fig. 17
A0E00177m
FUEL GAUGE fig. 17
This shows the amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank.
0 - tank empty.
1 - tank full (see the indications given
in paragraph “At the filling station").
The warning light on the fuel level gauge
turns on when about 10 litres fuel are
left in the tank. On certain versions. the
display will show a warning message
when the cruising range is less than 50
km (or 31 mi).
If warning light K starts
flashing when travelling
contact immediately Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
fig. 18
A0E0178m
IMPORTANT The pointer can reach
the red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed,
uphill, fully laden or towing a trailer with
hot outside temperature.
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always
be performed with engine off. Failing to
observe this precaution could cause the
gauge to provide wrong indications.
Should this occur, to restore proper indication just have next refuelling with
the engine off. Otherwise contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
The pointer should normally be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointer
reaches the red sector, reduce your demand on the engine.
The turning on of the warning light u
(on certain versions together with a
message on the display) indicates that
the coolant fluid temperature is too high;
in this case, stop the engine and contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services .
IMPORTANT The pointer can reach
the red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed,
uphill, fully laden or towing a trailer with
hot outside temperature.
Pagina 23
A0E0179m
ENGINE OIL
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
(petrol versions excluded
1750 TURBO BENZINA)
fig. 19
This shows the temperature of the engine oil and begins working when the
oil temperature exceeds approx. 70°C.
If the pointer reaches the red sector, reduce your demand on the engine.
SAFETY
DEVICES
fig. 20
A0E0180m
TURBOCHARGER
PRESSURE GAUGE
(1750 TURBO BENZINA
and diesel versions) fig. 20
This shows the turbocharger pressure
value.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
fig. 19
IMPORTANT The pointer can reach
the red area also for a sum of unfavourable conditions, i.e.: slow speed,
uphill, fully laden or towing a trailer with
hot outside temperature.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
The turning on of the warning light `
when travelling (on certain versions together with a message on the display)
indicates that the oil temperature is too
high; in this case, stop the engine and
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
23
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 24
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
24
fig. 21
A0E0072m
TRIP METER RESET fig. 21
To reset the trip meter, keep button A
pressed for a few seconds.
MANUAL INSTRUMENT
PANEL LIGHT DIMMER
AUTOMATIC INSTRUMENT
PANEL LIGHT DIMMER
With this function it is possible to adjust
on 8 levels the light intensity of the indications given on the instrument panel display, sound system display (for versions/markets, where provided), climate
control system display, radionavigation
system display (for versions/markets,
where provided), and instrument panel
gauges (fuel level gauge, engine oil temperature gauge (petrol versions) or supercharger pressure gauge (diesel versions) and engine coolant temperature
gauge).
To give max. visibility and comfort under whatever driving conditions (e.g.:
lights on in daylight, tunnels, etc…),
the speedometer is fitted with a sensor
for adjusting automatically, after fitting
the electronic key into the ignition device and pressing button START/
STOP, the light intensity of the indications given on the instrument panel
display, sound system display (for versions/markets, where provided), climate
control system display, radionavigation
system display (for versions/markets,
where provided), and instrument panel
gauges (fuel level gauge, engine oil
temperature gauge (petrol versions) or
supercharger pressure gauge (diesel versions) and engine coolant temperature
gauge).
To increase light intensity press briefly
button + on the left-hand stalk, to reduce it press button –: the display will
show an indication and a figure corresponding to the current light intensity
level. This screen will be displayed for
a few seconds and then it will go off.
❒ Scheduled servicing (symbol õ
D-fig. 22).
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
❒ Instrument panel light dimmer.
The “Multifunction display” shows all
the useful information necessary when
driving, more particularly:
fig. 22
A0E0060m
❒ Clock A-fig. 22;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
❒ External temperature B;
Fitting the electronic key into the ignition device will display the total km (or
mi), press button A-fig. 23 for trip meter (or mi).
❒ Speed limit exceeded.
❒ Engine oil level.
INFORMATION ON
STANDARD SCREEN
❒ Total km (or mi) or trip meter C
(when total kilometres (or miles) are
indicated the display will also show
the wording TOT).
❒ Symbol of possible presence of ice on
the road (symbol √ E-fig. 22).
SAFETY
DEVICES
INFORMATION ABOUT CAR
CONDITIONS (at event)
MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 25
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
10:48
fig. 23
A0E0072m
To reset the trip meter (or mi), press for
long button A-fig. 23 during displaying.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
25
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
26
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 26
“SETUP MENU”
Speed limit (SPEED BEEP)
There is also a “Setup Menu” enabling
to perform the adjustments and/or settings described on the following pages
by pressing button MENU and +/–
(see fig. 24). The Setup can be activated by pressing briefly button MENU.
With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h or mph) which,
if exceeded, automatically sounds a
buzzer and displays a specific message
(see section “Warning lights and messages”) to alert the driver. Once the
warning cycle is over the display will
resume the standard screen. The warning message will disappear only after
the car speed slows 5 km/h (5 mph)
below the set speed limit or after pressing briefly the MENU button. This procedure is carried out just once after exceeding the speed limit and it can be repeated only if the car speed slows at
least 5 km/h (5 mph) below the set
speed limit and then it increases until
exceeding the speed limit again.
With the car stopped, the
following settings are
enabled:
❒ Speed limit on/off and speed limit
value.
❒ Clock.
❒ Failure/warning buzzer volume.
❒ “Distance” unit.
With the car running, only the
following setting is enabled:
❒ Speed limit on/off and speed limit
value setting.
fig. 24
A0E0074m
CONTROL BUTTONS
(set on left stalk) fig. 24
MENU
Short push on button: to confirm
the required option and/or to go to next
screen;
Long push on button: to confirm the
required option and to go back to standard screen;
+/– to scroll up/down the “Setup
Menu” options or to increase/decrease
the value displayed on the screen.
When the standard screen is displayed
buttons +/– activate instrument panel light dimming.
This function enables to adjust the clock.
To adjust the clock proceed as follows:
❒ press button MENU until selecting
TIME REG;
❒ press again button MENU: TIME
and clock will flash;
❒ press buttons +/– to adjust time.
Clock is always displayed in 24h mode
(24 hours).
Failure/warning buzzer
volume (BUZZ)
With this function the volume of the
buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indications can be adjusted according to 4 levels. The buzzer can
be adjusted and excluded.
Proceed as follows:
❒ press button MENU until selecting
BUZZ: the display will show BUZZ
and a figure corresponding to the
buzzer volume level;
❒ press again button MENU: the figure will flash;
❒ press buttons +/– to adjust the
buzzer volume.
To mute the buzzer set the volume level to “0” using buttons +/–.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Clock (TIME REG)
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
❒ press button MENU until selecting
SPEED BEEP: the display will show
SPEED BEEP and setting condition
(ON = speed limit on/ OFF= speed
limit off);
❒ press again button MENU: ON (or
OFF) will flash;
❒ press buttons +/– to select ON or
OFF;
❒ selecting ON will make the last
speed limit set flashing on the display;
❒ press buttons +/– to adjust the value.
IMPORTANT The possible setting is between 30 and 250 km/h (or between
20 and 150 mph) depending on the unit
set previously (see paragraph “Units” described later). Every press (pulse) of the
button +/– increases or decreases the
value by 5 units. Keeping the button +/–
pressed obtains automatic fast increase or
decrease. When you are near the required
setting complete adjustment with single
presses.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 27
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
27
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
28
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 28
Distance unit (UNIT)
With this function it is possible to set the
required distance unit (km or mi).
To set the distance unit, proceed as follows:
❒ press button MENU until selecting
UNIT: the display will show UNIT
and “km” or “mi”;
❒ press again button MENU: “km”
(or “mi”) will flash;
❒ press buttons +/– to set the required distance unit.
Scheduled servicing
IMPORTANT The Service schedule includes car maintenance every 35,000
km (or 21,000 mi); this is shown automatically, with the electronic key into the ignition device starting from
2,000 km (or 1,240 mi) from this
deadline and it will be displayed in km
or miles according to the unit set. When
a scheduled service interval (“coupon”)
is near to come, fitting the electronic key
into the ignition device will display a
message followed by the number of
km/mi to go before car servicing. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to
carry out any service operation provided by the Service schedule or by the Annual inspection plan, and to reset the
display.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
INDICATION
Fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, the display will show for a
few seconds the engine oil level. At this
stage, to clear this indication and to go
to next screen, press button MENU.
Low oil level will be indicated by a dedicated warning message on the display.
IMPORTANT Check the proper engine oil level on the dipstick (see paragraph “Checking levels” in section “Car
maintenance”).
IMPORTANT Proper engine oil level
shall be checked with the car on level
ground.
IMPORTANT To read the correct oil
level after fitting the electronic key, wait
for about 2 seconds before starting the
engine.
IMPORTANT Engine oil level could increase after a long stop.
This function enables to turn on/off
(ON/OFF) the lights of the rev
counter and instruments.
This function can be activated (only with
electronic key fitted into ignition device,
external lights on, and speedometer
built-in sensor in poor outside light setting), by pressing for long button –.
When this function is on, the display will
show “NIGHT PAN ON”.
Once on, the NIGHT PAN function
can be deactivated as follows:
❒ by long press on button + (also with
external lights off);
❒ removing the electronic key from the
ignition device.
When this function is off the display
shows “NIGHT PAN OFF”.
Messages “NIGHT PAN ON” or
“NIGHT PAN OFF” stay on the display for a few seconds, then they will
go off. To stop displaying before time,
briefly press button MENU.
SAFETY
DEVICES
After the engine oil level, the display will
show for a few seconds a message indicating the procedure to follow to start
the engine (PRESS PEDAL AND
START: press brake or clutch pedal and
then press button START/STOP to
start the engine).
ILLUMINATION OF REV
COUNTER/INSTRUMENTS
(NIGHT PAN)
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
MESSAGES DISPLAYED
AT STARTING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 29
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
29
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
30
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 30
INFORMATION ABOUT CAR
CONDITIONS (at event)
RECONFIGURABLE
MULTIFUNCTION
DISPLAY
❒ Scheduled servicing;
❒ Trip computer;
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The “Reconfigurable multifunction display” shows all the useful information
necessary when driving, more particularly:
INFORMATION ON
STANDARD SCREEN
❒ Clock A-fig. 24/a;
❒ External temperature B;
❒ Date C;
❒ Partial km (or mi) covered D;
❒ Total km (or mi) covered E;
❒ Indications on car conditions F (e.g.:
doors open, or possible ice on road,
etc. ...).
❒ Instrument panel light dimmer;
❒ Engine oil level;
fig. 24/a
A0E0015m
The date C in the middle of the display
will stay on until another display info is
activated (e.g. “Light dimmer”) or other information on car conditions.
With key removed (when opening when
of the front doors) the display will turn
on and show for a few seconds the time,
covered km (or miles) and outside temperature.
IMPORTANT When opening one of
the front doors, the display will show for
a few seconds the time, the km covered
and the external temperature.
MENU
❒ briefly press button MENU to select
the main menu option to set;
❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to select the new setting;
❒ briefly press button MENU to store
new setting and go back to the previously selected option of the main
menu.
Short push on button: to confirm
the required option and/or to go to next
screen;
Long push on button: to confirm the
required option and/or to go to previous screen;
+/– to scroll up/down the “Setup
Menu” options or to increase/decrease
the value displayed on the screen.
When the standard screen is displayed
buttons +/– activate instrument panel light dimming.
fig. 25
A0E0074m
“SETUP MENU”
There is also a “Setup Menu” enabling
to perform the adjustments and/or settings described on the following pages
by pressing button MENU and +/–
(see fig. 25).The Setup can be activated by pressing briefly button MENU.
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a “circular fashion”
fig. 26.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Selecting an option of the main
menu without submenu:
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
CONTROL BUTTONS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 31
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
31
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
32
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 32
Selecting an option of the main
menu with submenu:
❒ briefly press button MENU to display
the first submenu option;
❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to scroll all submenu options;
❒ briefly press button MENU to select
the displayed submenu option and to
enter the corresponding setup menu;
❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to select the new setting of this
submenu option;
❒ briefly press button MENU to store
the new setting and go back to the
previously selected submenu option.
Selecting “Date” and “Clock”:
❒ briefly press button MENU to select
the first value to change (e.g. hours/
minutes or year/month/day);
❒ operate buttons + or – (by single
press) to select the new setting;
❒ briefly press button MENU to store
the new setting and to go to the next
setup menu option, if this is the last
one you will go back to the previously
selected option of the main menu.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
INDICATION
Fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, the display will show for a
few seconds the engine oil level. At this
stage, to clear this indication and to go
to next screen, press button MENU.
Low oil level will be indicated by a dedicated warning message on the display.
IMPORTANT Check the proper engine oil level on the dipstick (see paragraph “Checking levels” in section “Car
maintenance”).
IMPORTANT Proper engine oil level
shall be checked with the car on level
ground.
IMPORTANT To read the correct oil
level after fitting the electronic key, wait
for about 2 seconds before starting the
engine.
IMPORTANT Engine oil level could increase after a long stop.
Pagina 33
SPEED LIMIT
LIGHT SENS.
RESET TRIP B
CLOCK
SERVICE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
QUIT SETUP
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
Briefly press button MENU to access navigation from the standard screen. To surf the menu press buttons + or –. For safety reasons, when the car is running, it is possible to access only the reduced menu (for setting “Speed limit”). When the car is stationary
access to the whole menu is enabled. With the Radionavigation system it is only possible to adjust/set the following functions: “Speed
Limit”, “Light sensor sensitivity ” (for versions/markets, where provided) and “S.B.R. buzzer reactivation” (for versions/markets,
where provided). The other functions are shown on the Radionavigation system display, that shall be use to adjust/set them as required.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
10:48
SAFETY
DEVICES
8-04-2009
MODE 12/24
KEYS VOL.
BEEP VOL.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
DATE
AUDIO RPT.
INDEP. BOOT
LANGUAGE
UNITS
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK FDA
A0E0218g
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
fig. 26
33
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
34
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 34
Speed limit
With this function it is possible to set the
car speed limit (km/h or mph) which,
if exceeded, automatically sounds a
buzzer and displays a special message
(see section “Warning lights and messages”) to alert the driver.
To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:
IMPORTANT The possible setting is
between 30 and 250 km/h (or between 20 and 150 mph) depending on
the unit set previously (see paragraph
“Units” described later). Every press
(pulse) of the button +/– increases or
decreases the value by 5 units. Keeping
the button +/– pressed obtains automatic fast increase or decrease. When
you are near the required setting complete adjustment with single presses.
Automatic headlight daylight
sensor (Light Sens.)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
With this function it is possible to adjust
the light sensor sensitivity according to
3 levels.
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
To abort the setting:
❒ briefly press button MENU : the previously set level will flash on the display;
❒ press button +: the display will show
ON;
❒ briefly press button MENU: the display will show ON;
❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;
❒ briefly press button MENU then, use
buttons +/– to set the required
speed (during setting the value will
flash).
❒ press button –: the display will show
OFF;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
❒ briefly press button MENU: the display will show OFF;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
Reset Trip B
This function enables to select Trip B reset mode (Automatic or Manual).
For further information see paragraph
“Trip computer”.
Proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU: “hours”
will show on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;
❒ briefly press button MENU: “minutes” will flash on the display;
❒ press button + or – to adjust;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
Clock mode (Mode 12/24)
This function is used to set the clock in
the 12h or 24h mode.
To adjust proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU: 12h or
24h (according to previous setting)
will show on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
SAFETY
DEVICES
This function enables to set the clock.
IMPORTANT Every press (pulse) on
the button +/– increases/decreases by
one unit. Keeping button +/– pressed
obtains fast increase/decrease. When
you are near the required setting complete adjustment with single presses.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
Setting the clock (Clock)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 35
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
35
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 36
Setting the date (Date)
This function enables to update the date
(year - month - day).
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
Proceed as follows:
36
❒ briefly press button MENU: “year”
will flash on the display;
Audio Info Repetition
(Audio Rpt.)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
This function enables to display sound
system information.
❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;
❒ Radio: selected radio station frequency or RDS message, automatic
tuning activation or AutoSTore;
❒ briefly press button MENU: “month”
will flash on the display;
❒ Audio CD, MP3 CD: selected track
number;
❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;
❒ CD Changer: CD number and track
number;
❒ briefly press button MENU: “day”
will flash on the display;
❒ press button + or – to adjust;
IMPORTANT Every press (pulse) on
the button +/– increases/decreases by
one unit. Keeping button +/– pressed
obtains fast increase/decrease. When
you are near the required setting complete adjustment with single presses.
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
To activate/deactivate (ON/OFF) info displaying proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU: the display will show ON or OFF (according to previous setting);
❒ press button + or – to select the required source;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
According to the audio source selected,
below the time will be displayed the
symbol of the current source.
Automatic central door locking
(Door lock)
With this function it is possible to unlock
the boot independently from doors.
With this function it is possible to unlock
only the driver’s door by pressing the
electronic key button Ë.
When activated (ON), this function
locks automatically the doors when the
car speed exceeds 20 km/h.
With this function active (ON), it is
however possible to unlock the other
doors by pressing the door unlock button on central console.
To activate/deactivate (ON/OFF) this
function proceed as follows:
When the function is enabled, the trunk
opens by pressing ` on the electronic
key, or by acting on the lever located under the left back seat (refer to “Boot”
paragraph in this chapter).
To activate independent boot function
(ON) or deactivate it (OFF), proceed
as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU : ON or
OFF (according to previous setting)
will flash on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
To activate/deactivate (ON/OFF) this
function proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU: ON or
OFF (according to previous setting)
will flash on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
❒ briefly press button MENU: ON or
OFF (according to previous setting)
will flash on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
Function activation is indicated by the
circular led around the button q.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Driver’s door unlocking
(Unlock Fda)
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
Independent boot unlocking
(Indep. Boot)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 37
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
37
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
38
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 38
Units
Consumption
Temperature
With this function it is possible to set the
units for distance covered (km or mi),
fuel consumption (l/100 km, km/l or
mpg) and temperature (°C or °F).
If the distance unit set is km (see previous paragraph) the display will enable
to set the fuel consumption unit (l/100
km, km/l or mpg).
This function enables to set the temperature unit (°C or °F).
Distance
If the distance unit set is “mi” (see previous paragraph) fuel consumption will
be displayed “mpg”.
❒ briefly press button MENU: °C or °F
(according to previous setting) will
show on the display;
In this case the option “Cons.Unit” of the
“Setup Menu” can be selected but it is
locked on “mpg”.
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
To set the required unit proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU: “km” or
“mi” (according to previous setting)
will show on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
To set the required unit proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU: “km/l”
or “l/100 km” (according to previous setting) will show on the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
To set the required unit proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
Adjusting the button volume
(Keys Vol.)
Display messages can be shown in the
following languages: Italian, English,
German, Portuguese, Spanish, French,
Dutch and Brazilian.
With this function the volume of the
buzzer accompanying any failure/warning indication can be adjusted
according to 8 levels.
With this function the volume of the
roger-beep accompanying the activation
of certain buttons can be adjusted according to 8 levels.
To set the required language proceed as
follows:
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
To adjust the volume proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU, the previously set “level” will show on the
display;
❒ briefly press button MENU, the previously set “level” will show on the
display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;
❒ press button + or – to select the required volume;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
❒ briefly press button MENU , the previously set “language” will show on
the display;
❒ press button + or – to select the required language;
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Adjusting the failure/warning
buzzer volume (Beep Vol.)
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
Selecting the language
(Language)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 39
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
39
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
40
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 40
Scheduled Servicing (Service)
Through this function it is possible to display information connected to proper car
servicing.
Proceed as follows:
❒ briefly press button MENU : service
in km or mi, according to previous
setting, will be displayed (see paragraph “Units”);
❒ briefly press button MENU to go
back to the menu screen or press the
button for long to go back to the standard screen.
IMPORTANT The Service schedule includes car maintenance every 35,000 km
(or 21,000 mi); this is shown automatically, with the electronic key into the ignition device starting from 2,000 km (or
1,240 mi) from this deadline and it will
be displayed in km or miles according to
the unit set. When a scheduled service interval (“coupon”) is near to come, fitting
the electronic key into the ignition device
will display a message followed by the
number of km/mi to go before car servicing. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to carry out any service operation
provided by the Service schedule or by the
Annual inspection plan, and to reset the
display.
Reactivating the S.B.R.
(Seat Belt Reminder) buzzer
(Beep Seatb.)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
This function is displayed only after the
system has been deactivated by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
Exit Menu (Quit setup)
Selecting this option will bring back to
standard screen.
ILLUMINATION OF REV
COUNTER/INSTRUMENTS
(NIGHT PANEL)
This function enables to turn on/off
(ON/OFF) the lights of the rev counter
and instruments. This function can be activated (only with electronic key fitted into ignition device, external lights on, and
speedometer built-in sensor in poor outside light setting), by pressing for long button –. When this function is on, the display will show a warning message. Once
on, the NIGHT PANEL function can be
deactivated as follows:
❒ by long press on button + (also with
external lights off);
❒ removing the electronic key from the
ignition device.
When function is off the display will show
a warning message.
Messages stay on the display for a few
seconds, then they will go off. To stop
displaying before time, briefly press button MENU.
10:48
Pagina 41
TRIP COMPUTER
General features
The “Trip computer” displays information (with electronic key fitted into ignition device) relating to the operating status of
the car. This function comprises the “Trip A” concerning the “complete mission” of the car (journey) and “Trip B” concerning the partial mission of the car; this latter function (as shown in fig. 27) is “contained” within the complete mission.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
8-04-2009
SAFETY
DEVICES
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
End of partial mission
Start of new
partial mission
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new
partial mission
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
˙
End of partial mission
Start of new
partial mission
TRIP B
˙
˙
˙
fig. 27
Reset TRIP B
TRIP B
˙
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
Reset TRIP B
˙
TRIP B
˙
˙
Trip A
INDEX
Reset Trip A
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset Trip A
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
Both functions are resettable (reset - start of new mission).
41
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
42
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 42
The “Trip A” displays the figures relating
to:
❒ Average consumption
Values displayed
Average consumption
❒ Average speed
Represents the indicative average of consumptions from the beginning of the
new mission.
❒ Travel time
Current consumption
❒ Range
This value shows instant fuel consumption (this value is updated second by
second). If parking the car with engine
on, the display will show “- - - -”.
❒ Current consumption
❒ Travel Distance
“Trip B” displays information concerning:
❒ Travel Distance B
❒ Average consumption B
❒ Average speed B
❒ Travel time B.
The display will show “- - - -“ in the following cases:
❒ value lower than 50 km (30mi);
❒ car left parked with engine running
for long.
This value shows the car average speed
as a function of the overall time elapsed
since the start of the new mission.
IMPORTANT The variation of the autonomy value can be influenced by different factors: driving style (see what is
described in paragraph “Driving style”
in the chapter “Correct use of the car”),
type of route (highways, urban, mountain, etc…), use conditions of the car
(load transported, tire pressure, etc…).
What was described previously must be
taken in consideration when planning
a trip.
Travel time
Travel Distance
This value shows the time elapsed since
the start of the new mission (driving
time).
This value shows the distance covered
from the start of the new mission.
Average speed
Range
This value shows the distance in km (or
mi) that the car can still cover before
needing fuel, assuming that driving conditions are kept unvaried.
Each time the battery is connected and
each time a new mission is started (reset), the display will show “0.0”.
Pagina 43
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
New mission (reset)
Reset can be:
TRIP BUTTON
Button TRIP fig. 28, set on the right
steering column stalk shall be used (with
electronic key into ignition device) to enter the “Trip A” and “Trip B” function.
To scroll the values of each option use
buttons set aside the stalk.
fig. 28
A0E0076m
Button TRIP shall also be used to reset
the “Trip A” and “Trip B” functions to
start a new mission:
❒ short push: to display the different
values;
❒ long push: to reset and then start
a new mission.
To scroll the Trip Computer options,
briefly press buttons - and ..
IMPORTANT “Trip A” reset will also
reset the “Trip B” function, whereas
“Trip B” reset will only reset the information associated with this function.
fig. 29
A0E0052m
Every Trip computer screen displays two
options of the active Trip (Trip A or Trip
B); one option is displayed at the top of
the screen, the other one at the bottom
(see fig. 29).
In the same screen it is not possible to
have displayed at the same time the
same option at the top and at the bottom of the screen.
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
❒ “automatic” reset is performed when
the trip distance reaches 9999.9 km
(or mi), when travel time reaches
99.59 (99 hours and 59 minutes)
or after disconnecting and then reconnecting the battery.
SAFETY
DEVICES
❒ “manual” reset is performed by the
driver by pressing button TRIP;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:48
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
43
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
44
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 44
Briefly press button TRIP to select the
two Trip computer modes; use button
- to scroll the options at the top of the
display, use button .. to scroll the options at the bottom of the display.
Start of journey procedure
(reset)
Press briefly button TRIP to go from
Trip A to Trip B.
With electronic key into ignition device,
to reset the “Trip A” press and keep
pressed button TRIP for over 2 seconds.
Trip A and Trip B reset are independent.
Reset Trip A
IMPORTANT Reset can be automatic only in the following cases:
❒ when the “Travel Distance” reaches
9999.9 km or the “Travel Time”
reaches 99.59 (99 hours and 59
minutes);
❒ after disconnecting/reconnecting the
battery.
At Trip A reset a warning message will
be displayed.
IMPORTANT Trip A reset will not reset “Range” and “Current Consumption”.
Reset Trip B
As concerns the Trip B values, it is possible to select through the “Setup
Menu” the reset mode (Manual or Automatic) (see paragraph “Setup Menu”
on previous pages):
❒ manual reset: press and keep pressed
button TRIP for over 2 seconds.
❒ automatic reset: it takes place each
time the electronic key is fitted into
the ignition device.
At Trip B reset a warning message will
be displayed.
IMPORTANT Trip B reset will not reset “Range” and “Current Consumption”.
001-045 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:48
Pagina 45
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
SEATS
SAFETY
DEVICES
MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE
FRONT SEATS fig. 31
Upholstery of your car
has been designed to
withstand wear deriving from common use of the car.
You are however recommended
to avoid strong and/or continuous scratching with clothing
accessories such as metallic
buckles, studs, Velcro fastenings and the like, since these
items cause circumscribed stress
of the cover fabric that could
lead to yarn breaking, and damage the cover as a consequence.
fig. 31
A0E0020m
Moving the seat backwards
or forwards
Lift the lever A (on the inner side of the
seat) and push the seat forwards or
backwards: in the driving position the
arms should rest on the rim of the steering wheel.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
NOTE When starting the engine and
for a short time, if you have recalled the
plan view by pressing the TRIP button,
dashes will be displayed instead of
"OK/NO". This is normal since the system is checking tyre inflation pressure
values.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
On versions fitted with T.P.M.S. system
(Tyre pressure Monitoring System) (see
paragraph “T.P.M.S. system” in this section), after Trip A and Trip B info, the
screen with tyre pressure condition is displayed (see fig. 30).
Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.
INDEX
A0E0053m
WARNING LIGHTS CORRECT USE
AND MESSAGES OF THE CAR
WARNING
fig. 30
45
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
46
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 46
WARNING
Once you have released the lever, check
that the seat is firmly locked
in the runners by trying to
move it back and forth. Failure
to lock the seat in place could
result in the seat moving suddenly and the driver losing
control of the car.
Height adjustment
Move repeatedly lever B upwards or
downwards to achieve the required
height.
IMPORTANT Adjustment must be carried out only seated at the driver’s seat.
Back rest angle adjustment
fig. 32
A0E0024m
Back rest angle adjustment
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Use lever E. Pulling the lever upwards
the seat will bend back by one position.
Pushing the lever downwards the seat
will bend forward.
Seat warming
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Turn the knob C until obtaining the required position.
With electronic key fitted into ignition
device, turn ring nut A-fig. 32 to turn
this function on/off.
Lumbar adjustment
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Seat warming can be adjusted to 3 different levels (0 = seat warming off).
Turn the knob D until obtaining the required position.
A0E0189m
fig. 33
ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLE
FRONT SEATS fig. 33
WARNING
Only make adjustments
when the car is stationary.
Storing driver’s seat/door
mirror positions
Multifunction control A:
Buttons C allows to store and recall three
different driver’s seat and door mirror positions. Storing and recalling are only possible with electronic key fitted into ignition device.
– vertical seat movement;
– longitudinal seat movement;
B: Back rest angle adjustment;
C: Driver’s seat positions store buttons;
D: Lombar adjustment.
IMPORTANT Seat can only be adjusted when the electronic key is fitted
into the ignition device and for about 1
minute from removing it or after pressing button START/STOP. After opening the door the seat can be adjusted for
about 3 minutes or until closing the
door.
Stored position can only be recalled for
about 3 minutes after opening the doors
and for about 1 minute after removing
the electronic key from the ignition device.
To store the required seat position, adjust it as required then press the button
corresponding to position to store for a
few seconds.
To recall the stored position, press briefly
the corresponding button.
Storing a new position will automatically
clear the one stored previously using the
same button.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
– rear seat height adjustment;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
– front seat height adjustment;
SAFETY
DEVICES
Seat controls are the
following:
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 47
fig. 33/a
A0E0421m
FRONT SEATS SPORTS
fig. 33/a (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Certain versions are fitted with manually or electrically adjustable front seats
with sports configuration.
To adjust these seats see the indications
contained in previous paragraphs.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
47
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 48
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are adjustable in height
and they lock automatically in the required position.
To adjust height proceed as follows:
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SAFETY
DEVICES
FRONT HEAD RESTRAINTS
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
48
❒ to raise: raise the head restraint until hearing the locking click.
❒ to lower: press button A and lower
the head restraint.
If required, head restraints can be removed as follows:
❒ raise head restraints to max. height;
❒ press buttons A and B-fig. 34 (set
aside the two head restraint supports) then remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.
A0E0473m
fig. 34
WARNING
Remember that the
head restraints should
be adjusted to support the
back of your head and not
your neck. Only in this position
do they exert their protective
action. To optimise head restraint protective action, adjust
the seat back upright and keep
your head as close as possible
to the head restraint.
fig. 35
A0E0479m
REAR HEAD RESTRAINTS
Rear seats are fitted with two head restraints.
Certain versions are fitted with height-adjustable head restraint also for the central
seat (see previous paragraph for height
adjustment).
If required, head restraints can be removed as follows:
❒ raise head restraints to max. height;
❒ press buttons A and B-fig. 35 (set
aside the two head restraint supports) then remove the head restraints by pulling them upwards.
Release the lever A-fig. 36 pushing it
downwards, then adjust the steering
wheel as required. To lock the steering
wheel, push lever A upwards.
A0E0136m
fig. 36
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after-market operation
involving steering system or
steering column modifications
(e.g.: installation of anti-theft
device) that could badly affect
performance and safety, cause
the lapse of warranty and also result in non-compliance of
the car with homologation requirements.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The steering wheel can be adjusted both
axially and in height.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
Any adjustment of the
steering wheel position
must be carried out only with
the car stationary and the engine turned off.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
STEERING WHEEL
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 49
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
49
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
50
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 50
REARVIEW
MIRRORS
DRIVING MIRROR
The mirror is fitted with a safety device
that causes it to be released in the event
of a violent crash.
fig. 37
A0E0135m
Using lever A-fig. 37 the mirror can
be adjusted to two different positions:
normal or antiglare.
Certain versions are fitted with electrochromic mirror fig. 38. The electrochromic function is turned on/off by
pressing button ON/OFF in the lower section of the mirror. When engaging
reverse, the mirror will always set to
daylight colouring.
fig. 39
A0E0036m
Adjusting the mirror
Use device A-fig. 39 to select the required mirror:
❒ turn selector A to 1 to select the left
door mirror;
❒ turn selector A to 2 to select the right
door mirror.
fig. 38
A0E0032m
DOOR MIRRORS
Door mirror can only be adjusted and
folded when the electronic key is fitted
into the ignition device.
To adjust the mirror selected press button B in the four directions shown by
the arrows.
IMPORTANT After adjusting the mirror, turn selector A to 0 to prevent accidental movements.
A0E0081m
Manually folding of the mirror
When required (for example when the
mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirror moving it
from position A-fig. 40 to position B.
To bring the mirrors back to driving position press again button C-fig. 39.
To store mirror position proceed as follows:
As the driver’s door mirror is curved, it may
slightly alter the perception of distance.
WARNING
When driving the mirrors shall always be in
open position.
❒ To perform storing, proceed as follows: engage reverse with car
stopped and electronic key fitted into the ignition device;
❒ move device A-fig. 39 to position
2 (passenger door mirror selection);
❒ adjust the passenger door mirror to
obtain the best position for parking
manoeuvres;
❒ keep one of the buttons C-fig. 33
pressed for at least 3 seconds (see
paragraph “Seats” in this section).
SAFETY
DEVICES
When required (for example when the
mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)
it is possible to fold the mirrors by pressing button C-fig. 39.
On versions equipped with electric seats,
when engaging reverse for parking to
improve visibility the driver can adjust
(and store) the passenger's door mirror
to a position different than that used
commonly.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 40
Storing the “parking”
position of the door mirror
on the passenger side
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Electrically folding of the
mirror (only versions with 4
power windows)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 51
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
51
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
52
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 52
Together with the passenger door mirror “parking” position, also the driver
seat position and the driver door mirror
will be stored. The sound of a buzzer
will confirm that the mirror position has
been stored.
Recalling the passenger door
mirror “parking” position
Automatic door mirror
realignment
Proceed as follows: fit the electronic key
into the ignition device, engage reverse,
move device A-fig. 39 to position 2
(passenger door mirror selection).
Each time the electronic key is fitted into the ignition device the door mirrors
return automatically to the last position
reached and/or recalled before removing the electronic key from the ignition
device.
The mirror will set automatically to the
previously stored position.
If no parking position has been stored,
when engaging reverse the passenger
door mirror will slightly lower to favour
the parking manoeuvre.
The passenger door mirror will return automatically to its original position about
10 seconds after disengaging reverse,
immediately after exceeding 10 km/h
with forward gear or when moving device A-fig. 39 to 0.
This enables mirror alignment if, when
the car is parked, one of the door mirrors has been moved manually and/or
accidentally.
Defrosting/demisting
The electric mirrors are fitted with heating coils which come into operation
when turning on the heated rear window (pressing button ().
IMPORTANT This function is timed
and is deactivated after a few minutes.
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 53
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1 Upper vent - 2 Adjustable and swivel central vents - 3 Adjustable and swivel side vents - 4 Lower vents for rear seats 5 Adjustable and swivel air vents for rear seats (for versions/markets, where provided) - 6 Lower vents for front seats - 7
Windscreen and front windows demisting/defrosting vents.
INDEX
fig. 41
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
A0E0220m
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
53
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 54
fig. 42
A0E0014m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
54
fig. 44
A0E0057m
A0E0067m
fig. 45
UPPER VENT fig. 44
The vent has an opening/closing control.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
I
O = Completely closed
O
I = Completely open
OFF
AUTO
AUTO
fig. 43
A0E0012m
CENTRAL AND
SIDE VENTS fig. 42-43
These vents are aligned on the dashboard. Each vent A features a wheel B
to adjust air flow and a device C to direct air flow horizontally or vertically.
O = Completely closed
I = Completely open
WINDSCREEN AND FRONT
SIDE WINDOW DEMISTING/
DEFROSTING VENTS
These vents are located at the ends (Afig. 45) and on the front part B of the
dashboard.
fig. 46
A0E0088m
REAR VENTS fig. 46
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Each vent A features a wheel B to adjust air flow and a device C to direct it.
O = Completely closed
I = Completely open
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 55
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
MANUAL CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
SAFETY
DEVICES
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
CONTROLS fig. 47
A - Air temperature knob (mixing warm
and cold air);
E - Windscreen, front side windows and
door mirrors max. demisting/defrosting
on/off button;
F - Air recirculation on/off button;
G - Compressor on/off button.
fig. 47
AIR DISTRIBUTION
SELECTION
O: air flow to driver’s/passenger’s
body;
M: air flow to driver’s/passenger’s
body and lower part of the passenger
compartment;
N: air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of the passenger compartment;
A0E0011m
Q: air flow towards the lower part of
the passenger compartment and windscreen;
ü: air flow towards the windscreen
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
D - Heated rear window and door mirrors defrosting on/off button;
INDEX
C - Fan speed knob;
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
B - Air distribution knob;
55
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
56
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 56
WARMING THE PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn knob A to the required temperature;
❒ turn knob C to the required speed;
❒ turn knob B to the required distribution:
N: to warm the feet of front and rear
passengers;
M: to warm the feet and keep the face
cool (bilevel function);
Q: to warm the feet and at the same
time demist the windscreen;
❒ turn air recirculation off (if on).
QUICK WINDSCREEN
AND FRONT SIDE WINDOW
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
(MAX-DEF function)
Press button -: the button leds -,
√ and ( will turn on. To turn this function off, press again button - the button led will turn off. After defrosting, turn
the function off to keep top comfort conditions.
Window demisting
Climate control system √ is very useful to speed up window demisting and
it is therefore to be turned on in the
event of considerable moisture. In any
case it is recommended to perform the
following preventive demisting procedure:
❒ turn air recirculation off (if on);
❒ turn knob C to second speed;
❒ turn knob B to Q.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
AND DOOR MIRROR
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
Press button ( to activate the demisting/defrosting function: when this function is on, the circular led around the button will turn on.
On certain versions, turning this function
on will also activate windscreen defrosting in the windscreen wiper area.
This function is timed and switches off
automatically after few minutes, or by
pressing again the button or by turning
the engine off. It will not be switched
on automatically when restarting the engine.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the heated rear window
over the heating filaments to avoid damage that might cause it to stop working properly.
IMPORTANT The compressor √ can
be enabled only if the ventilation is enabled.
During the winter, the climate control
system √ must be turned on at least
once a month for about ten minutes.
Proceed as follows:
Before summer, have the system
checked at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
❒ turn knob A completely leftwards;
❒ turn knob C to top speed;
Do not use the air recirculation function
on rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting inside.
❒ turn knob B to O;
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation system makes it possible to reach
the required (“heating” or “cooling”)
conditions faster.
How to keep the required
cooling
❒ press buttons √ and v (buttons
leds on).
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn air recirculation off (if on).
❒ turn knob A to the required temperature;
❒ turn the knurled ring C to the required
fan speed.
After connecting/disconnecting the battery,
wait for 3 minutes at
least before fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device in
order to allow the climate control system control unit to reset
the positions of the electric actuators that adjust air temperature and distribution.
SAFETY
DEVICES
This function is particularly useful when
the outside air is heavily polluted (in a
traffic jam, tunnel, etc.) However, it is
better not to use it for long periods, especially if there are several people in the
car to prevent window misting up.
LOOKING AFTER THE
SYSTEM
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
To turn this function on press button
v: the button led will turn on.
CLIMATE CONTROL
(fast cooling)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
RECIRCULATION
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 57
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
57
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
58
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 58
AUTOMATIC TWO-/
THREE-ZONE
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
❒ compressor activation;
❒ air recirculation.
The following parameters and functions
can be set or changed manually:
❒ required temperature;
❒ fan speed;
❒ air distribution on seven levels ;
DESCRIPTION
The car is fitted with a two-/three-zone
climate control system which makes it
possible to separately adjust the air temperature in the two/three passenger’s
compartment areas to reach the required
comfort.
For top quality temperature control in
the two/three areas of the passenger's
compartment, the system is fitted with
external temperature sensor, passenger's compartment temperature sensor
and two-side sun radiation sensor.
The climate control system automatically
controls and adjusts the following parameters and functions:
❒ air temperature at driver/passengers
vents;
❒ fan speed;
❒ air distribution at driver/passenger
vents;
❒ compressor on/off;
❒ window demisting/defrosting;
❒ air recirculation.
The system is fitted with AQS (Air Quality System) sensor (where provided),
that turns on air recirculation automatically when it detects the presence of outside polluted air (for example in queues
and tunnels).
Where provided, the system is integrated with an anti-misting sensor A-fig. 48
set behind the driving mirror, capable of
“monitoring” a preset internal area of the
windscreen and of intervening automatically to prevent or to reduce window misting up through a proper strategy.
fig. 48
A0E0091m
This sensor can be deactivated through
any manual system control when the
strategy is operating. The sensor is enabled at each start-up and in any case
when the user presses one of the AUTO
buttons.
To guarantee perfect
and regular sensor operation do not apply
stickers in the “monitoring”
area between sensor and windscreen. Keep windscreen and
sensor clean and avoid to accumulate dust or other substances.
Pagina 59
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
TWO-ZONE controls fig. 49
A - air distribution buttons (on driver and
passenger side);
SAFETY
DEVICES
B - temperature adjustment knob on driver side;
C - automatic operation button (AUTO);
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
D - climate control data display;
E - temperature adjustment knob on
passenger side;
G - MAX-DEF function button (fast defrosting/demisting function for windscreen, heated rear window and door
mirrors with heating function);
H - buttons for adjusting the fan speed;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
F - heated rear window/door mirrors
on/off button;
fig. 49 - TWO-ZONE configuration
I - OFF button to disable climate control;
L - air recirculation on/off button;
M - climate control compressor on/off button;
N - passenger’s compartment temperature sensor
A0E0453m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
59
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
60
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 60
THREE-ZONE controls fig. 50
Front controls
A - air distribution buttons (driver and passenger side);
B - temperature adjustment knob on driver
side;
C - automatic operation button (AUTO);
D - climate control data display;
E - temperature adjustment knob on passenger side;
F - heated rear window/door mirrors on/off
button;
G - MAX-DEF function button (fast defrosting/demisting function for windscreen, heated rear window and door mirrors with heating
function);
H - buttons for adjusting the fan speed;
I - OFF button to disable climate control;
L - air recirculation on/off button;
M - climate control compressor on/off button;
N - passenger’s compartment temperature
sensor
Rear controls
P - knob for adjusting temperature on rear
passenger side;
Q - button for turning on automatic operation
(AUTO) and for turning off air flow to rear
seats (OFF);
R - air distribution buttons;
S - rear temperature display.
fig. 50 - THREE-ZONE configuration - Front and rear controls
A0E0454m
The system can be turned on by pressing any button (excluding (, v and
OFF); it is however advisable to set the
required temperatures on the display
and then to press the AUTO button.
Turning the knob knurled rings (B/
E/P), clockwise or counter-clockwise,
respectively raises or lowers the temperature of the air required respectively in the left front zone (knob B) or right
front zone (knob E) or rear zone (knob
P) of the passenger compartment. The
temperatures set are shown on the display D/S.
It is switched on by setting a temperature of more than 32°C on the display,
and can be switched on independently
from the driver’s or passengers’ side, or
both of them; this setting brings the system to the “one-zone” mode and it is
shown by both displays.
The climate control system allows to personalise required temperatures (driver and
passengers).
Turning the knob knurled rings fully
clockwise or counter-clockwise until they
reach the extreme selections HI or LO,
the maximum heating or cooling functions are respectively engaged.
This functions can be switched on when
you wish to heat the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, by taking the greatest advantage from the system potential.
The function uses the maximum temperature of the heating fluid, whereas
air distribution and fan speed are controlled automatically by the system.
SAFETY
DEVICES
HI function (HIGH)
(maximum heating power)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SWITCHING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM ON
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 61
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
61
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
62
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 62
This function should not be activated when the engine is cold,
to prevent air not warm enough
from entering the passenger
compartment.
With the function switched on, however, all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only need
to turn the ring of knob (B or E/P) of
the temperature set to a value lower
than 32°C; the opposite display and the
rear display (for versions/markets, where
provided) will show 32°C.
Pressing button AUTO, the display will
show a temperature of 32°C and returns to an operating condition with automatic temperature adjustment.
LO (LOW) function
(highest cooling power)
It is switched on by setting a temperature lower than 16°C on the display;
this setting is shown on the display. This
function can be switched on when you
wish to cool the passenger compartment
as quickly as possible, by taking the
greatest advantage from the system potential.
The function cuts off air heating, switches on both internal air recirculation (to
prevent hot air from entering the compartment) and the climate control compressor, brings air distribution to ¯/˙
and the fan speed is controlled automatically by the system.
With the function switched on, however, all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only need
to turn the ring of knob B/E/P of the
temperature set to a value higher than
16°C; the opposite display and the rear
display (where provided) will show
16°C.
Pressing button AUTO, the display will
show a temperature of 16°C and returns to an operating condition with automatic temperature adjustment.
❒ fan speed;
❒ air distribution in passenger compartment;
❒ air recirculation;
❒ compressor;
and it will cancel all the previous manual adjustments.
Wording AUTO will disappear from the
display of the involved area (driver or
front passenger side or rear passenger
side) when performing whatever operation (excluding temperature change).
Press buttons +/– to increase or to decrease the fan speed.
The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on
the display:
WARNING
It is inadvisable to use
air recirculation on
rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of windows misting up
inside.
❒ min fan speed = one bar lit;
❒ max fan speed = 6 bars lit;
At starting, if climate control system is
operating in automatic mode, the fan
speed is kept at minimum until the engine has started.
With compressor on and engine running,
the fan speed cannot fall below the min.
speed.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only if the climate control compressor has
been switched off by pressing button √.
To restore automatic fan speed control
after a manual adjustment, press buttons AUTO.
SAFETY
DEVICES
FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Pressing button AUTO (front and rear
controls) the displays will show AUTO
and the system will automatically adjust:
AUTO will also go off if the system (specially when compressor is turned off
manually) cannot reach or cannot keep
the required temperature.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(AUTO BUTTON)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 63
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
63
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
64
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 64
QUICK FRONT WINDOW
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
(MAX-DEF function)
Pressing button - the climate control
automatically activates timed operation
of all the functions required to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen
and front side windows and, on certain
versions, electric windscreen demisting
in the windscreen wiper area.
The MAX-DEF can be turned on also with
engine off. When this function is on the
circular led around the button will turn on.
The MAX-DEF function activates the following operations:
❒ rear panel turning off (for versions/markets, where provided);
❒ air flow increase;
❒ air distribution at DEF;
❒ outside air intake;
❒ compressor activation;
❒ AQS function deactivation (where
provided)
❒ rear window heating activation.
When the MAX-DEF function is on, the
only manual operations possible are
manual adjustment of the fan speed and
switching heated rear window off.
IMPORTANT If the engine is not
warm enough, the function will not engage the predefined fan speed immediately, to limit the flow to the passenger compartment of air that is not warm
enough to demist the windows.
Pressing again one of the following buttons: v, √, AUTO, or - the system
switches off the MAX-DEF function, resuming the system operating conditions
prior to turning it on, in addition to activating the last function required, if any.
IMPORTANT Don’t turn the MAX-DEF
function on with engine off to prevent
draining the battery.
On certain versions, turning this function
on will also activate windscreen defrosting in the windscreen wiper area.
This function is timed and switches off
automatically after few minutes, or by
pressing again the button or by turning
the engine off. It will not be switched
on automatically when restarting the engine.
IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on
the inside of the rear window over the
heating filaments to avoid damage that
might cause it to stop working properly.
To turn the compressor off press again
button √.
With compressor off, the system will
check whether outside temperature is
higher or lower/same as the set one:
❒ if outside temperature is lower than
the set one, the system will operate
regularly also with compressor off;
❒ if outside temperature is higher than
the set one, the system will not be
able to keep the required condition,
the set temperature values will then
start to flash on the display.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Press button √ to turn the compressor
on: when climate control compressor is
on the circular led around the button will
turn on. Compressor will stay on also after turning the engine off.
Temperature detection (compressor off
and outside temperature higher than set
temperature) is activated each time the
electronic key is fitted into the ignition
device.
WARNING
Operation of the climate control compressor is necessary for cooling
and dehumidifying the air; it is
advisable to keep this function
always on, to prevent window
misting problems.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Press button ( to activate the demisting/defrosting function: when this function is on, the circular led around the button will turn on.
CLIMATE CONTROL
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
HEATED REAR WINDOW
AND DOOR MIRROR
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 65
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
65
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
66
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 66
AIR DISTRIBUTION
SELECTION
Front seat Two-zone/
Three-zone configuration
Pressing buttons (front controls)
A/S/D you can manually choose one
of the 7 possible modes for air distribution inside the compartment:
D Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets (passenger’s body).
D Splitting of the air flow between
S
the vents to the lower part of the
passenger compartment (warmest
air) and the dashboard centre and
side outlets and the rear outlet
(coolest air).
S Air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of the passenger compartment. This type of distribution allows heating of the passenger compartment in the shortest time by
proper setting of the temperature.
A Splitting of the air flow between
S windscreen and front side window
demisting/defrosting vents and the
lower part of the passenger compartment. This type of air distribution
allows satisfactory heating of the passenger compartment while preventing possible misting of the windows.
A Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.
A Splitting of the air flow between
D the central/side dashboard vents,
rear vents and windscreen and side
window defrosting / demisting
vents. This type of air distribution
allows satisfactory ventilation of
the passenger compartment while
preventing possible misting of the
windows.
A Splitting of the air flow between
D all vents.
S
Rear seat Three-zone
configuration controls
Pressing buttons A/S (rear controls)
you can manually choose one of the 3
possible modes for air distribution to the
rear side of passenger's compartment
A Air flow to the vents on the central
console (passengers’ body).
S Air flow towards the rear lower part
of the passenger compartment. This
type of distribution allows heating of
the passenger compartment in the
shortest time by proper setting of the
temperature.
A Splitting of the air flow between
S the vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)
and the rear vents (coolest air).
To restore automatic air distribution control after a manual selection, press buttons AUTO (front controls) or AUTO (rear
controls).
❒ automatic control, indicated by button led “A”;
❒ forced switching on (inside air recirculation always on), indicated by the
turning on of the circular led around
the button;
❒ forced switching off (air recirculation
always off with air inlet from the outside), indicated by the turning off of
the circular led around the button.
With A.Q.S. (air quality sensor - where
provided), the operating logics becomes
sequential by pressing button v.
SAFETY
DEVICES
In certain weather conditions (e.g. outside
temperature
around
0°C) and with automatic air recirculation control on, mist may
form on the windows. In this
case press button v to
switch off recirculation and if
necessary press button + to increase the flow of air to the
windscreen.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Inside air recirculation is controlled according to the following operating logics:
IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation system makes it possible to reach
the required heating or cooling conditions faster. It is however inadvisable to
use it on rainy/cold days as it would
considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially
if the climate control compressor is off.
It is advisable to turn on the inside air
recirculation system in queues or tunnels
to avoid admitting polluted air from outside. The prolonged use of this function
should however be avoided, especially
with several persons on board, to avoid
the possibility of the windows misting
inside and to guarantee the required
fresh air inlet.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
AIR RECIRCULATION AND
AQS FUNCTION (AIR
QUALITY SYSTEM)
ON/OFF (for versions/markets,
where provided)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 67
With the outside temperature below -1°C the
climate control compressor is unable to work. It is
therefore inadvisable to use the
inside air recirculation function
with low outside temperature
as windows may mist over
quickly.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
67
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
68
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 68
AQS function (Air Quality
System) (for versions/markets,
where provided)
The AQS function turns on automatically air recirculation when it detects the
presence of polluted air (e.g. in queues
and tunnels).
IMPORTANT With AQS function on,
after a preset time with recirculation on,
the compressor will enable outside air
inlet (for about 1 minute) to change air
inside the passenger compartment, regardless of outside air pollution level.
IMPORTANT The AQS function is disabled when the outside temperature is
cold to prevent window misting up. To
reactivate this function, press button
v. Led “A” on button v will
turn on to indicate that the function is
on.
POLLEN FILTER/ ACTIVATED
CARBON POLLEN FILTER
According to versions, the car can be fitted with pollen filter or activated carbon
pollen filter (where provided). The filter
has the specific capability of admitting to
the passenger compartment purified air,
free from particles such as dust, pollen,
etc. The filtering action takes place under all air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.
Have the conditions of the filter checked
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services at
least once a year, preferably at the onset of summer.
If the car is used mainly in polluted or
dusty areas it should be checked and if
necessary replaced at shorter intervals
than specified in the Service Schedule
(see section “Car Maintenance”).
Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the effectiveness of
the climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from the
outlets and vents.
❒ the system stores performed operations;
❒ the display is off;
❒ air recirculation is active (button led
on);
❒ compressor is active;
❒ ventilation is off.
To turn the climate control system on
again press button AUTO or any other
button (excluding ( and v).
Turning the climate control system on
again, air recirculation will be again controlled automatically.
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
After connecting/disconnecting the battery,
wait for 3 minutes at
least before fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device in
order to allow the climate control system control unit to reset
the positions of the electric actuators that adjust air temperature and distribution.
The car is fitted with an additional heater
that supports the engine during cold or
winter weather to quickly reach a comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment.
The additional heater works with the engine running when the outside temperature is below 20°C and the engine has
not yet reached normal operating temperature.
SAFETY
DEVICES
With climate control system off:
ADDITIONAL
HEATER (diesel
versions only)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Press OFF button. The circular led around
the button turns on, signalling the OFF
state.
Pressing button OFF on the rear control
will display the wording OFF on the rear
display and will stop air flow to rear
seats.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SWITCHING THE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM OFF
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 69
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
69
8-04-2009
14:22
Pagina 70
Direction indicators
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
Push the stalk to (stable) position:
❒ up: to turn the right-hand direction
indicator on;
LEFT-HAND STALK fig. 51
The left-hand stalk control almost all external lights.
The external lights can only be switched
on with electronic key fitted into ignition
device.
fig. 51
A0E0064m
Main beam headlamps
Turn the knurled ring A to 6. The warning light 3 on the instrument panel
will turn on.
To turn the main beams off, pull again
the stalk towards the steering wheel (2nd
unstable position).
Dipped beam headlamps
Flashing the main beams
Turn the knurled ring A to 2. The warning light 2 on the instrument panel will
turn on.
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
(1st unstable position) regardless of the
position of the knurled ring A. Warning light 1 on the instrument panel
will turn on.
INDEX
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Sidelights
With knurled ring A at 2 pull the stalk
towards the steering wheel (2nd unstable position). Warning light 1 on the
instrument panel will turn on.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Lights switched off
❒ down: to turn the left-hand direction
indicator on.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
70
Knurled ring at O.
Warning light Î or ¥ will come on flashing on the instrument cluster at the
same time.
Indicators are switched off automatically when the steering wheel is straightened.
If you want to show that you are about
to change lane, move the left-hand stalk
to unstable position. The required direction indicator will flash 3 times and then
it will turn off automatically.
Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel
within 2 minutes from when the engine
is turned off.
At each single movement of the stalk,
the staying on of the lights is extended
by 30 seconds up to a maximum of 3.5
minutes; then the lights are switched off
automatically.
Each time the stalk is operated, the 3
warning light turns on together with the
message on the display (see section
“Warning lights and messages”).
Deactivation
Keep the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel for more than 2 seconds.
On certain versions, the daylight sensor sensitivity can be adjusted through
the “Setup Menu” of the display (see
section “Reconfigurable multifunction
display” in this section).
Activation
A:
Turn the knurled ring A-fig. 51 to 2
in this way, the automatic activation of
the side/taillights and dipped beam
headlights is simultaneously enabled according to outside brightness.
With lights switched on automatically
and in the presence of a switching off
control by the sensor, the main beams
will be switched off first and a few seconds after also the sidelights.
As a result of the sensor control, the
dipped beam headlights will switch off
and, after a few seconds, sidelights will
switch off too. The sensor is not able
to detect the fog presence, under this
condition lights shall therefore be
switched on manually.
Failure warnings
On certain versions headlight sensor failure is shown by the instrument panel
warning light 1, whereas on other versions a dedicated message is shown on
the display (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).
SAFETY
DEVICES
Activation
It detects the changes of the external
light intensity of the car according to the
light sensitivity set: the greater the sensitivity is, the smaller the amount of external light necessary to control the
switching-on of the external headlights
will be.
Deactivation
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
This function allows the illumination of
the space in front of the car for a preset period of time.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS
SENSOR (daylight sensor)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
“FOLLOW ME HOME”
DEVICE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 71
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:22
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
71
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
14:23
Pagina 72
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Parking lights
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
With instrument panel off they turn on
by pressing button C. When pressing the
button a buzzer will sound and the instrument panel warning light 3 will
turn on.
72
fig. 52
A0E0061m
DASHBOARD BUTTONS
fig. 52
Front fog lights
(where provided)
To turn front fog lights on, press button
A; to activate these lights it is necessary
to have the side/taillights switched on.
The instrument panel warning light 5
will turn on. Press the button again or turn
side/taillights off to turn the lights off.
Press the button again to turn the lights
off.
With parking lights on, move the external lights left-hand stalk upwards or
downwards to select on which side
(right or left) the lights must stay on. In
this event warning light 3 will turn
off.
With left stalk at central position the four
parking lights and the number plate light
will turn on.
A0E0100m
fig. 53
Hazard lights
These lights are turned on by pressing
button A-fig. 53.
When these lights are on, the switch
flashes and warning lights Î and ¥ on
the instrument panel will turn on at the
same time.
Press switch A again to turn the lights
off.
Rear fog lights
To turn rear fog lights on, press button
B to activate these lights it is necessary
to have the dipped beams or front fog
lights switched on. The instrument panel warning light 4 will turn on. They turn
off by pressing the button again, turning the front or rear fog lights off or by
turning the engine off.
WARNING
Use of the hazard
warning lights is ruled
by the Highway Code of the
country in which the car is
used. Observe regulations.
With external lights on, activating the
windscreen washer will also activate the
headlight washer, if provided.
Windscreen washer/wiper
The stalk can be moved to five different
positions:
0: windscreen wiper off;
1: intermittent.
With the stalk in position 1, turning the
knurled ring A four possible intermittent
speeds are obtained:
■ = slow intermittent
■ = intermittent medium
■ = intermittent medium-fast
■ = fast intermittent
fig. 54
A0E0066m
2: continuous slow
3: continuous fast
4: fast temporary (unstable position)
Operation in position 4 is limited to the
time the stalk is held in this position.
When the stalk is released, it returns
to position 0 automatically stopping the
wiper.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Right-hand stalk fig. 54 controls windscreen washer/wiper operation.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
RIGHT-HAND STALK
Never use the window
wiper to remove ice or
snow from the windscreen. In these conditions, the
wiper is submitted to excessive
effort that results in motor protection cutting in and wiper operation inhibition for few seconds
as a consequence. If operation is
not restored contact Fiat Dealership.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WINDOW WASHING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 73
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:23
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
73
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
74
8-04-2009
14:23
Pagina 74
“Smart washing” function
Turning the knurled ring A-fig. 54 it
is possible to increase the sensitivity of
the rain sensor, obtaining a quicker
change from stationary (no wiping)
when the windscreen is dry, to first continuous speed (continuous, slow). A further stroke will confirm operation.
Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (unstable position) operates the
windscreen washer.
Keeping the stalk pulled with just one
movement it is possible to operate the
washer jet and the wiper at the same
time; the wiper actually comes into operation automatically when the stalk is
pulled for more than half a second.
The wiper stops working 3 strokes after
releasing the stalk; a further stroke after about 6 seconds will complete the
wiping operation.
RAIN SENSOR
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Operating the windscreen washer with
the rain sensor activated (stalk at position 1-fig. 54) the normal washing
cycle is performed at the end of which
the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic function.
The rain sensor A-fig. 55, located behind the driving mirror, is an electronic device combined with the windscreen wiper
which has the purpose of automatically
adjusting the number of wipes to intensity of the rain. All the other functions controlled by the right-hand stalk remain unchanged.
Removing the electronic key from the
ignition device, the rain sensor is deactivated and the next time the engine is
started it will not be reactivated even if
the stalk has remained in position 1fig. 54. In this case to activate the rain
sensor, simply move the stalk to 0 or 2
and then back to 1.
The rain sensor is activated automatically moving the right-hand stalk to position 1-fig. 54 and it has a range of
adjustment that gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping)
when the windscreen is dry, to wiper
at second speed (continuous, medium
wiping) with heavy rain.
When the rain sensor is reactivated in
this way, the wiper performs one stroke,
even if the windscreen is dry, to indicate
that reactivation has occurred.
fig. 55
A0E0227m
❒ impurities on the controlled surface
(salt, dirt, etc.);
❒ difference between day and night.
Failure warnings
On certain versions rain sensor failure is
shown by the instrument panel warning
light u, whereas on other versions a
dedicated message is shown on the display (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
SAFETY
DEVICES
wash.
Make sure the rain sensor is deactivated if
there is ice on the windscreen.
fig. 56
A0E0046m
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
(where provided) fig. 56
Streaks of water could
cause unrequired blade
movements.
WARNING
Make sure the device is
off when cleaning the
windscreen.
Headlight washers are visible and are fitted with a nozzle for each external light
function. They come into operation automatically when operating the windscreen washer with external lights
turned on.
IMPORTANT Check at regular intervals correct operation and cleanness of
nozzles.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The rain sensor is able to recognize and
automatically adjust itself in the presence of the following particular conditions:
Rain sensor shall be deactivated when washing
the car at automatic car-
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IMPORTANT In the event of rain sensor failure, windscreen wiper operation
with right-hand stalk at 1-fig. 54 shall
be intermittent. If failure occurs during
automatic operation, the system will
keep the last wiper operating condition.
Operation is however guaranteed although moving the stalk to other positions.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 75
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:23
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
75
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
76
8-04-2009
14:23
Pagina 76
CRUISE CONTROL
TO MEMORISE SPEED
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Proceed as follows:
❒ turn the knurled ring A-fig. 57 to
Ü and press the accelerator pedal to
the required speed;
GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes
it possible to drive the car at the required
speed, without pressing the accelerator
pedal. This reduces driving fatigue during long journeys (specially on highways) because the speed memorised is
automatically maintained.
IMPORTANT The Cruise Control must
be activated at speeds of between 45
and 180 k.p.h., in fourth, fifth and sixth
gears.
fig. 57
A0E0095m
DEVICE ENGAGEMENT
Turn knurled ring A-fig. 57 to Ü.
The device cannot be engaged in first
speed or reverse. It is recommended to
engage it in 4th or higher speeds. Travelling downhill with the device engaged,
the car speed may increase more than
the memorised one.
When the device is activated the instrument panel warning light Ü turns
on (on certain versions together with a
message on the display) (see section
“Warning lights and messages”).
❒ push the stalk upwards (+) or downwards (–), then release it: car speed
is memorised and it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
In the case of need (when overtaking
for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal: releasing the accelerator pedal, the car will
return to the speed memorised previously.
The speed memorised can be increased
in two ways:
TO INCREASE THE
MEMORISED SPEED
The speed memorised can be increased
in two ways:
❒ pressing the accelerator and then
memorising the new speed reached;
or
❒ moving the stalk upwards (+).
Each operation of the stalk will correspond to a slight increase in speed
(about 1.5 km/h), while keeping the
stalk upwards will correspond to a continuous speed increase.
❒ disengaging the device and then
memorising the new speed;
or
❒ moving the stalk downwards (–) until reaching the new speed which will
be memorised automatically.
Each operation of the stalk will correspond to a slight decrease in speed
(about 1.5 km/h), while keeping the
stalk downwards will correspond to a
continuous speed decrease.
DEVICE DISENGAGEMENT
The device is disengaged in one of the
following cases:
❒ turning the knurled ring A-fig. 57
to O;
❒ turning the engine off or removing
the electronic key from the ignition
device;
❒ pressing the accelerator pedal; in this
case the system is disengaged only
temporarily; device operation will be
resumed automatically when releasing the pedal;
❒ with car speed below the preset limit (in these cases the last stored
speed will stay memorised, to resume
it press button RES);
Automatic Cruise Control
deactivation
The Cruise Control is temporarily deactivated when the ABS or VDC systems
come into operation (above a max. preset time): in this case the last set speed
will stay memorised, to recall it press
button RES.
In the event of Cruise Control or engine
control system failure, the device is deactivated until removing the electronic
key from the ignition device. In this
event contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
SAFETY
DEVICES
If the device has been disengaged for
example pressing the brake or clutch
pedal, the memorised speed can be reset as follows:
❒ accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;
❒ engage the gear selected at the time
of speed memorising (4th or 5th
gear);
❒ press the RES button (set at stalk
end).
❒ pressing the brake pedal, pressing the
clutch pedal (in these cases the last
stored speed will stay memorised, to
resume it press button RES);
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
TO REDUCE MEMORISED
SPEED
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TO RESET THE
MEMORISED SPEED
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 77
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:23
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
77
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
78
8-04-2009
14:23
Pagina 78
The device is automatically deactivated
when operating accidentally or incorrectly the stalk, the knurled ring A or
button RES: in this event to reactivate
the device: bring the car to the required
speed and then move the stalk upwards
(+) or downwards (–).
CEILING LIGHTS
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
fig. 58
Press button:
A: to turn on/off the driver’s courtesy
light;
WARNING
In the event of device
malfunction or failure,
turn the knurled ring A-fig. 57
to O and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services after
checking the protection fuse integrity.
WARNING
When travelling with
the device on, never
set the gearshift lever to neutral.
B: to turn on/off the central light;
C: to turn on/off the passenger’s courtesy light.
Keeping pressed button B will turn off
all front ceiling lights and rear ceiling
lights. Turning off is also indicated by the
sound of a buzzer. To turn these lights
on again press briefly button B.
fig. 58
A0E0481m
IMPORTANT Leaving inadvertently a
door open, the front ceiling light and the
puddle lights will turn off automatically
after a few minutes. To turn them on
again, open another door or close and
open again the same door.
Opening one of the front/rear doors
Central front light and rear light turning on for a few minutes.
This timed operation will be reactivated each time a door is opened.
Closing all the doors
With electronic key removed from ignition device: ceiling lights
will stay on for other 10 seconds. This timed operation
is stopped when refitting the electronic key into the ignition
device
Starting the engine: front central and rear courtesy lights will
turn off
Removing the electronic key from the ignition device
Front central and rear courtesy lights turning on for about
10 seconds
Locking the doors
Front central and rear courtesy lights turning off
Unlocking the doors
Front central and rear courtesy lights turning on for about
10 seconds
Cutting in of the fuel cut-off switch
Front central and rear courtesy lights turning on for a few
minutes. Reactivating the fuel cut-off switch will turn off the
ceiling lights
In all the cases tabulated above, front and rear ceiling lights turning on/off is gradual, for 2 seconds.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Front and rear ceiling lights turning on/off mode
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Cause
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
In the following table are summarised the causes that make front/rear ceiling lights turn on/off and their turning on/off
mode:
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 79
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:23
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
79
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
14:23
Pagina 80
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
DOOR PUDDLE LIGHTS
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
The door light will turn on when opening the door regardless of the electronic key position. It will stay on for about
3 minutes when the door is open, then
it will go off automatically.
80
fig. 59
A0E0094m
REAR CEILING LIGHT
fig. 60
A0E0037m
Press button:
IMPORTANT Leaving inadvertently a
door open, the ceiling lights will turn off
automatically after a few minutes. To
turn them on again, open another door
or close and open again the same door.
A: to turn on/off the driver’s courtesy
light;
Versions with sunroof fig. 60
(for versions/markets, where provided)
B: to turn on/off the passenger’s courtesy light.
Versions with sunroof are fitted with two
rear ceiling lights located above the rears
doors.
Versions without sunroof
fig. 59
Closing the doors, the ceiling lights will
stay on for a few seconds, then they will
switch off automatically. Ceiling lights
will turn off when fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device.
Press lens A-fig. 60 to turn these
lights on/off.
Certain versions are equipped with an
additional safety switch that in the event
of a crash comes into operation by cutting off the power supply.
These two safety switches therefore prevent dangerous fuel leaks due to fuel
line cracking, and sparks or electric discharges due to damaging or malfunctioning of the electric components of the
car in the event of a crash.
IMPORTANT After a crash, remember to remove the key from the ignition
device to prevent battery run-down.
Door unlocking in the event
of a crash
In the event of a crash that triggers the
fuel cut-off switch, the doors will unlock
automatically to enable getting into the
car and at the same time the passenger’s compartment lights will turn on.
It is however always possible to open
the doors from the passenger’s compartment by means of the internal door
handles.
If, after a crash no fuel leaks or damages to the electric devices (e.g. headlights) are found and the car can be
started again, reset the fuel cut-off
switch and the power supply cut-off
switch (for versions/markets, where provided). Follow the instructions given below.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The car is fitted with a safety switch that
in the event of a crash comes into operation by cutting off fuel and turning
off the engine as a consequence.
WARNING
If central door locking
has been activated
from inside the car and after a
crash the fuel cut-off switch
cannot activate automatic door
unlocking, it will not be possible to get into the car. In any
case, door opening from the
outside depends on door conditions after the crash: if a
door is badly damaged it will
be impossible to open it. In this
event try to open one of the
other doors.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
POWER SUPPLY AND FUEL
CUT-OFF SWITCHES
WARNING
If, after a crash, you
smell fuel or see leaks
from the fuel system, do not
reset the switches to avoid
fire risk.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CONTROLS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 81
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:23
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
81
8-04-2009
14:23
Pagina 82
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
046-082 Alfa 159 GB
82
A0E0221m
fig. 61
Resetting the fuel cut-off
switch
WARNING
Before resetting the fuel cut-off switch carefully inspect the car for fuel
leaks or damages to electric
devices (e.g. headlights).
To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press button A-fig. 61.
A0E0126m
fig. 62
Resetting the power supply
cut-off switch
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING
Before resetting the
power supply cut-off
switch carefully inspect the car
for fuel leaks or damages to
electric devices (e.g. headlights).
fig. 63
A0E0071m
The switch is located inside the fuse box
at battery positive terminal.
To reset the power supply cut-off switch,
proceed as follows:
❒ press button A-fig. 61 to reset the
fuel cut-off switch;
❒ open the bonnet;
❒ operate the retaining clips A-fig. 62
and remove the protection cover B;
❒ press button C-fig. 63 to reset the
power supply cut-off switch.
Pagina 83
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
INTERIOR FITTINGS
Oddment compartment
To open the oddment compartment,
press button A-fig. 64 and raise the
cover B.
A0E0039m
fig. 65
A0E0141m
fig. 66
A0E0139m
Air-conditioned food box
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
On certain versions the central armrest
can be adjusted forward or backward by
operating the cover B-fig. 64.
fig. 64
Access to the food box is gained from
the oddment compartment by lifting tab
A-fig. 65. Turn wheel B to adjust the
air flow inside the food box.
IMPORTANT Function of the food
box is to keep the temperature of the
drinks placed inside it; drinks shall be
warmed or cooled as required before being put inside the food box.
Pay attention not to
spill the drinks: the food
box bottom however is
provided with a hole to drain
spilled liquids, if any.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
The central armrest is located between
the front seats. Inside the armrest are
housed an oddment compartment and
an air-conditioned food box (where provided) (see next paragraphs).
SAFETY
DEVICES
CENTRAL ARMREST
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
14:08
REAR ARMREST
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
To use the central armrest A-fig. 66
lower it as shown in the figure.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
83
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 84
fig. 67
A0E0142m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
84
fig. 69
A0E0146m
fig. 70
A0E0199m
fig. 71
A0E0200m
REAR ARMREST WITH
ODDMENT COMPARTMENT
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
fig. 68
A0E0143m
Ski compartment
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
To use the central armrest B-fig. 69,
take it from tab A and then lower it.
Inside the armrest is fitted an oddment
compartment fig. 71. To open it, press
button B-fig. 70 and raise the cover
C-fig. 70.
Ski compartment
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.
This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.
To have access to this compartment,
lower the armrest, pull the lid tab Afig. 67, then lower it on the armrest
fig. 68.
To have access to this compartment,
lower the armrest, press button A-fig.
72 of the lid B, then lower it on the
armrest.
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 85
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
fig. 73
A0E0148m
To open the lid B, switch A-fig. 73
(accessible from the boot) shall be set
in vertical position (horizontal position
Á = compartment locked).
To open the glove compartment use lever
A-fig. 74. When the glove compartment is opened, the internal courtesy light
turns on. Leaving inadvertently open the
glove compartment, this light will turn off
automatically after a few minutes. The
folding top is also provided with a recess
for a pen or a pencil.
Do not travel with the
glove compartment open;
it could harm the passenger in the event of an accident.
fig. 75
A0E0031m
CIGAR LIGHTER
Front cigar lighter
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
It is located on the central console, near
the handbrake lever. To use the cigar
lighter, raise cover A-fig. 75 as shown
by the arrow.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
A0E0149m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
fig. 74
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
A0E0147m
INDEX
fig. 72
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
85
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 86
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
Do not plug electric accessories with absorption
exceeding the max. specified value. Prolonged current absorption could drain the battery
and impair next engine start up.
I
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
O
86
OFF
AUTO
AUTO
fig. 76
A0E0152m
fig. 77
A0E0068m
Press button B-fig. 76 to switch on
the cigar lighter with key fitted into ignition device.
Rear cigar lighter
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
IMPORTANT Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
It is located on the central console between the seats (see fig. 77).
IMPORTANT The cigar lighter gets
very hot. Handle it with care and make
sure that it is not used by children: danger of fire and/or burns.
IMPORTANT Do not plug electric accessories with power exceeding 100W
to the front cigar lighter seat.
IMPORTANT Do not plug electric accessories with power exceeding 140W
to the rear cigar lighter seat.
IMPORTANT Oversize plugs could
damage the cigar lighter outlet tabs.
IMPORTANT To safeguard the lighting life of certain internal devices (e.g.:
cigar lighter ring and ashtray), when
switching on the external lights, these
devices will switch on according to the
passenger's compartment brightness:
with enough daylight these devices will
not switch on. On the contrary they will
switch on with poor daylight.
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 87
It is located on the central console, near
the handbrake lever.
To use the cigar lighter, raise cover Afig. 78 and open lid B.
fig. 80
A0E0101m
fig. 81
A0E0156m
Rear ashtray
It is located on the central console, between front seats. To use the ashtray,
lift lid A-fig. 79 as shown by the arrow.
Rear ashtray is removable: to remove it,
press on the central part and pull it upwards.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Front ashtray
A0E0153m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
ASHTRAY
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
fig. 79
Front ashtray is removable: to remove
it, pull it upwards.
IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray
as paper bin: it could set on fire on contact with cigarette stubs.
EYEGLASSES HOLDER
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray
as paper bin: it could set on fire on contact with cigarette stubs.
GLASS/CAN HOLDER
fig. 80
It is located near the front ceiling light.
To use it, press lid A-fig. 81.
It is located on the central console, near
the handbrake lever. To use it lift cover
A-fig. 75.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
A0E0140m
INDEX
fig. 78
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
87
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 88
fig. 82
A0E0197m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
88
fig. 84
A0E0154m
ODDMENTS COMPARTMENTS
fig. 84 (for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
They are located on the central console
between the front seats.
SUN VISORS
fig. 83
A0E0198m
SUN VISORS
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Certain versions are provided with sunvisors behind the rear seats.
To use it, take the tab A-fig. 82, pull it
forwards and secure it to the hooks set on
the top of the car roof (see fig. 83).
These are positioned to the sides of the
rear-view mirror. They can swing to the
sides and up or down.
On certain versions, sun visors are fitted
on the back with a courtesy mirror and
a light which enables to use the mirror
also with poor sunlight.
fig. 85
A0E0102m
To use the mirror open cover A-fig.
85.
Mirror lights will turn on automatically
when lifting the cover and they will turn
off when lowering it or few minutes after removing the electronic key from the
ignition device.
1) press and keep pressed the outer buttons (A and C): 20 seconds after led D
will start flashing. Release both buttons;
DESCRIPTION
The HomeLink fixed-system installed on
your car enables to control up to three
different devices for opening/closing
garage doors or gates, or for turning
on/off lighting system and for activating/deactivating alarm systems installed
at home and/or office.
fig. 86
A0E0311m
PROGRAMMING
IMPORTANT While programming the
system, check for the absence of people, animals or objects within the manoeuvre space of main doors or gates to
prevent the risk of injuries or damages.
IMPORTANT Pull up the handbrake
and fit the key into the ignition device.
Do not start the engine.
NOTE This operation clears the standard codes programmed by the manufacturer. It will not be necessary to repeat this operation the next time you
program the buttons.
2) press and keep pressed the required
HomeLink button A or B or C. Do not
release the button until completing operation 4;
3) when the HomeLink led D starts
flashing slowly (about 20 seconds after) bring the portable remote control
(keeping the button to program
pressed) as close as possible to the
HomeLink.
SAFETY
DEVICES
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Proceed as follows:
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
HOMELINK
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 89
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
89
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
90
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 90
The distance required between the
portable remote control and the HomeLink depends on the system to be programmed (type of frequency of main
door, gate or other system).
If D does not start to flash quickly try
again changing the distance between
HomeLink and portable remote control
(move them away slightly). If 20 seconds later the led is still flashing slowing, repeat the operation changing again
the distance between Homelink and remote control.
4) the HomeLink led D will start blinking, first slowly and then quickly. When
it starts flashing quickly, release both
buttons (HomeLink and portable remote
control).
HOW TO USE THE
HOMELINK SYSTEM
SYNCHRONISING
ALTERNATE CODES
The HomeLink remote control activates
the operation of the garage door motor or gate motor exactly as the portable
remote control. The car shall be within
the range of the motor and the key shall
be fitted into the ignition device.
To ascertain whether your garage door
motor or gate motor is provided with an
alternate code, proceed as follows:
Press the programmed button (A or B
or C). During signal transmission the led
D will stay on and the set system
(garage door, gate, etc.) will obey.
If the HomeLink system set as described
above does not work, this may be due
to the fact the original portable remote
control has an alternate code (see paragraph "Synchronising alternate codes").
It is however always possible to use the
original portable remote control to operate the system (garage door, gate,
etc.).
consult the owner handbook provided
by the garage door motor's or gate motor's manufacturer;
the portable remote control seems to
have programmed HomeLink; HomeLink
however is not up to open or to close
the garage door or the gate;
press and keep pressed the programmed
button (A or B or C).
With an alternate code system, the led
D blinks fast for short and then it stays
on glowing steadily for two seconds.
This sequence is repeated for 20 seconds.
IMPORTANT The car shall be within
the range of the motor. Pull up the handbrake and fit the key into the ignition
device. Do not start the engine.
It is possible to programme another original portable remote control on one
HomeLink button already programmed.
Previous programming will be cancelled.
❒ press the motor set-up button (this
action will usually turn up the "setup" pilot light). After operation 2,
start to perform operation 3 within
30 seconds;
IMPORTANT While programming the
system, check for the absence of people, animals or objects within the manoeuvre space of main doors or gates to
prevent the risk of injuries or damages.
❒ press the programmed button (A or
B or C) and release it. Press again
the programmed button and then release it to end the operation. Certain
motors could require to repeat once
again the operation for concluding
the setting.
IMPORTANT Pull up the handbrake
and fit the key into the ignition device.
Do not start the engine.
Now the motor should be up to recognise the signal transmitted by HomeLink
and therefore to open/close the garage
door or the gate.
Proceed as follows:
1) press and keep pressed the required
HomeLink button A or B or C. Do not
release the button until completing operation 3;
2) when the HomeLink led D starts
flashing slowly (about 20 seconds after) bring the portable remote control
(keeping the button to program
pressed) as close as possible to the
HomeLink.
SAFETY
DEVICES
❒ find the set-up button on the upper
side of the garage door/gate motor.
Colour and position may vary according to the manufacturer (consult
the motor handbook);
RE-PROGRAMMING ONE
SINGLE BUTTON
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IMPORTANT While synchronising the
system, check for the absence of people, animals or objects within the manoeuvre space of main doors or gates to
prevent the risk of injuries or damages.
Proceed as follows:
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
HomeLink can only work if the programmed alternate code is synchronised
with the system of the device (garage
door, gate, etc.).
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 91
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
91
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
92
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 92
The distance required between the
portable remote control and the HomeLink depends on the system to be programmed (type of frequency of main
door, gate or other system).
If D does not start to flash quickly try
again changing the distance between
HomeLink and portable remote control
(move them away slightly). If 20 seconds later the led is still flashing slowing, repeat the operation changing again
the distance between Homelink and remote control.
3) the HomeLink led D will start blinking, first slowly and then quickly. When
it starts flashing quickly, release both
buttons (HomeLink and portable remote
control).
In this way the system previously programmed on HomeLink is cleared and
the new system is ready for use. This
operation has no effect on the other two
HomeLink buttons.
CLEARING THE
PROGRAMMED BUTTONS
TECHNICAL DATA FOR THE
ASSISTANCE SERVICE
You are recommended to clear the
HomeLink programming before selling
the car.
If after following the previous instructions you are still unable to set the
HomeLink system, contact the Assistance Service (HomeLink toll free number 00800046635465) and communicate the following data:
Programming is cleared on all the three
buttons at the same time.
Proceed as follows:
❒ press and keep pressed the outer
buttons (A and C): 20 seconds after led D will start flashing.
❒ Release both buttons.
❒ make and model of your car, including the date of manufacture and
the country where you bought it;
❒ make, model, date of manufacture
and operating frequency of the original portable remote control (if
known).
IMPORTANT Certain phone carriers
do not permit the use of the toll-free
number. It is therefore required to dial
the alternative pay-number, +49 6838
907-277 (dialling this number will start
an international call).
When closed it enables sunlight to get
into the passenger compartment, whereas when open it enables wide opening
of the whole glass sunroof surface.
The sunroof is provided with manuallyoperated sun curtain with handle and air
vents.
Sunroof can only be operated when the
key is fitted into the ignition device.
Do not open the sunroof
if there is snow or ice on
it: it could be damaged.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The sunroof consists of a moving pane
sliding horizontally and retractable.
WARNING
When leaving the car,
the ignition key should
be removed to prevent the
sunroof from being operated
inadvertently and harming
anyone remaining in the car.
Improper use of the sunroof
can be dangerous. Before and
during its operation ensure
that any passengers are not at
risk from the moving roof either by personal objects getting caught in the mechanism
or by being injured by it directly.
C
fig. 87
A0E0238m
IMPORTANT Top comfort position
with sunroof open is obtained by turning selector A-fig. 87 to position.
Operating the selector it is possible to
open/close the sunroof in one of the following cases:
❒ fitting the electronic key into the ignition device;
SUNROOF OPENING
Opening from inside the car
Turn selector A-fig. 87, as shown by the
arrow. The sunroof will stop in position as
soon as the selector is released.
The movement of the roof may be interrupted and restarted by means of slight
pressure on selector A.
❒ in the first 2 minutes after removing
the key from the ignition device or up
to door opening.
Opening from outside the car
Press the electronic key button Ë for
over 2 seconds.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SUNROOF
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 93
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
93
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 94
SUNROOF CLOSING
The movement of the roof may be interrupted and restarted by means of
slight pressure on selector A.
Though the selector A (by pressing it)
it is possible to use the “Inhibit” position that will exclude the anti-crushing
safety system.
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SAFETY
DEVICES
Turn selector A-fig. 87 counter-clockwise.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
94
If when removing the key from the ignition device, you activate sunroof sliding by pressing the electronic key button Ë while sunroof sliding by manual
control (by pressing the selector) is being performed, this last control will prevail. To make the sunroof sliding automatically you have to press again button Ë.
Sunroof sliding by pressing the electronic
key button Ë can be stopped by operating selector A-fig. 87 (by changing its
position or pressing it).
Changing selector position, will make
the sunroof slide to the new position ignoring button Ë.
fig. 88
WARNING
Open and close the roof
only when the vehicle
is stationary.
A0E0070m
SUN CURTAIN fig. 88
The sun curtain shall be used to adjust
brightness inside the passenger compartment. Sun curtain is fitted with handle and air vents.
After disconnecting the battery or failing
the protection fuse, the sunroof shall be
“initialised” again, proceed as follows:
When an obstacle is found, sunroof
stroke is stopped immediately and its
stroke is reversed to the preset position:
❒ during horizontal closing it is active
along the whole stroke of the sunroof
and when it finds an obstacle on the
front side of the pane it guarantees
a 10 cm stroke reversal;
❒ during vertical closing it is active
along the whole stroke of the sunroof
and when it finds an obstacle on the
rear side of the pane it guarantees
stroke reversal.
❒ turn selector fully leftwards (counterclokwise);
fig. 89
A0E0187m
EMERGENCY OPERATION
In a emergency or during servicing (without power supply), the sunroof can be
operated manually; proceed as follows:
❒ press and keep pressed selector until
sunroof locking;
❒ release selector;
❒ press selector again within 3 seconds,
and keep it pressed;
❒ press the light notches to release the
clips and remove the front ceiling light
A-fig. 89.
❒ a few seconds after the sunroof will
move automatically (during this stage
keep on pressing the knob);
❒ fit the setscrew wrench into the proper slot B;
❒ initialisation will end when the sunroof stops. Release selector.
❒ turn the key to open or to close (according to rotation direction) the sunroof.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The anti-crushing safety system fitted on
the front curtain outline is active during
horizontal closing (front edge) and vertical closing of the panel (rear edge) and
it will cut in when it finds an obstacle
(e.g.: finger, hand, etc …), thus guaranteeing sunroof reversal for a short section.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SUNROOF INITIALISATION
PROCEDURE
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
ANTI-CRUSHING SAFETY
SYSTEM
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 95
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
95
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
96
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 96
DOORS
CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING/
UNLOCKING SYSTEM
Door locking from the outside
With the doors closed, press the electronic key button Á or fit and turn the
metal insert (inside the key) into the
lock of the driver’s door. Central door
locking can only be activated if all the
doors are closed. If one or more doors
are open after pressing the electronic
key button Á the direction indicators and
the driver’s door led will flash fast for
about 3 seconds.
If one or more doors are open by turning
the metal insert of the electronic key, only the driver’s door led will flash fast for
about 3 seconds. If the doors are closed
but the tailgate is open, central locking
is actuated: the direction indicators (only
for locking performed by pressing button
Á) and the driver’s door led will flash fast
for about 3 seconds.
Through the “Setup menu” (or the Radionavigation system for certain versions)
it is possible to activate the function that
enables to unlock only the driver’s door
lock by pressing the electronic key button
Ë (see paragraph “Reconfigurable multifunction display” in this section).
With this function on (ON) it is however possible to unlock the other doors by
pressing button q (fig. 90) set on the
central console.
Door unlocking from
the outside
Press the electronic key button Ë or, fit
and turn the metal insert (inside the
key) into the lock of the driver’s door.
Door locking/unlocking from
the inside
Press button q (fig.
lock/unlock all the doors.
90) to
The button is provided with a circular led
indicating the car condition (doors
locked or unlocked). When doors are
locked the led is on: in this case pressing the button again will unlock all the
doors and will turn the led off.
fig. 90
A0E0025m
With key removed the led will turn off
after about 2 minutes.
When doors are unlocked the led is off;
pressing the button will lock all the
doors. Central door locking will only take
place if all doors are perfectly closed.
fig. 91
A0E0155m
CHILD LOCK
Rear doors are fitted with a locking device fig. 91 that inhibits door opening from the inside.
This device can be engaged/disengaged
(by the metal insert of the key) only
with doors open:
❒ position 1: engaged (door locked);
❒ position 2: disengaged (door can
be opened from the inside).
IMPORTANT After engaging the child
lock on both rear doors, check for proper engagement by trying to open a rear
door with the internal handle.
SAFETY
DEVICES
IMPORTANT Always use this device
when transporting children.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IMPORTANT With central locking system on, pulling the internal door handle
will unlock all the doors. Lacking power (blown fuse, battery disconnected,
etc.) it is however possible to lock the
doors manually.
IMPORTANT Each device acts only
on the relevant door.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Button q is disabled after door locking
carried out by operating the remote control, the driver's door revolving plug, or
by automatic door locking after about
2.5 minutes and it will be enabled again
after door unlocking carried out by pressing the key button Ë, by turning the
metal insert of the key into the driver's
door lock or by fitting the key into the
ignition device.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 97
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
97
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
98
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 98
DOOR LOCKING WITH RUN
DOWN BATTERY
If the car battery is run down, to lock
the doors proceed as described in the
following points.
Right front door
Proceed as follows:
❒ remove the protection plug on the
door;
❒ fit the electronic key metal insert into A-fig. 92;
fig. 92
A0E0237m
Doorknobs can be realigned (only after
recharging the battery) as follows:
❒ pressing the electronic key button Ë;
IMPORTANT As concerns rear doors,
with child lock device on and the previously described locking active, operating the internal door handle will not
open the door but will only realign doorknobs; to open the door pull the external door handle. Emergency locking will
not disable central door locking/unlocking button q.
IMPORTANT After disconnecting the
battery or failing the protection fuse, the
door locking/unlocking mechanism shall
be “initialised” again, proceed as follows:
❒ turn the key clockwise (counter-clockwise for right-hand drive versions);
❒ pressing door locking/unlocking button q;
❒ remove the key from A-fig. 92 and
then efit the plug on the door.
❒ opening with the key in front door revolving plug;
❒ press the remote control button Á or
the button q on the central console;
❒ pulling internal door handle.
❒ press the remote control button Ë or
the button q on the central console.
❒ lock the doors;
This system is particularly useful when
children operate the windows inadvertently and make it possible to close/
open (where provided) the windows using the remote control when leaving the
car.
In this case it is necessary to carry out
system restore procedure as follows:
❒ open the windows;
or
❒ remove and then refit the key into the
ignition device.
If no malfunction is present, the window
returns to its normal operation automatically. In the event of a failure see section
“Warning lights and messages”.
Windows and sunroof
opening/closing by the
electronic key (for versions/
markets, where provided)
By the metal insert of the key
On all versions:
❒ turning clockwise the metal insert of
the key into the driver's door revolving plug will open all the win-
❒ turning counterclockwise the metal
insert of the key into the driver's
door revolving plug will close all the
windows and the sunroof (for versions/ markets, where provided) at
the same time.
By remote control
On all versions, keep button Ë pressed
for over 2 seconds to open all the windows and the sunroof (where provided)
at the same time.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Versions with 4 power windows are fitted with automatic window opening/
closing on all doors. For versions/markets where applicable the passenger
side electrical window and the rear electrical windows are provided with a safety system with anti-crushing seal able to
recognize the eventual presence of an
obstacle during the closing movement
of the window; upon verification of this
event the system interrupts and immediately inverts the run of the window.
dows and the sunroof (for versions/
markets, where provided) at the
same time.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Versions with 2 front power windows
are fitted with automatic window opening/closing only on the driver’s side.
IMPORTANT In the event the anticrushing function is activated 5 times in
only 1 minute or in the event of a failure, the system will automatically enter
the “recovery” mode (self-protection).
This condition is pointed out by the fact
that, in the closing stroke, the windows
goes up in jerks.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
POWER WINDOWS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 99
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
The system complies
with the forthcoming
Standard 2000/4/ EC
concerning the safety of passengers leaning out of the passenger compartment.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
99
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 100
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
C (for versions/markets, where provided) – rear left window opening/closing; “automatic continuous”
mode operation during window opening/closing;
100
fig. 93
A0E0051m
CONTROLS
Driver side
On the driver’s door panel are set the
buttons fig. 93 for controlling, with
electronic key fitted into the ignition device:
A – front left window opening/closing;
window opening or closing in “automatic continuous” mode;
B – front right window opening/closing; window opening or closing
in “automatic continuous” mode (only
versions with 4 power windows);
D (for versions/markets, where provided) – rear right window opening/closing; “automatic continuous”
mode operation just during window
opening;
E (for versions/markets, where provided) – rear power window enabling/disabling controls (when rear
power window controls are disabled, the
led on button E will turn on and disabled
controls will turn off).
Improper use of the
power windows can be
dangerous. Before and
during its operation ensure that
any passengers are not at risk
from the moving glass either by
personal objects getting caught
in the mechanism or by being injured by it directly. Always remove the ignition key when
getting out of the car to prevent
the power windows being operated accidentally and constituting a danger to the passengers in the car.
Press buttons A, B, C or D to open/
close the required window.
Front passenger door/
rear doors
Pressing briefly one of the buttons the
window “jerks” whereas a prolonged
pressing makes the window opening or
closing in “automatic continuous”
mode.
Front passenger door and, on certain
versions, rear doors are fitted with button panels controlling opening/closing
of the corresponding window.
Pressing button A, B, C or D again will
stop the window in the required position.
Opening the boot its internal light will
turn on and it will turn off automatically when re-closing the tailgate.
Leaving the tailgate inadvertently
open, the light will turn off automatically after a few minutes.
Through the “Setup menu” (or the
Radionavigation system for certain
versions) boot opening can be set by
selecting the option “Indep. boot”
(see paragraph “Reconfigurable multifunction display” in this section):
when this function is on, the boot can
only be opened by pressing the electronic key button `.
fig. 94
A0E0498m
On certain versions, improper boot
closing is indicated by the instrument
panel warning light ´, whereas on
other versions the symbol R and a
message are displayed (see section
“Warning lights and messages”).
When unlocked, the boot can be
opened from outside the vehicle pressing the electric logo (fig. 94) until it
snaps unlocked.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The boot lock is electric and it is disabled when the car is running.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Tailgate opening is facilitated by the
side gas shock springs.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
BOOT
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 101
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
101
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 102
❒ lock the doors and the tailgate;
A0E0228m
EMERGENCY OPENING OF
THE BOOT FROM THE
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
(foreseen only on the
3-volume saloon version)
If the battery is disconnected, the boot
can be opened by pulling the lever
A-fig. 95 set under the rear left seat.
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
fig. 95
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
IMPORTANT After disconnecting the
battery or failing the protection fuse, the
tailgate locking/unlocking mechanism
shall be “initialised” again, proceed as
follows:
102
Refit the handle under the cushion after
using it.
OPENING BY REMOTE
CONTROL
Press the electronic key button `.
Opening is indicated by double flashing
of direction indicators.
❒ press the remote control button Á or
the button q on the central console;
Opening the boot with alarm (for versions/markets, where provided) on will
cause the following:
❒ press the remote control button Ë or
the button q on the central console.
❒ volumetric protection deactivation;
❒ anti-raising protection deactivation;
❒ tailgate monitoring sensor.
Re-closing the tailgate will restore all the
above functions and direction indicators
will turn on for about 1 second.
The addition of objects
(speakers, spoilers, etc.)
on the rear shelf or boot
lid, except those envisaged by
the manufacturer, may prevent
the gas filled struts at the sides
of the boot from working properly.
EXTENDING THE BOOT
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
To extend the boot proceed as follows:
❒ remove rear head restraints;
❒ move aside the seat belt, check that
it is not twisted;
WARNING
Never travel with objects on the rear shelf
to prevent them being thrown
forwards and injuring passengers in case of accident or
sharp braking.
SAFETY
DEVICES
IMPORTANT If the option for ”Indep.
boot” is on, before closing the boot,
check whether you have with you the
ignition key since the boot will be locked
automatically.
WARNING
When using the boot,
make sure the loads do
not exceed the permitted
weight (see “Technical specifications” chapter). Also make
sure the items in the boot are
arranged properly to prevent
them being thrown forwards
and injuring passengers should
you brake sharply.
fig. 96
A0E0085m
❒ lift seat back lever A-fig. 96 and
tilt the seat back forward. Lever raising is indicated by a “red band” B.
IMPORTANT Before folding the backrest over onto the cushion, in order to
avoid interference, make sure that the
seat belt branches are in their housings
on the cushion.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Lower the tailgate pressing the lock until hearing the locking click.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TAILGATE CLOSING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 103
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
103
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
104
3-12-2009
14:08
Pagina 104
TO RETURN THE REAR SEAT
BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL
POSITION
WARNING
Move aside the seat belts, check that
they are not twisted.
Raise the seat backrests and push them
back until hearing the locking click of
both retainers; the “red band” B aside
the levers A shall no longer be visible.
The “red band” B actually indicates that
the backrest is not properly secured.
IMPORTANT Make sure the head restraints are properly positioned.
WARNING
Make sure the backrest
is properly secured at
both sides (“red bands” Bfig. 96 not visible) to prevent
it moves forward in the event
of sharp braking causing injuries to passengers.
A0E0131m
fig. 97
ANCHORING THE LOAD
The boot houses 4 hooks A-fig. 97
for anchoring ropes in order to guarantee perfect load anchoring.
WARNING
A heavy load that has
not been secured may
cause serious harm.
If you want to carry
reserve fuel in a can,
follow law regulations, only
using a certified can, suitably
fastened to the load securing
eyelets. Even in this way the
risk of fire is increased in the
case of an accident.
❒ pull lever A-fig. 98 until hearing
the releasing click;
❒ press the safety lever B-fig. 99 upwards and raise the bonnet.
fig. 98
A0E0122m
WARNING
IMPORTANT Bonnet raising is aided
by two gas springs. Do not tamper with
these springs and guide the bonnet
while raising it.
IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet, check that windscreen wiper arms
are not lifted from the windscreen.
IMPORTANT Always check that the
bonnet is closed properly to avoid its
opening while the car is travelling.
Carry out operations
only when the car is
stationary.
WARNING
fig. 99
A0E0470m
TO CLOSE THE BONNET
Lower the bonnet at approx. 20 centimetres from the engine compartment
and then let it drop, ensuring that it is
fully closed and not just held in position
by the safety catch. If the bonnet does
not close properly, do not push it down
but open it again and repeat the above
procedure.
For safety reasons the
bonnet must be closed
properly to avoid its opening
while the car is travelling.
Therefore, always check it is
properly closed and the catch
engaged. Should you notice
that the catch is not perfectly
engaged when travelling, stop
the car immediately and close
the bonnet.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Proceed as follows:
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
TO OPEN THE BONNET
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Improper bonnet closing is indicated (on
certain versions) by the instrument panel warning light ´ (where provided), or
by symbol S and a message on the
display (see section “Warning lights and
messages”).
BONNET
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 105
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:08
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
105
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
106
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 106
HEADLIGHTS
ROOF RACK/
SKI RACK
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT
BEAM
The car is preset for mounting roof
racks/ski racks.
Front hooks are in points A-fig. 100.
Rear hooks are in points B.
fig. 100
A0E0097m
IMPORTANT After few kilometers,
check that fastening screws are firmly
tightened.
Distribute the load evenly and when driving, bear
in mind the increased
sensitivity to side wind.
IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.
permissible loads (see section “”Technical specifications”).
Proper adjustment of the headlight
beams is of vital importance for your
safety and comfort and also for the other road users. To ensure you and other
drivers have the best visibility conditions
when travelling with the headlights on,
the headlights must be set properly. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to
have the headlights properly adjusted.
HEADLIGHT AIMING DEVICE
It works with the key fitted into the ignition device and dipped beams on.
When the car is loaded, it slopes backwards. This means that the headlight
beam rises. In this case, it is necessary
to return it to the correct position.
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 107
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Control has four positions corresponding
to the loads given below:
SAFETY
DEVICES
❒ position 0: one or two passenger on
front seats and kerb weight (including full fuel tank, tools and accessories);
FRONT FOG LIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the headlights correctly adjusted.
HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENT
ABROAD
The dipped beam headlights are adjusted for circulation in the country in which
the car is marketed. In countries with
opposite circulation, to avoid glaring oncoming vehicles, proceed as follows:
❒ remove headlight cover (see paragraph “Dipped beam headlights” in
section “In an emergency”);
❒ move lever A-fig. 102 aside;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IMPORTANT Check headlight slant
each time the transported load changes.
A0E0050m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
If the car is fitted with bixenon headlights, headlight aiming is electronic and
therefore control A is not present.
❒ position 3: driver plus 300 kg load
completely stored into the boot.
fig. 102
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
In this event, to adjust the headlight
slant use control A-fig. 101 set on the
button control panel near the steering
wheel.
❒ position 2: five passengers and boot
fully loaded (about 50 kg);
INDEX
fig. 101
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
❒ position 1: five passengers;
A0E0226m
107
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
108
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 108
ABS SYSTEM
The car is fitted with ABS braking system, which prevents the wheels from
locking when braking, makes the most
of road grip and gives the best control
when emergency braking under difficult
road conditions.
System is completed by EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distribution), which distributes the braking action between front
and rear wheels.
IMPORTANT To have the maximum
efficiency of the braking system, it is
necessary a setting period of about 500
km: during this period it is better to
avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged
brakes.
ABS SYSTEM
INTERVENTION
The driver can tell the ABS system has
come into action because the brake pedal pulsates slightly and the system gets
noisier: it means that the car speed
should be altered to fit the type of road
surface.
WARNING
The ABS exploits the
tyre-road grip at the
best, but it cannot improve it;
you should therefore take
every care when driving on
slippery surfaces without taking unnecessary risks.
WARNING
If the ABS system cuts
in, it is a sign that the
grip between tyre and the
road surface has reached the
limit: you must slow down to
match the speed to the road
grip available.
WARNING
When the ABS cuts in,
and you feel the brake
pedal pulsating, do not remove
your foot, but keep it pressed;
in doing so you will stop in the
shortest amount of space possible under the current road
conditions.
Drive carefully to the closest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the system
checked.
In this case with sharp braking the rear
wheels might lock too early, with the
possibility of skidding. Drive extremely
carefully to the closest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system
checked.
The system, which cannot be cut out,
recognizes emergency braking (on the
ground of the brake pedal operation
speed) and considerably increases the
pressure in the brake circuit.
Brake Assist is deactivated on the versions equipped with VDC system in the
event of VDC system failure, indicated
by the turning on of warning light á on
the instrument panel (on certain versions together with a message on the
display).
SAFETY
DEVICES
ABS failure is indicated by the turning
on of warning light > on the instrument panel (on certain versions together
with the dedicated message on the display) (see section “Warning lights and
messages”). In this case the braking
system is still efficient, though without
the aid of the ABS system.
EBD failure is indicated by the turning
on of warning lights > + x on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the dedicated message on
the display) (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).
BRAKE ASSIST
(emergency braking
assistance)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
ABS failure
EBD failure
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FAILURE WARNING LIGHTS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 109
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
109
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
110
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 110
VDC SYSTEM
(Vehicle Dynamics
Control)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The VDC system is an electronic system
controlling the car stability in the event
of tyre grip loss.
The VDC system is therefore particularly useful when grip conditions of the
road surfaces changes.
VDC SYSTEM
INTERVENTION
It is signalled by the blinking of the
warning light á on the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the car is
in critical stability and grip conditions.
TURNING THE VDC SYSTEM
ON/OFF
The VDC system is automatically activated when the engine is started. When
travelling, to turn the VDC off press the
ASR/ VDC button on the central console
fig. 103 for 2 seconds. Turning off the
VDC will also turn off the ASR. Both functions can be reactivated by pressing the
ASR/VDC button.
VDC system deactivation is indicated
by the instrument panel warning light
á (on certain versions a symbol is displayed) and by the circular led around
the ASR/VDC button.
If the VDC has been turned off when
travelling, at next engine start-up it will
turn on again automatically.
fig. 103
A0E0026m
FAILURE WARNING LIGHTS
In the event of failure, the VDC system
is automatically disconnected and the
warning light á comes on with fixed
light on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with a message
on the display) (see section “Warning
lights and messages”). In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as
soon as possible.
WARNING
For correct operation of
the VDC system, the
tyres must absolutely be of
the same brand and type on all
wheels, in perfect conditions
and, above all, of type, brand
and size specified.
This system is an integral part of the VDC
system and it is provided to facilitate
starting on slopes:
❒ uphill: car at a standstill on a road
with a gradient higher than 6%, engine running, clutch and brake pedal depressed, gearbox to neutral or
engaged gear other than reverse;
❒ downhill: car at a standstill on a road
with a gradient higher than 6%, engine running, clutch and brake pedal depressed and reverse gear engaged.
At pickup the VDC system control unit
will keep brake force on wheels until
reaching the torque suitable for starting,
or in any case for about 1 second in order to pass easily from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal.
SAFETY
DEVICES
During the use of the
space-saver
spare
wheel for versions/markets,
(where provided), the VDC
system carries on working.
However, you must remind
that the space-saver spare
wheel has dimensions smaller
than the standard tyre and
therefore its grip is reduced as
to the other car tyres.
HILL HOLDER SYSTEM
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Performance of the
VDC system, in terms
of active safety should not induce the driver to take pointless and unnecessary risks.
The style of driving must in
any case always be adapted to
the conditions of the road surface, visibility an traffic. Road
safety is always the driver’s
responsibility.
WARNING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 111
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
111
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
112
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 112
This time elapsing without starting, the
system will deactivate automatically by
releasing gradually the brake force.
At releasing, the typical brake disengagement noise indicating that the car
is going to move will be heard.
Failure warnings
System failure is indicated by the turning on of warning light * (where provided) on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the dedicated message on the display) (see section
“Warning lights and messages”).
IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system
is not a parking brake. Never get out
of the car without engaging the handbrake, switching the engine off and engaging the first gear.
ASR SYSTEM
(AntiSlip Regulation)
This system is an integral part of the VDC
system, it controls car drive and cuts in
automatically every time one or both driving wheels slip.
According to slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated:
❒ if slipping involves both driving
wheels, the ASR function intervenes
reducing the power transmitted by
the engine;
❒ if slipping involves only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically braking the wheel that is
slipping.
❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or
frozen surfaces;
❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet
surface (aquaplaning).
ASR turns on automatically when turning the instrument panel on.
When travelling the ASR can be
switched off by pressing briefly the
ASR/VDC button on the central console.
When the ASR is switched off this is
shown by the lighting up of the
ASR/VDC button led (on versions fitted
with “Reconfigurable multifunction display” symbol V will also be displayed).
If the ASR is switched off when travelling, it will turn on again automatically
the next time the engine is started.
When travelling on snowy roads with
snow chains, it may be helpful to turn
the ASR off: in fact, in these conditions,
slipping of the driving wheels when moving off makes it possible to obtain better drive.
SAFETY
DEVICES
❒ too much power transmitted to the
wheels also in relation to the conditions of the road surface;
The performance of the
system, in terms of active safety should not induce
the driver to take pointless
and unnecessary risks. The
style of driving must in any
case always be adapted to the
conditions of the road surface,
visibility an traffic. Road safety is always the driver’s responsibility.
Switching the ASR system
on/off
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to the
effect of dynamic load changes or excessive acceleration;
WARNING
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The action of the ASR is particularly helpful in the following circumstances:
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 113
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
113
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
114
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 114
Failure warnings
In the event of malfunctioning, the ASR
system is automatically disconnected
and on versions fitted with “Reconfigurable multifunction display” symbol
V is displayed. In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.
WARNING
For correct operation of
the ASR system, the
tyres must absolutely be of
the same brand and type on all
wheels, in normal conditions of
use, at the proper inflation
pressure values and, above all,
of type, brand and size specified (see paragraph “Wheels”
in section “Technical Specifications”).
MSR system (engine braking
torque control)
It is an integral part of the ASR system
that in case of sudden gear shifting, cuts
in providing torque to the engine thus
preventing excessive driving wheel drive that, specially in poor grip conditions,
can lead to loss of stability.
It also alerts the driver, by turning on the
warning light U on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the
message on the display) (see section
“Warning lights and messages”), when
these conditions are no longer in peak
conditions.
❒ to warn when a fault causes emission
levels to increase;
❒ to warn of the need to replace deteriorated components.
The system also has a diagnostic connector that can be interfaced with appropriate tools, which makes it possible
to read the error codes stored in the control unit, together with a series of specific parameters for engine operation
and diagnosis. This check can also be
carried out by the traffic police.
IMPORTANT After eliminating the inconvenience, to check the system completely, Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
are obliged to run a bench test and, if
necessary, road tests which may also
call for a long journey.
If when fitting the key
into the ignition device,
the warning light U
does not turn on or if, while
travelling it turns on glowing
steadily or flashing, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible. Warning
light U operation can be
checked by means of special
equipment by traffic agents. Always comply with the traffic
regulations in force in the country where you are travelling.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The EOBD system (European On Board
Diagnosis) allows continuous diagnosis
of the components of the car correlated with emissions.
❒ to keep system efficiency under control;
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The objective is:
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
EOBD SYSTEM
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 115
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
115
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
116
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 116
SOUND SYSTEM
PRESETTING
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
When the sound system has not been
requested the car is provided with two
oddment compartments on the instrument panel.
Sound system presetting includes:
❒ sound system power cables;
❒ front and rear speakers cables;
❒ aerial power cable;
❒ sound system compartment;
If you decide to install
the sound system after
buying the car, contact
first Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services that will give you useful advice about installation and
how to safeguard the battery.
Excessive loadless absorption
damages the battery and the
battery warranty can be invalidated.
ACCESSORIES
PURCHASED
BY THE OWNER
If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a
permanent electric supply (alarm, satellite antitheft system, etc.) or accessories
that in any case burden the electric supply, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, whose qualified personnel, besides
suggesting the most suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo, will
also evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking whether the car’s electric
system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery.
❒ aerial on car roof.
The sound system shall be installed in
the proper space occupied by the oddment compartment that shall be removed by pressing the two retaining
tabs set in the oddment compartment:
here you will find the power cables.
WARNING
Take care when fitting
additional spoilers, alloy rims and non-standard
wheel caps: they might reduce
ventilation of the brakes, thus
their efficiency, during abrupt
and repeated braking, or long
downhill slopes. Make sure
that nothing (mats, etc.) gets
in the way of the pedals when
they are pushed down.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized
shop, workmanlike performed and in
compliance with manufacturer’s specifications.
Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibility for damages caused by the installation of non-genuine accessories or not
recommended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and
installed not in compliance with the specified requirements.
Radio transceiver equipment (vehicle
mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio and similar equipment) shall not be
used inside the car unless a separate aerial is mounted on the roof.
IMPORTANT The use of mobile
phones, HAM radio systems or other
similar devices inside the passenger
compartment (without separate aerial)
may cause electronic systems equipping
the car to malfunction. This could compromise safety in addition to constituting a potential hazard for the passengers.
In addition, transmission and reception
of these devices may be affected by the
shielding effect of the car body.
As concerns the use of mobile phones
(GSM, GPRS, UMTS) with homologation
, keep strictly to the mobile
phone manufacturer’s specifications.
SAFETY
DEVICES
RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND
CELLULAR TELEPHONES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Electric/electronic devices installed after buying the car or in aftermarket shall
bear the and marking:
IMPORTANT Installation of devices
resulting in modifications of car characteristics may cause driving license seizing by traffic agents and also the lapse
of the warranty as concerns defects due
to the abovementioned modification or
traceable back to it directly or indirectly.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INSTALLATION OF
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 117
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
117
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
118
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 118
PARKING SENSORS
(where provided)
Parking sensors inform the driver about
the presence of obstacles behind the car
(versions fitted with 4 rear sensors) or
behind and in front of the car (versions
fitted with 4 rear sensors and 4 front
sensors).
This system is therefore an aid for the
driver when parking the car since it detects obstacles out of the driver’s sight
range.
The presence and the distance from the
car of an obstacle is indicated by a warning buzzer - as the distance from the obstacle decreases, the acoustic alarm becomes more frequent - and, only on certain versions, by an image on the display (see paragraph “Indications on the
display).
Versions with 8 sensors
Front and rear sensors are automatically activated with electronic key fitted into the ignition device when reverse gear
is engaged or when pressing the front
ceiling light button A-fig. 104 with
speed below 15 km/h.
Versions with 4 sensors
Sensors are deactivated by pressing
again button A-fig. 104 if the speed
is lower than 15 km/h or when exceeding 18 km/h. If the system is off,
the button led is off.
Front sensors are automatically activated with electronic key fitted into the ignition device when reverse gear is engaged or when pressing the front ceiling light button A-fig. 104 with speed
below 15 km/h.
When sensors are on, front and rear indicators will sound warning signals as
soon as an obstacle is detected: as the
distance from the obstacle decreases,
the acoustic alarm becomes more frequent.
Sensors are deactivated when exceeding 18 km/h or, on certain versions by
pressing again the button if the speed is
lower than 15 km/h A-fig. 104. If
the system is off on versions with deactivation button, the button led is off.
When the distance between the car and
the obstacle is less than 30 cm, the
acoustic alarm becomes continuous. According to obstacle position (in front or
behind the car), the acoustic alarm will
be emitted by front or rear indicators.
fig. 104
A0E0482m
ACTIVATION
In any case the system will indicate the
obstacle closest to the car.
The presence of any obstacle and its distance from the car is indicated by the
buzzers installed inside the passenger
compartment:
fig. 105
A0E0231m
fig. 106
A0E0232m
❒ on versions with 8 sensors (4 front
sensors and 4 rear sensors) obstacles
are indicated by rear and front
buzzers. This feature gives the driver the direction (front/rear) of the
obstacle.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
Parking manoeuvres
however are always
under the driver’s responsibility that shall always check the
absence of people (specially
children) or animals in the manoeuvre space. This system is
just a help for the driver but
she/he shall never reduce attention during dangerous manoeuvres even if performed at
low speed.
❒ on versions with 4 rear sensors, the
rear buzzer will indicate the presence
of rear obstacles;
SAFETY
DEVICES
BUZZER
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The acoustic alarm will stop immediately
as distance raises. The acoustic alarm is
constant if the distance measured by
central sensors is unvaried, whereas if
this situation takes place for side sensors the acoustic alarm is muted after
about 3 seconds to prevent sound indications when performing manoeuvres
near walls.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 119
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:09
SENSORS
Obstacles are detected by 4 sensors located in the front bumper (where provided) fig. 105 and 4 sensors located
in the rear bumper fig. 106.
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
119
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 120
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
120
fig. 107
A0E0239m
INDICATIONS ON THE
DISPLAY (for versions/markets,
where provided)
On versions with 8 sensors, sensor activation is indicated on the “Reconfigurable multifunction display” (where provided) by screen fig.107; therefore obstacle presence and distance is indicated
(in addition to buzzer) also on the instrument panel display.
In the event of several obstacles, the obstacle closest to the car will be indicated.
For proper operation,
the parking sensors shall
always be clean from
mud, dirt, snow or ice. When
cleaning the sensors, take the
utmost care to prevent their
damaging; do not use therefore
dry or rough clothes. Sensors
shall be washed with clean water and car detergent, if required. In washing stations,
clean sensors quickly keeping
the vapour jet/high pressure
washing nozzles at 10 cm at
least from the sensors.
Repainting the bumpers
or touch-up in the sensor area, if required,
shall be carried out at Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services only. Incorrect repainting may impair regular operation of the
parking sensors.
SENSOR DETECTION
RANGE
Sensors enable the system to monitor
the front part (versions with 8 sensors)
and the rear part of the car.
Actually their position covers the central
and side areas of the front and rear part
of the car.
An obstacle positioned at central area is
detected at a distance less than 0.9 m
(front) and 1.40 m (rear).
An obstacle positioned at side area is detected at a distance less than 0.6 m.
Rear sensors operation
is deactivated automatically when the trailer
electric cable plug is fitted into
the car tow hook socket.
FAILURE INDICATIONS
The system control unit checks every
system component each time the key is
fitted into the ignition device. Sensors
and relevant electrical connections are
then constantly monitored during system operation.
Sensor failure is indicated by turning on
of warning light t (where provided)
on the instrument panel (on certain versions together with the message on the
display) (see section “Warning lights
and messages”).
If the warning light stays on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have
the system inspected, although the system keeps on working. If the failure detected does not impair system operation,
the system keeps on working and failure is stored in order to be then detected by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
at next inspection.
When parking, take the utmost care to
obstacles that may be set above or under the sensors. Objects set close to the
car front or rear part, under certain circumstances are not detected and could
therefore cause damages to the car or
be damaged.
Indications sent by the sensors can be
altered by dirt, snow or ice deposited on
the sensors or by ultrasound systems
(e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes or pneumatic hammers) set nearby the car.
SAFETY
DEVICES
GENERAL WARNINGS
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Rear sensors are reactivated automatically when removing the trailer cable
plug.
If a failure is indicated, stop the car, turn
the engine off and then clean the sensors. Make sure to be far from possible
ultrasound sources (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes or pneumatic hammers).
If failure cause has been eliminated the
system will resume regular operation
and warning t and the corresponding
warning message will turn off.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TOWING TRAILERS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 121
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
121
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
122
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 122
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM T.P.M.S. (for versions/markets, where provided)
The car may be equipped with a Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System, which indicates to the driver the tyre pressure
status by two different indications:
“Check tyre pressures” and “Low tyre
pressures”. For a detailed description of
the two indications, see the “Warning
Lights and Messages” section. This system consists of a radio-frequency sensor, installed on each wheel (on the rim
inside the tyre) that sends pressure information to the control unit.
WARNING
The T.P.M.S. does not
exempt the driver from
checking tyre pressure, including the space-saver spare
wheel (for versions/markets,
where provided) at regular intervals.
IMPORTANT NOTES
Failure indications will not be stored and
therefore will not be displayed when
turning the engine off and on again. If
failure persists, the control unit will send
warning indications to the instrument
panel only after a few seconds when the
car is moving.
Tyre pressure should be checked with
tyres cold. Should it become necessary
for whatever reason to check pressure
with hot tyres, do not reduce pressure
although it is higher than the prescribed
value but repeat the check when tyres
are cold (see section “Wheels” in section “Technical Specifications”).
T.P.M.S. cannot indicate sudden tyre
pressure drops (e.g.: tyre burst). In this
event, brake the car cautiously and
avoid sudden steering.
The T.P.M.S. system requires special
equipment. Consult Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to know what type of accessories are compatible with the system (wheels, wheel caps, etc.). Using
other accessories could cause system
malfunctioning. Due to inflation valve
special characteristics, use only tyre repair sealants approved by Alfa Romeo;
other sealants could cause system malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure could change according to
outside temperature. For this reason the
T.P.M.S. system could temporarily indicate low tyre pressure. In this event
check pressure with cold tyres and restore proper inflation values if required.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Strong radio-frequency disturbances
could inhibit proper TPMS system operation. This condition is indicated by a
dedicated massage on the display. This
indication will go off automatically as
soon as the radio-frequency disturbance
ceases.
If the car is fitted with T.P.M.S. system,
tyre and/or rim removal and refitting
operations involve special precautions;
to prevent damages or wrong sensor refitting, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have tyre and/or rim
changed.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
If after repairing a punctured tyre with
the Fix&Go automatic kit and restoring
the initial conditions the flat tyre warning light continues to stay on, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
If the car is fitted with T.P.M.S. system,
when changing a tyre, change also the
rubber seal of the valve and the fastening ring of the sensor. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 123
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
123
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
124
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 124
In order to use the system properly, refer to the following table when you have to change wheels/tyres:
Operation
Sensor presence
Failure Indication
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services operation
–
–
YES
Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services
Wheel change
with space-saver spare wheel
NO
YES
Repair damaged
wheel
Wheel change
with snow tyres
NO
YES
Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services
Wheel change
with snow tyres
YES
NO
–
Wheel change
with others of different
size (*)
YES
NO
–
Wheel cross switching
(front/rear) (**)
YES
NO
–
(*) Given as an alternative on the owner's manual and to be found in Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo.
(**) Not crossed (tyres shall remain on the same side).
Use only unleaded petrol. To prevent errors, the diameter of the fuel tank filler
is too small to introduce a lead petrol
pump filler. Use petrol with a rated octane number (R.O.N.) not lower than
95.
If the outside temperature is very low,
the diesel thickens due to the formation
of paraffins and could clog the diesel fuel filter.
IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst
leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus
contributing to air pollution.
IMPORTANT Never use leaded
petrol, even in small amount or in an
emergency, as this would damage the
catalyst beyond repair.
In order to avoid these problems, different types of diesel are distributed according to the season: summer type,
winter type arctic type (mountains/cold
areas).
If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable
for the current temperature, mix diesel
fuel with TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the proportions stated on the
can, putting first the antifreeze in the
tank and then the diesel fuel.
If driving or parking the vehicle for a long
period in cold areas/mountains, refuel
with the diesel fuel available at local filling stations. In this situation you are also recommended to have in the tank an
amount of fuel 50% higher than usable
capacity.
SAFETY
DEVICES
DIESEL ENGINES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IMPORTANT Refuelling shall always
be performed with engine off. Failing to
observe this precaution could cause the
gauge to provide wrong indications.
Should this occur, to restore proper indication just have next refuelling with
the engine off. Otherwise contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
PETROL ENGINES
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
AT THE FILLING
STATION
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 125
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
125
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
126
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 126
The car must only be
filled with diesel fuel for
motor vehicles, in compliance with European Standard
EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due
to the damage caused. In the
event of accidentally filling with
another type of fuel, do not
start the engine and empty the
tank. If the engine has been run
even for only a very short time,
in addition to the tank, it is also necessary to drain out the
whole fuel circuit.
REFUELLING
To guarantee full tank filling, carry out
two refuelling operations after the first
click of the fuel delivery gun. Avoid further topping up operations that could
cause damages to the fuel system.
FUEL FILLER CAP
The fuel filler cap is unlocked when central door locking is off and it is automatically locked when activating the
central door locking.
Opening
Open the flap A-fig. 109 by means
of front part (see figure), turn cap B anti-clockwise and extract it. The cap has
a device C retaining it to the flap so it
cannot be lost. When refuelling, attach
the cap to the flap, as illustrated.
Closing
Fit cap B in its housing and turn it clockwise until it clicks once or more, then close
the flap A.
When refuelling, position the cap on the
device inside the flap as shown in the
figure.
A
C
fig. 109
B
A0E0799m
IMPORTANT The sealing of the tank
may cause light pressurising in the tank.
A little breathing off, while slackening
the cap, is absolutely normal.
fig. 110
A0E0130m
EMERGENCY OPENING OF
THE FUEL FILLER CAP
In case of failure, the fuel filler cap can
be opened by pulling string set on the
right side of the boot fig. 110.
❒ Lambda sensor;
❒ fuel evaporation system.
In addition, do not let the engine run,
even for a test, with one or more spark
plugs disconnected.
The devices for curtailing diesel fuel engine emissions are the following:
❒ oxidising catalytic converter;
❒ exhaust gas recirculation system
(E.G.R.);
❒ diesel particulate filter (DPF) (where
required).
SAFETY
DEVICES
❒ three-way catalytic converter;
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The devices for curtailing petrol engine
emissions are the following:
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
PROTECTING
THE ENVIRONMENT
WARNING
Do not put naked flames
or lighted cigarettes
near the fuel filler hole as there
is danger of fire. Do not bend
too close to the hole either so
as not to breathe in harmful
vapours.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 127
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
127
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
083-128 Alfa 159 GB
128
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 128
WARNING
During normal service
the diesel particulate
filter (DPF) (where required)
reaches high temperatures.
Do not therefore park the car
over inflammable materials
(grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire hazard.
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER
(DPF) (where required)
The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechanical filter, integral with the exhaust
system, that physically traps particulate
present in the exhaust gases of Diesel
engines.
The diesel particular filter has been
adopted to eliminate almost totally particulates in compliance with current /
future law regulations.
During normal use of the car, the engine
control unit records a set of data (e.g.:
travel time, type of route, temperatures,
etc.) and it will then calculate how much
particulates has been trapped by the filter.
Since this filter physically traps particulates, it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) at
regular intervals by burning carbon particles. Reclaiming procedure is controlled
automatically by the engine control unit
according to the filter conditions and the
conditions of use of the car. During reclaiming the following phenomena could
take place: idling slight increase, fan activation, slight smoke increase, high exhaust temperatures. These situations
shall not be considered as faults and they
do not affect car performance and environment.
SEAT BELTS ...................................................... 130
S.B.R. SYSTEM ................................................ 131
PRETENSIONERS ............................................... 132
SAFETY
DEVICES
SAFETY DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 129
PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE
“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX”CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM..... 140
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY .............................. 135
SIDE AIR BAGS (Side bag - Window bag) ............. 145
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FRONT AIR BAGS............................................... 142
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:50
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
129
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 130
SEAT BELTS
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
To fasten seat belts, take the tongue
A-fig. 1 and insert it into the buckle
B, until hearing the locking click.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for
a short stretch, then pull it out again
without jerking.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button
C. Guide the seat belt with your hand
while it is rewinding, to prevent it from
twisting.
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
The belt should be worn keeping the
chest straight and rested against the seat
back.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
USING THE SEAT BELTS
IN AN
EMERGENCY
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
130
A0E0083m
fig. 1
WARNING
Never press button C
when travelling.
Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger
wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is
normal. The reel mechanism prevents
the webbing coming out when it is jerked
or if the car brakes sharply, in a collision
or when cornering at high speed.
fig. 2
A0E0055m
The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat
belts with three anchor points and reel
for side and central seats.
Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown
in the figure fig. 2.
A0E0085m
IMPORTANT On certain versions, correct backrest fastening is guaranteed
when the “red band” A-fig. 3 aside
levers B is no longer visible. The “red
band” actually indicates that the backrest is not properly secured.
IMPORTANT After putting the seats
back to their travelling position, restore
the seat belt position to make them
ready for use.
WARNING
Make sure the backrest
is properly secured at
both sides (red band A-fig. 3
not visible) to prevent it moves
forward in the event of sharp
braking causing injuries to passengers.
The buzzer can be muted temporarily by
the following procedure:
❒ fasten the front seat belts;
❒ fit the electronic key into the ignition device;
❒ wait for over 20 seconds but less than
1 minute and then unfasten one of the
front seat belts.
This procedure will stand valid till next engine switching off.
For permanent deactivation, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The S.B.R.
system can only be reset through the setup menu (see paragraph “Reconfigurable
multifunction display“ in section “Dashboard and controls”).
SAFETY
DEVICES
The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system
(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of a
buzzer which, together with the turning
on of warning light <, warns the driver
and the front passenger to fasten the
seat belt.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 3
S.B.R. SYSTEM
(Seat Belt Reminder)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
Remember that in the
event of a violent collision, back seat passengers not
wearing seat belts also represent a serious danger for the
front seat passengers.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 131
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:50
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
131
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
132
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 132
PRETENSIONERS
To increase the efficiency of the seat
belts, the car is fitted with front pretensioners. These devices, in the event of
a violent crash, rewind the seat belts a
few centimetres. In this way they ensure that the seat belt adheres perfectly to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
Front pretensioners activation is indicated by buckle withdrawal downwards.
IMPORTANT To obtain the highest
degree of protection from the action of
the pretensioning device, wear the seat
belt keeping it firmly close to the chest
and pelvis.
Front seat pretensioners activate only
if front seat belts are properly fitted into buckles.
A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic and
presents no fire hazard.
Anything that modifies its original conditions invalidates its efficiency. Anything
that modifies its original conditions invalidates its efficiency. If due to unusual natural events (floods, seas storm,
etc.) the device has been affected by
water and mud, it must necessarily be
replaced.
WARNING
The pretensioner can
only be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Pretensioner validity is indicated on the label inside the
glovebox. Pretensioners should
be replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as this date
approaches.
Operations which lead
to knocks, vibrations or
localised heating (over
100°C for a maximum of 6
hours) in the area around the
pretensioners may cause damage or trigger them. These devices are not affected by vibrations caused by irregularities of
the road surface or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
for any assistance.
LOAD LIMITERS
To increase passenger’s safety, the front
seat belt reels contain a load limiter
which allows controlled sag in such a
way as to dose the force acting on the
chest and shoulders during the belt restraining action in case of front crash.
A0E0104m
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
FOR USING
THE SEAT BELTS
The driver must comply with (and have
the vehicle occupants follow) all the local legal regulations concerning the use
of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting.
Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the
case of accident is greatly reduced for
them and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt. Of course they must
position the lower part of the belt very
low down so that it passes under the abdomen fig. 5.
fig. 6
A0E0103m
IMPORTANT The belt should not be
twisted. The upper part should pass over
the shoulder and cross the chest diagonally. The lower part should adhere to
the pelvis fig. 6 and not the abdomen
of the passenger. Do not use any objects
(pegs, stoppers, etc.) to keep the belts
away from the body.
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 5
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
For maximum protection keep the back of
your seat upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat
belt fits closely across your
chest and hips. Make sure that
the seat belts of the front and
rear passengers are fastened
at all times! You increase the
risk of serious injury or death
in a collision if you travel with
the belts unfastened.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 133
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:50
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
133
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 134
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
WARNING
134
fig. 7
A0E0105m
IMPORTANT Never travel with a child
sitting on the passenger’s lap with a single belt to protect them both fig. 7.
Do not fasten other objects to the body.
Under no circumstances
should the components
of the seat belts and pretensioners be tampered with or
removed. Any operation
should be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
WARNING
If the belt has been
subjected to heavy
stress, for example after an
accident, it should be changed
completely together with the
anchors, anchor fastening
screws and the pretensioners.
In fact, even if the belt has no
visible defects, it could have
lost its resilience.
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT
BELTS ALWAYS IN
EFFICIENT CONDITIONS
❒ Always use the belt with the tape taut
and never twisted; make sure that
it is free to run without impediments;
❒ after a serious accident, replace the
belt being worn at that time, even if
it does not appear damaged. Always
replace the seat belts if pretensioners
have been activated;
❒ to clean the belts, wash by hand with
neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry
in the shade. Never use strong detergents, bleach or dyes or other
chemical substance that might weaken the fibres;
❒ prevent the reels from getting wet:
their correct operation is only guaranteed if water does not get inside;
❒ replace the seat belt when showing
significant wear or cut signs.
This prescription is compulsory in all EC
countries according to EC Directive
2003/20/EC.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is
proportionately larger and heavier than
the rest of the body, while muscles and
bone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, in order to restraint
them correctly in the event of a crash,
different systems are needed than adult
seat belts.
Group 0 - 0-10 kg in weight
SAFETY
DEVICES
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo offers seats for
each weight group, which are the recommended choice, as they have been
designed and experimented specifically for Alfa Romeo cars.
Group 0+ - 0-13 kg in weight
Group 1
9-18 kg in weight
Group 2
15-25 kg in weight
Group 3
22-36 kg in weight
As it may be noted, the groups overlap
partly and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more
than one weight group.
All restraint devices must bear the certification data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which
must absolutely never be removed.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point
of view of restraint systems, children are
considered as adults and wear the seat
belts normally.
WARNING
With passenger’s air
bag active, never place
child’s seats with the cradle
facing backwards since the air
bag activation could cause to
the child serious injuries, even
mortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised to
carry children always with
proper restraint systems on
the rear seats, as this is the
most protected position in the
case of a crash.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
For optimal protection in the event of
a crash, all passengers must be seated
and wearing adequate restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
The results of research on the best child
restraint systems are contained in the
European Standard ECE-R44. This Standard enforces the use of restraint systems classified in five groups:
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CARRYING
CHILDREN SAFELY
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 135
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:50
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
135
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
136
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 136
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER If it
is absolutely necessary
to carry a child on the
front passenger seat
with the cradle child’s
seat facing backwards, the
front passenger’s air bags
(front air bag, knees air bag,
for versions/markets, where
provided, and side bag on
seat), must be deactivated using the key switch. In this case
it is absolutely necessary to
check the warning light F on
the front ceiling light panel
(see paragraph “Passenger’s
front air bag”) to make sure
that deactivation has actually
taken place. Moreover, the
front passenger’s seat shall be
adjusted in the most backward
position to prevent any contact
between the child’s seat and
the dashboard.
fig. 8
A0E0106m
A0E0106m
fig. 9
GROUP 0 and 0+
GROUP 1
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards fig. 8 on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of
sharp deceleration.
Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight,
children may be carried facing forwards,
with seat fitted with front cushion
fig. 9, through which the car seat belt
restrains both child and seat.
The cradle is restrained by the car seat
belts and in turn it must restrain the child
with its own belts.
WARNING
The figure is only an example for mounting. Attain to the instructions for fastening which must be enclosed
with the specific child restraining system you are using.
Pagina 137
A0E0108m
A0E0109m
fig. 11
GROUP 2
GROUP 3
Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight,
children may be restrained directly by
the car belts. The only function of the
seat is to position the child correctly in
relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part adheres to the chest and not
to the neck and that the horizontal part
clings to the child’s pelvis and not the
abdomen fig. 10.
For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the
size of the child’s chest no longer requires a support to space the child’s back
from the seat back. Fig. 11 shows
proper child seat positioning on the rear
seat.
Children taller than 1.50 m can wear
seat belts like adults.
WARNING
The illustrations are indicative only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the compulsory instructions provided with it.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
fig. 10
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
WARNING
Seats exist which are
suitable for covering
weight groups 0 and 1 with a
rear connection to the car belts
and their own belts to restrain
the child. Due to their size, they
can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened to the car
belts with a cushion. Carefully
follow the instructions for installation provided with the
seat.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:50
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
137
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 138
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Your car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats
according to the following tables:
Front and rear seat (fixed and double seat)
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SEAT
138
Group
Range
of weight
Front
Rear
Seat with
6 positions
Seat with
8 positions
Rear seat side
up to 13 kg
U (*)
U (*)
U
U
Group 1
9-18 kg
U (*)
U (*)
U
U
Group 2
15-25 kg
U (*)
U (*)
U
U
Group 3
22-36 kg
U (*)
U (*)
U
U
Group 0, 0+
Rear seat central
Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”.
(*) = on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall be positioned perfectly upright. On cars fitted with
passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat shall be raised as much as possible.
❒ if the passenger’s air bag is deactivated always check that the warning light F on the front ceiling light
panel is glowing steadily to indicate
that the air bag has been deactivated;
❒ attain to the instructions for fastening the specific child restraint system
which you are using. These instructions must be provided by the manufacturer. Keep the child restraint system installation instructions with the
car documents and this Handbook.
Never use a child restraint system
without installation instructions;
❒ always check the seat belts do not fit
around the child’s throat;
❒ while travelling, do not let the child
sit incorrectly or release the belts;
❒ passengers should never carry children on their laps. No-one, however
strong they are, can hold a child in
the event of a crash;
❒ in case of an accident, replace the
seat with a new one.
SAFETY
DEVICES
❒ only one child is to be strapped to
each retaining system;
WARNING
With passenger’s air
bag active, never place
child’s seats with the cradle
facing backwards since the air
bag activation could cause to
the child serious injuries, even
mortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. You are advised to
carry children always with
proper restraint systems on
the rear seats, as this is the
most protected position in the
case of a crash.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
❒ the recommended position for installing child’s seat is on the rear seat,
as it is the most protected in the case
of a crash;
❒ always check the seat belt is well fastened by pulling the webbing;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Below is a summary of the
rules of safety to be followed
for carrying children:
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 139
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:50
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
139
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 140
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Fig. 11/a shows an example of child
restraint system. The Universal Isofix
child’s seat covers weight group: 1.
Due to its different anchoring system,
the Universal Isofix child's seat shall be
anchored to the proper lower metal rings
A-fig.12, set between rear seat back
and cushion. The upper belt (provided
with the child's seat) shall be then secured to fasteners B-fig.13 set behind
head restraints.
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
This car is preset for mounting the Universal Isofix child restraint system, a
new European standardised system for
carrying children safely.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
PRESETTING FOR
MOUNTING THE
“UNIVERSAL
ISOFIX” CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
IN AN
EMERGENCY
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
140
It is possible to mount at the same time
both the traditional restraint system and
the “Universal Isofix” one.
Remember that in case of Universal Isofix
child’s seat, you can only use all those
seats approved with the marking ECE
R44/03 “Universal Isofix”.
fig. 11/a
A0E0241m
At Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo is available
the “Universal Isofix” “Duo Plus” child’s
seat shown in.
For any further installation/use detail,
refer to the “Instructions Manual” that
must be provided by the child restraint
system Manufacturer.
fig. 12
A0E0174m
fig. 13
A0E0190m
WARNING
Mount the child restraint
system only with the car
stationary. The Isofix child restraint system is properly anchored to the mounting brackets
when clicks are heard. In any
case, keep to the installation instructions that must be provided by the child restraint system
Manufacturer.
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 141
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSALS ISOFIX CHILD’S
SEAT USE
Group 0 - 0 to 10 kg
Facing backwards
E
IL
Facing backwards
E
IL
Facing backwards
D
IL
Facing backwards
C
IL
Facing backwards
D
IL
Facing backwards
C
IL
Facing forwards
B
IUF
Facing forwards
BI
IUF
Facing forwards
A
IUF
Group 0+ - 0 to 13 kg
Group I - 9
to 18 kg
IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), approved for
the weight group.
IL: suitable for Isofix Type child restraint systems, specific and approved for this type of car. The child's seat can be installed by moving
forward the front seat
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Isofix position
side rear
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Isofix
size group
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Child’s seat
direction
INDEX
Range of weight
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
The table below, according to ECE 16 European Directive, shows the different installation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universals Isofix fasteners.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
141
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
142
8-04-2009
10:50
Pagina 142
FRONT AIR BAGS
The car is fitted with front multistage air
bags (“Smart bags”) for the driver and
the passenger and with knees air bag
for the driver and for the passenger (for
versions/markets, where provided).
“SMART BAG” SYSTEM
(FRONT MULTISTAGE AIR
BAGS)
The front air bags (driver and passenger) and knees air bags (driver and passenger) have been designed to protect
the occupants in the event of head-on
crashes of medium-high severity, by placing cushions between the occupant and
the steering wheel or dashboard.
In case of crash, an electronic control
unit, when required, triggers the inflation of the cushions that inflate, as a protection, between the body of the front
occupants and the structure that could
cause injuries. Immediately after, the
cushions deflate.
The front air bags (driver and passenger) and knees air bags (driver and passenger) are not a replacement of but
complementary to the use of belts,
which should always be worn, as specified by law in Europe and most non European countries.
In case of crash, a person not wearing
the seat belt moves forward and may
come into contact with the cushion while
it is still inflating. Under this circumstance the protection offered by the air
bag is reduced.
Front air bags may not be activated in
the following situations:
❒ front collisions against highly deformable objects not affecting the car
front surface (e.g. bumper collision
against guard rail, etc.);
❒ in case of wedging under other vehicles or protective barriers (for example under a truck or guard rail);
❒ the air bag is not triggered as it offers
no additional protection compared with
the seat belts, consequently it would
be pointless. Therefore, failure to come
into action in the above circumstance
does not mean that the system is not
working properly.
WARNING
Do not apply stickers
or other objects to the
steering wheel or to the air
bag cover on the passenger’s
side or on the side roof lining.
Never put objects (e.g. mobile
phones) on the dashboard on
passenger side since they
could interfere with proper
passenger air bag inflation and
also cause serious injury.
A0E0077m
DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion
contained in a special recess in the centre of the steering wheel fig. 14.
A0E0078m
fig. 15
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIR BAG
It consists of an instant-inflating cushion contained into a special recess in the
dashboard fig. 15, this cushion has a
volume bigger than that of the driver.
WARNING
With passenger’s air
bag active, never place
child’s seats with the cradle
facing backwards since the air
bag activation could cause to
the child serious injuries, even
mortal.
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
fig. 14
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
WARNING
On cars fitted with
front passenger’s air
bag deactivation (front
air bag, knees air bag
(for versions/markets,
where provided) and side on
seat), these air bags shall be
deactivated when placing the
child’s seat on the front passenger’s seat. Moreover, the
front passenger’s seat shall be
adjusted in the most backward
position to prevent any contact
between the child’s seat and
the dashboard. Even if not
compulsory by law, you are
recommended to reactivate the
air bag immediately as soon as
the child transport is no longer
necessary.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 143
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
143
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 144
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
144
fig. 16
A0E0079m
DRIVER’S AND
PASSENGER’S KNEES
AIR BAG (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Knees air bag consists of an instant-inflating cushion housed into a special
compartment provided for the purpose
under the steering wheel for the driver
fig. 16 and into the lower part of the
dashboard for the passenger fig. 17,
to give further protection in the event of
frontal crash.
fig. 17
A0E0092m
fig. 18
A0E0062m
MANUAL DEACTIVATION (for versions/markets, where provided)
OF PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG , KNEES AIR BAG
(for versions/markets, where provided)
AND PASSENGER’S FRONT SIDE BAG
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s front air bag, knees air bag (for
versions/markets, where provided) and
the side bag can be deactivated. Deactivation/activation shall be performed
(with key removed from ignition device)
using the key switch set on the right side
of dashboard fig. 18. You can reach
the switch only if the door is opened.
When the door is open, the metal insert
of the key can be inserted and removed
in both positions.
IMPORTANT Operate the switch only when the engine is not running and
the ignition key is removed.
The key-operated switch has two positions:
❒ passenger's front air bag and knees
air bag (for versions/markets, where
provided) and side bag activated
(ON position P): warning light F
on front ceiling light panel off; it is
absolutely prohibited to carry a child
on the front seat;
Pagina 145
Passenger's air bags deactivation will
not inhibit the operation of the head protection side bag (Window Bag).
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
SAFETY
DEVICES
The car is fitted with front side bags for
driver and passenger for protecting the
chest and window bags for protecting front
and rear occupant’s head.
fig. 19
A0E0093m
Side bags protect car occupants from
side crashes of medium-high severity, by
placing the cushion between the occupant and the internal parts of the side
structure of the car.
Side air bags are not a replacement of
but complementary to the belts, which
you are recommended to always wear,
as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
Non-activation of side bags in other
types of collisions (front collisions, rear
shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not a system
malfunction.
FRONT SIDE BAGS CHEST AND PELVIS
ZONE PROTECTION
In case of side crash, an electronic control unit, when required triggers the inflation of the cushion. The cushion immediately inflates, placing itself as a protection, between the occupant’s body
and the structure that could cause injuries. Immediately after, the cushion deflates.
They are composed by two types of instant inflation cushions and are housed
in the back rest of the front seats fig.
19. The task of the side air bags is to
increase protection of the occupants’
chest and pelvis zone in the event of a
side crash of medium-high severity.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The warning light F on front ceiling
light panel stays on permanently until the
passenger’s air bags are reactivated.
SIDE AIR BAGS
(Side bag Window bag)
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ passenger's front air bag and knees
air bag (for versions/markets, where
provided) and side bag deactivated
(OFF position F): warning light
F on front ceiling light panel on;
it is possible to carry a child protected by special restraint systems on the
front seat.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
145
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 146
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
IMPORTANT In the event of side
crash, you can obtain the best protection by the system keeping a correct position on the seat, allowing thus a correct window bag unfolding.
146
fig. 20
A0E0185m
SIDE WINDOW BAGS HEAD PROTECTION
They are “curtain” cushions located behind the side coverings of the roof fig.
20 and covered by proper finishing.
Window bags have been designed for
protecting the head of front and rear occupants in the event of side crash,
thanks to the wide cushion inflation surface. In minor side crashes (for which
the restraining action of the seat belts is
sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance
to wear the seat belts since in case of
side crash they guarantee proper positioning of the occupant and prevent the
occupants to be pitched out of the car in
case of violent crashes.
IMPORTANT The front air bags
and/or side bags may be deployed if
the car is subject to heavy knocks or
accidents involving the underbody area,
such as for example violent shocks,
against steps, kerbs or low obstacles,
falling of the car in big holes or sags in
the road.
IMPORTANT When the airbag inflates it emits a small amount of dusts.
These dusts are harmless and is not the
beginning of a fire; then the unfold cushion surface and the car interiors can be
covered by a dusty remains: this dust
can irritate skin and eyes. In case of contact, wash yourself using neutral soap
and water.
Expiration dates of pyrotechnic charge
and coil contact are indicated on the label inside the glovebox. As this date approaches, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the device replaced.
IMPORTANT Should an accident occur in which any of the safety devices is
activated, take the car to Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the devices
activated replaced and to have the system checked.
All control, repair and replacement operations concerning the air bags must
only be carried out c/o Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. If you are having the
car scrapped, have the air bag system deactivated at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services first. If the car changes ownership,
the new owner must be informed of the
method of use of air bags and the above
warnings and also be given this “Owner’s Manual”.
Never rest head, arms
and elbows on the
door, on the windows and in
the window bag unfolding
area to prevent possible injuries during the inflation
phase.
If when fitting the key
into the ignition device,
the warning light ¬ does not
turn on or if it stays on when
travelling (on certain versions
together with the message on
the display) there could be a
failure in safety systems; in
this event air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in
case of impact or, in a minor
number of cases, they could
trigger accidentally. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately to have the
system checked.
WARNING
Never lean head, arms
and elbows out of the
window.
WARNING
Always keep your
hands on the steering
wheel rim when driving, so
that if the air bag is triggered,
it can inflate without meeting
any obstacles which could
cause serious harm to you. Do
not drive with the body bent
forwards, keep the seat back
rest in the erect position and
lean your back well against it.
WARNING
Do not cover the backrest of front seats with
trims or covers that are not
suitable to be used with side
bags.
WARNING
If the car has been
stolen or an attempt to
steal it has been made, if it
has been subjected to vandals
or floods, have the air bag
system checked by Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
SAFETY
DEVICES
WARNING
WARNING
Never travel with objects on your lap, in
front of your chest or with a
pipe, pencil, etc. between your
lips; injury may result in the
event of the air bag being triggered.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
GENERAL WARNINGS
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IMPORTANT The triggering of pretensioners, front air bags and side bags
is decided in a differentiated manner according to the type of impact. The failure to deploy one or more of them does
not mean that the system is not working properly.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 147
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
147
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
129-148 Alfa 159 GB
148
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 148
WARNING
Remember that with
the key fitted into the
ignition device and engine off,
the air bags may be triggered
on a stationary car if it is
bumped by another moving
car. Therefore, never seat children on the front seat even
when the car is stationary. On
the other hand remember that
if the key is not fitted into the
ignition device, no safety system (air bags or pretensioners) is triggered in the event
of an impact; in this case, failure to come into action cannot
be considered as a sign that
the system is not working
properly.
WARNING
When the key is fitted
into the ignition device,
the warning light F (with passenger’s front air bags deactivation switch at ON) turns on
and flashes for few seconds to
remind that passenger’s front
air bag, knees air bag and side
bag will be deployed in a crash,
after which it should go off.
WARNING
Never wash seat backrests with pressurised
water or steam (by hand or at
automatic seat washing stations).
WARNING
The front air bag is triggered
for
shocks
greater in magnitude than the
pretensioners. For impacts between these two thresholds,
it is therefore normal that only the pretensioners are triggered.
WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects to the coat hooks
and to the support handles.
WARNING
The air bag does not
substitute the seat
belts, but only increases their
effectiveness. Moreover, since
the front air bags do not come
into operation in the event of
front impact at low speed, side
collisions, bumps from behind
or overturning, in these circumstances the occupants
would only be protected by
the seat belts which must
therefore always be fastened.
PARKING.......................................................... 155
USING THE GEARBOX......................................... 156
CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS............................. 157
TOWING TRAILERS............................................. 159
SNOW TYRES ................................................... 162
SNOW CHAINS ................................................. 163
CAR INACTIVITY ............................................... 164
SAFETY
DEVICES
ENGINE STARTING ............................................. 150
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 149
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
149
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
150
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 150
ENGINE STARTING
The car is fitted with an electronic engine
immobilising system. If the engine fails
to start, see paragraph “Alfa Romeo
CODE system” in section “Dashboard
and controls”.
IMPORTANT Tampering with the ignition device can cause unrequired steering lock.
IMPORTANT Fit completely the electronic key into the ignition device until
it locks into place.
IMPORTANT Never take the electronic key out of the ignition device while
the car is moving unless you have to carry out an emergency removal (see paragraph “Removing the electronic key from
the ignition device in an emergency”),
this ensures that the steering column lock
is deactivated while the car is moving
(e.g.: towing the car).
We recommend that
during the initial period
you do not drive to full
car performance (e.g.: excessive
acceleration, long journeys at
top speed, sharp braking, etc.).
When the engine is
switched off never leave
the electronic key into the
ignition device to prevent pointless current absorption from
draining the batter.
WARNING
Running the engine in
confined areas is extremely dangerous. The engine
consumes oxygen and produces carbon monoxide which
is a highly toxic and lethal gas.
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR
DIESEL VERSIONS
Proceed as follows:
With engine off and electronic key inserted in the ignition device, it is possible
to operate the automatic ignition briefly
pressing the START/STOP button and
keeping the clutch pedal pressed.
Proceed as follows:
IMPORTANT It is possible to start the
engine keeping pressed only the brake
pedal. In that case, automatic start is not
enabled. Then press the START/STOP
button and release it as soon as the engine starts.
❒ Put the gear lever neutral;
❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up;
❒ Fully press the clutch pedal, without
pressing the accelerator;
❒ Put the gear lever neutral;
❒ Fit the electronic key into the ignition
device to stop limit;
❒ Briefly press the START/STOP button.
❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up;
❒ Fully press the clutch pedal, without
pressing the accelerator;
❒ fit the electronic key down into the
ignition device until it stops. The instrument panel warning light m
will turn on;
❒ Wait for the warning light m to
turn off. The hotter the engine is, the
quicker this will happen;
❒ Briefly press the START/STOP button as soon as the warning light m
turns on. Waiting for too long means
making spark plugs heating useless.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The starter automatically operates until
the engine starts.
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR
PETROL VERSIONS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 151
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
151
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
152
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 152
The starter automatically operates until
the engine starts.
With engine off and electronic key inserted in the ignition device, it is possible to operate the automatic ignition
briefly pressing the START/STOP button and keeping the clutch pedal
pressed.
In the event of cold weather, we recommend to wait for warning light m
turn off before operating the starter.
IMPORTANT It is possible to start the
engine keeping pressed only the brake
pedal. In that case, automatic start is not
enabled. Then press the START/STOP
button and release it as soon as the engine starts.
IMPORTANT
If at start-up the engine turns off, restart
it by pressing the clutch or brake pedal
and then press button START/STOP.
If after a few attempts the engine does
not start, do not insist but contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
With car started the electronic key is
locked into the ignition device and it can
be removed only after switching the engine off. With car running and key
locked into the ignition device, forced
key removal could damage the ignition
device.
Start-up failures, if any, are indicated by
the turning on of the warning light Y
on the instrument panel (on certain versions a dedicated message is displayed).
In this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
If the engine will not start after pressing
button START/STOP, repeat the
start-up procedure by pressing the other pedal (clutch or brake).
In the event of failure, the electronic key
can be removed from the ignition device to
enable the driver to carry out the following operations:
❒ turn the instrument panel off by
pressing button START/STOP or
removing the electronic key from the
ignition device;
❒ start the engine again by pressing the
clutch/brake pedal and button
START/STOP.
IMPORTANT In the event of engine
locking while the car is running, due to
safety reasons it will not be possible to
take the electronic key out of the ignition device. To remove it, press button
START/STOP with brake pedal (or
clutch pedal) released and car stopped.
Proceed as follows:
❒ Drive off slowly, letting the engine
turn at medium revs. Do not accelerate abruptly;
❒ Do not drive at full performance for
the initial kilometres. Wait until the
coolant temperature gauge starts
moving.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
With car stopped press button START/
STOP. When the engine is off it will be
possible to remove the electronic key
from the ignition device.
WARNING
In an emergency, and
for safety reasons the
engine can be turned off when
the car is running by pressing
repeatedly (3 times within
2 seconds) or by keeping
pressed button START/STOP
for a few seconds. In this case
the steering lock cannot be engaged.
IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, you
should allow the engine to “catch its
breath” before turning it off by letting it
idle to allow the temperature in the engine compartment to fall.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The system can recognise start-up failures.
HOW TO WARM UP THE
ENGINE AFTER IT HAS
JUST STARTED
(petrol and diesel engines)
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
Start-up failures
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 153
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
153
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
154
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 154
IMPORTANT Turning the car off will
deactivate the electronic safety systems
and turn off the external lights.
REMOVING THE ELECTRONIC
KEY FROM THE IGNITION
DEVICE IN AN EMERGENCY
IMPORTANT In the event of engine
locking while the car is running, due to
safety reasons it will not be possible to
take the electronic key out of the ignition device. To remove it, turn the instrument panel on and off by pressing
button START/STOP with brake pedal (and clutch pedal) released and car
stopped.
In the event of a failure at engine switching off system or at electronic key unlocking system proceed as follows:
A quick burst on the accelerator before turning
off the engine serves
absolutely no practical purpose,
it wastes fuel and is damaging
especially to turbocharged engines.
❒ press the unlocking button to remove
the metal insert (see paragraph
“Electronic key” in section “Dashboard and controls”);
❒ fit the metal insert B-fig. 1 of the
electronic key into the slot A;
❒ remove the electronic key from the
ignition device.
fig. 1
A0E0043m
IMPORTANT Only fit the metal insert
B of the electronic key into slot A-fig.1.
IMPORTANT Stop the car before
emergency removal of the key, since removing the key with the engine running
will turn both the engine and the instrument panel off and the steering lock
will not be engaged.
Proceed as follows:
❒ Slightly lift the handbrake A and
press release button B;
❒ Stop the engine and engage the
handbrake;
❒ Engage a gear (on a slope, engage
first gear if the car is faced uphill or
reverse if it is faced downhill) and
leave the wheels steered.
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone
if the car is parked on a steep slope. Do
not leave the electronic key in the ignition switch to prevent draining the battery.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the car. Always remove the electronic key
from the ignition device when
leaving the car and take it out
with you.
❒ Keep button B pressed and lower the
lever. Warning light x on the instrument panel will turn off.
fig. 2
A0E0030m
HANDBRAKE
The handbrake lever A-fig. 2 is located between the two front seats. Pull the
handbrake lever A upwards, until the
car cannot be moved.
With electronic key fitted into the ignition device, the instrument panel warning light x will come on.
IMPORTANT The car shall stop after
a few clicks of the handbrake lever. If
this is not the case, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have the handbrake adjusted.
Press the brake pedal when carrying out
this operation to prevent the car from
moving accidentally.
SAFETY
DEVICES
To release the handbrake proceed as follows:
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
PARKING THE CAR
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 155
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
155
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
156
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 156
USING THE
GEARBOX
WARNING
The car can be fitted with 6-gear or
5-gear manual gearbox (1.8 140 HP
version). Gear positions are shown on
the gearshift lever knob.
Always press down the clutch pedal
when shifting gears. To engage the 6th
gear, move the gearshift lever pressing
slightly rightwards to prevent engaging
the 4th gear accidentally.
To engage reverse R from neutral, raise
ring A-fig. 3 or A-fig. 4 under the
knob and at the same time move the
gearshift lever leftwards and then forward. After engaging reverse release the
ring. To shift from reverse to another
gear it is not necessary to raise the ring.
fig. 3
fig. 4
A0E0397m
A0E0151m
IMPORTANT The car can only be put
into reverse gear when it has stopped
moving completely. With the engine running, before engaging the reverse, wait
at least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal fully down to prevent damage and
grating of the gears.
To change gears properly you must push the
clutch pedal fully down. It is
therefore essential that there
is nothing under the pedals:
make sure mats are lying flat
and do not get in the way of
the pedals.
Do not drive with your
hand resting on the gear
lever as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead
over time to premature wear on
the gearbox internal components. The clutch pedal must be
used for gear shift only. Never
drive with the foot resting,
even if slightly, on the clutch
pedal. For versions/markets
where applicable the clutch pedal control electronics can intervene interpreting the wrong drive style as a fault.
Climate control
Do not travel with too much luggage
stowed in the boot. The weight of the
car (especially when driving in town)
and its trim greatly affects consumption
and stability.
The air conditioner is an additional load
which greatly affects the engine leading
to higher consumption. When the temperature outside the car permits it, use
the air vents where possible.
Roof rack/ski rack
Spoilers
Have checks and adjustments carried out
in accordance with the “Service schedule”.
Remove the roof rack or the ski rack
from the roof as soon as they are no
longer used. These accessories lower air
penetration and adversely affect consumption levels. When needing to carry particularly voluminous objects, preferably use a trailer.
The use of aerodynamic optional extras
which are not certified for the specific
use on the vehicle, may reduce the aerodynamic penetration of the vehicle and
increase consumption.
Tyres
Electric devices
Check the pressure of the tyres routinely at an interval of no more than 4
weeks: if the pressure is too low, consumption levels increase as resistance
to rolling is higher.
Use electric devices only for the amount
of time needed. Rear heated window,
additional headlights, windscreen wipers
and heater fan need a considerable
amount of energy, therefore increasing
the requirement of current increases fuel consumption (up to +25% in the urban cycle).
Here are some suggestions which may
help you to keep the running costs of
your car down and lower the amount of
toxic emissions released into the atmosphere.
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Car maintenance
SAFETY
DEVICES
Unnecessary loads
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
CONTAINING
RUNNING COSTS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 157
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
157
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
158
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 158
DRIVING STYLE
Starting
Do not warm the engine with the car
at a standstill or at idle or high speed:
under these conditions the engine
warms up much more slowly, increasing
electrical consumption and emissions. It
is therefore advisable to move off immediately, slowly, avoiding high speeds.
This way the engine will warm faster.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic lights or before switching off the engine. This and also double declutching
is absolutely pointless on modern cars
and also increase consumption and pollution.
Gear selection
CONDITIONS OF USE
As soon as the conditions of the traffic
and road allow, use a higher gear. Using a low gear to obtain brilliant performance increases consumption. In the
same way improper use of a high gear
increases consumption, emissions an engine wear.
Cold starting
Top speed
Fuel consumption considerably increases with speed. Avoid superfluous braking and accelerating, which cost in terms
of both fuel and emissions.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently increasing the revs
will greatly affect consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum torque.
Short journeys and frequent cold starts
do not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. This results
in a significant increase in consumption
levels (from +15 to +30% on the urban
cycle) and emission of harmful substances.
Traffic and road conditions
Rather high consumption levels are tied
to situations with heavy traffic, for example in queues with frequent use of
the lower gears or in cities with many
traffic lights. Also winding mountain
roads and rough road surfaces adversely affect consumption.
Traffic hold-ups
During prolonged hold-ups (e.g.: level
crossings) the engine should be
switched off.
For towing caravans or trailers the car
must be fitted with a certified tow hook
and an adequate electric system. Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who release a special
document for circulation on the road.
Install any specific and/or additional
rear-view mirrors as specified by law.
Remember that when towing a trailer,
steep hills are harder to climb, the braking spaces increase and overtaking takes
longer depending on the overall weight.
The weight the trailer exerts on the car
tow hook reduces by the same amount
the actual car loading capacity. To make
sure the maximum towable weight is
not exceeded (given in the log book)
account should be taken of the fully
laden trailer, including accessories and
personal belongings.
Do not exceed the speed limits of the
country you are driving in. In any case
do not exceed 100 km/h.
WARNING
The ABS system with
which the car may be
fitted does not control the
trailer braking system. Drive
with extreme care on slippery
roadbeds.
WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the car brake
system be altered to control
the trailer brake. The trailer
braking system must be fully
independent of the car hydraulic system.
SAFETY
DEVICES
IMPORTANT NOTES
Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using the
brake.
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
TOWING TRAILERS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 159
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
159
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
160
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 160
INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened
to the body by specialised personnel according to any additional and/or integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of the device.
The towing device must meet current
regulations with reference to 94/20/EC
Directive and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device used
must match the towable weight of the
car on which it is to be installed.
For the electric connection a unified connector should be used which is generally placed on a special bracket normally
fastened to the towing device.
For the electrical connection, 7 pin
12VDC connection is to be used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow the instructions provided by the car
manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer.
An electric brake or other device (electric winch, etc.), if required, should be
supplied directly by the battery through
a cable with a cross section of no less
than 2.5 mm2. In addition to the electrical branches, the car’s electric system
can only be connected to the supply cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an internal light, though not
above 15W.
Assembly diagram fig. 4
The structure of the tow-hook must be
fixed in the indicated points with Ø with
n. 2 M10 screws and n. 4 M12 screws.
The fixing points (1) must be provided
with Ø 25x6 mm spacers.
The counter-plates (2) must have a minimum thickness of 4 mm.
The counter-plates (3) must have a minimum thickness of 6 mm.
IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten a label (plainly visible) of suitable
size and material with the following
wording:
MAX LOAD ON BALL 75 kg
After fitting, screw holes shall be sealed
to prevent exhaust gas inlet.
IMPORTANT The hook should be fastened to the body avoiding any type of
drilling and trimming of the bumper.
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
fig. 4
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
10:51
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
full load
8-04-2009
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Standard tow ball
REAR AXLE
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
Pagina 161
A0E0428m
161
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
162
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 162
SNOW TYRES
Use snow tyres of the same size as the
normal tyres provided with the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will be
glad to provide advice concerning the
most suitable type of tyre for the customer’s requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflation
pressures and the specifications of snow
tyres, follow the instructions given in paragraph “Wheels” in section “Technical
specifications”.
The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread
depth is below 4 mm. In this case, they
should be replaced.
Due to the snow tyre features, under
normal conditions of use or on long motorway journeys, the performance of
these tyres is lower than that of normal
tyres. It is therefore necessary to limit
their use to the purposes for which they
are certified.
IMPORTANT When snow tyres are
used with a max speed index below the
one that can be reached by the car (increased by 5%), place a notice in the
passenger compartment, plainly in the
driver’s view which states the max permissible speed of the snow tyres (as per
EC Directive).
All four tyres should be the same (brand
and track) to ensure greater safety
when driving and braking and better driveability.
Remember that it is inappropriate to
change the direction of rotation of tyres.
WARNING
The max speed for
snow tyres with “Q”
marking is 160 km/h; 190
km/h for tyres with “T”
marking and 210 km/h for
tyres with H marking. The
Road Traffic Code speed limits must however be always
strictly observed.
Snow chains should only be applied to
the driving wheels (front wheels).
Check the tension of the chains after the
first few metres have been driven.
Use snow chains with reduced size: for
tyres 205/55 R16” and 215/55
R16” use snow chains with reduced size
with max protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
Use of snow chains may be compulsory also for cars with four-wheel drive.
Also for 3.2 JTS version,
snow chains shall be fitted on the FRONT axle of
the car.
Traditional snow chains
may not be used on tyres
type 225/50 R17” only spider type chains can be used.
Tyres 235/45 R18” and
235/40 ZR 19” cannot be fitted
with snow chains due to interference with the fender.
WARNING
Keep your speed down
when snow chains are
fitted. Do not exceed
40 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid also to drive
for long distances on roads not
covered with snow to prevent
damaging the car and the
roadbed.
When snow chains are
fitted, switch the ASR
system off. Press the
ASR/VDC button (see paragraph “ASR system” in section
“Dashboard and controls”).
SAFETY
DEVICES
Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.
IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the space-saver spare wheel.
So, if a front (drive) wheel is punctured
and chains are needed, a rear wheel
should be fitted to the front of the car
and the spare wheel should be fitted to
the rear (adjust tyre pressure to the specified value as soon as possible). This
way with two normal drive wheels,
snow chains can be fitted to them to
solve an emergency.
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
SNOW CHAINS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 163
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
163
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
149-164 Alfa 159 GB
164
8-04-2009
10:51
Pagina 164
CAR INACTIVITY
❒ clean and protect the painted parts
using protective wax;
If the car is to be left inactive for longer
than a month, the following precautions
should be noted:
❒ clean and protect the shiny metal
parts using special compounds readily available;
❒ park the car in covered, dry and if
possible well-ventilated premises;
❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
windscreen and rear window wiper
blades and lift them off the glass;
❒ engage a gear;
❒ check that the handbrake is not engaged;
❒ disconnect battery negative terminal
and check the battery charge. This
check is to be repeated every three
months when the car is left inactive.
Recharge if the optical(where provided) indicator shows a dark colour
without the central green area (see
paragraph “Battery” in “Car maintenance” section);
❒ slightly open the windows;
❒ cover the car with a cloth or perforated plastic sheet. Do not use sheets
of non-perforated plastic as they do
not allow moisture on the car body
to evaporate;
❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the
normal specified pressure and check
it at intervals;
❒ if you don’t disconnect the battery
from the electric system, check its
charge every month and recharge it
if the optical indicator shows a dark
colour without the central green area;
❒ do not drain the engine cooling system.
IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with
alarm system, switch off the alarm with
the remote control.
166
167
167
168
168
169
169
170
170
170
171
171
171
171
172
172
173
173
174
174
175
175
VDC SYSTEM ...................................................
HILL HOLDER FAILURE .......................................
ASR SYSTEM (WHEEL ANTISKID SYSTEM) ............
EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE .................................
BRAKE LIGHTS FAILURE ......................................
REAR FOGLIGHTS ..............................................
FRONT FOG LIGHTS ...........................................
SIDE/TAILLIGHTS/FOLLOW ME HOME..................
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS.................................
MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS ...................................
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ........................
RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR......................
LIGHT SENSOR FAILURE.......................................
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE ........................................
PARKING SENSORS FAILURE................................
FUEL RESERVE – LIMITED CRUISING RANGE ..........
CRUISE CONTROL .............................................
DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER CLOGGED ..................
ANTIPINCH SYSTEM FAILURE...............................
WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID LOW LEVEL .............
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED .....................................
T.P.M.S. SYSTEM FAILURE...................................
CHECK TYRE PRESSURE......................................
LOW INFLATION PRESSURE.................................
TYRE PRESSURE UNSUITABLE FOR SPEED ............
175
176
176
176
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
177
178
178
178
178
178
178
179
179
179
179
179
180
180
SAFETY
DEVICES
LOW BRAKE FLUID/HANDBRAKE ON ....................
BRAKE PAD WEAR .............................................
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED.................................
AIR BAG FAILURE...............................................
PASSANGER’S FRONT AIR BAGS DEACTIVATED........
ENGINE COOLANT HIGH TEMPERATURE .................
ENGINE OIL HIGH TEMPERATURE..........................
MINIMUM ENGINE OIL LEVEL ..............................
LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE/EXHAUST OIL ...........
LOW BATTERY CHARGE.......................................
INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING ..............................
BONNET OPEN..................................................
BOOT OPEN .....................................................
INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE/
EOBD SYSTEM FAILURE......................................
CAR PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE/
STEERING LOCK INHIBITION ................................
ALARM FAILURE/BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
ELECTRONIC KEY NOT RECOGNIZED......................
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD ...........
PRE-HEATING GLOW PLUGS/
PRE-HEATING GLOW PLUG FAILURE.......................
WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER.............................
INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCHED ON ................
ABS SYSTEM FAILURE........................................
EBD SYSTEM FAILURE........................................
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
WA R N I N G L I G H T S A N D M E S S A G E S
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 165
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
165
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
166
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 166
WARNING LIGHTS
AND MESSAGES
GENERAL WARNINGS
Failure indications shown on the display
are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures.
Every failure indication is accompanied
by the turning on of the relevant warning light (where provided) and by dedicated warning messages, if any.
In certain cases, failure indications can
be accompanied by the sound of a
buzzer (adjustable).
These indications are concise and cautionary and are aimed to suggest the
prompt action the driver must adopt
when a car malfunctioning appears.
These indications, however, shall not be
considered as exhaustive and/or as an
alternative to the specifications contained in this “Owner’s Manual”, which
shall always be read through carefully
and thoroughly.
In case of failure indication always refer
to the specifications contained in this
section.
Very serious failures
These failures are repeated on the display
indefinitely and stop any previous indication on the display. These failures are
repeated each time the key is fitted into
the ignition device until the cause of malfunctioning is removed. To stop this “cycle” press button MENU: in this case
the failure symbol stays on the display at
the bottom of the screen until the cause
of malfunctioning is removed.
Serious failures
These failures are repeated on the display
for about 20 seconds and then they go
off. These failures are repeated each time
the key is fitted into the ignition device.
At the end of the displaying cycle (approx. 20 seconds), or when pressing button MENU, the failure symbol will stay
on the display at the bottom of the screen
until the cause of malfunctioning is removed.
x
LOW BRAKE
FLUID
(red)
HANDBRAKE ON
(red)
Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off after few seconds.
Low brake fluid level
The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level, due to possible leak in the
circuit.
Handbrake on
The warning light turns on when the
handbrake is on.
WARNING
If the warning light
turns on when travelling, check that the handbrake
is not engaged. If the warning
light stays on with handbrake
disengaged, stop the car immediately and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
IMPORTANT Since the car is fitted
with wear sensors for the front brake
pads, when changing them, check also
the rear brake pads.
<
The warning light turns on
glowing steadily when:
❒ the driver's seat belt is not fastened
correctly;
❒ the passenger's seat belt is not fastened correctly, heavy objects are
placed on the passenger's seat;
❒ unfastening the driver's or the passenger's seat belt.
With car moving the warning light will
turn on flashing together with the buzzer
for a short time.
The warning light will then stay on glowing steadily.
The buzzer can be muted temporarily by
the following procedure:
❒ fasten the front seat belts;
❒ fit the electronic key into the ignition device;
❒ wait for over 20 seconds but less than
1 minute and then unfasten one of the
front seat belts.
This procedure will stand valid till next engine switching off.
For permanent deactivation, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The S.B.R.
system can only be reset through the setup menu (see paragraph “Reconfigurable
multifunction display“ in section “Dashboard and controls”).
SAFETY
DEVICES
The warning light (where provided) turn on (on certain versions together with the message on the display)
if the front brake pads are worn; in this
case have them changed as soon as possible.
SEAT BELTS NOT
FASTENED (red)
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
BRAKE PAD WEAR
(amber)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 167
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
d
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
167
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
168
¬
12-01-2010
13:40
Pagina 168
AIR BAG FAILURE
(red)
Fitting the key into the ignition
device the warning light turns on, but
it should go off after few seconds.
The warning light stays on glowing
steadily (on certain versions together
with the message on the display) to indicate a failure in the air bag system.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light
does not turn on when
fitting the key into the ignition
device, or if stays on when
travelling (on certain versions
together with the message on
the display), this could indicate
a failure in safety retaining system; under this condition air
bags or pretensioners could not
trigger in the event of collision
or, in a restricted number of
cases, they could trigger accidentally. Before restarting contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
WARNING
Failure of the ¬ warning light is indicated by
the flashing for more than the
normal 4 seconds of the passenger's front air bag deactivated warning light F. In addition, the air bag system will
deactivate automatically the
passenger's front air bag (front
and side for versions/markets,
where provided). In this event
warning light ¬ could not indicate failure in safety systems.
Before restarting contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services immediately to have the system
checked.
F
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIR BAGS
DEACTIVATED
(amber)
The warning light (set on the front ceiling light panel) turns on when passenger’s front air bags, passenger’s knees
air bag (where provided) and passenger’s front side bag are deactivated
through the relevant key switch (for versions/markets, where provided).
With passenger's air bags active, when
fitting the electronic key into the ignition
device the warning light will turn on for
about 4 seconds, will flash for the next
4 seconds and then it will turn off.
WARNING
Warning light Ffailure
is indicated by warning
light ¬. In addition, the air bag
system will deactivate automatically the passenger's front
air bag (front and side). Before
restarting contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services immediately to have the system
checked.
The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) to indicate engine overheating.
If the warning light comes on, proceed
as follows:
– Normal driving conditions: stop
the car, switch off the engine and check
whether the water level in the reservoir
is not below the MIN marl. Otherwise
wait for few seconds to allow engine
cooling, then open slowly and carefully
the cap, top up coolant and check
whether its level is falling between MIN
and MAX marks in the reservoir. Check
visually any leak. If when restarting the
warning light comes on again, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
IMPORTANT Under severe use of the
car, keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for few minutes before switching it off.
WARNING
With engine hot, do not
remove the cap: risk of
burnt.
`
ENGINE OIL
HIGH TEMPERATURE
Fitting the key into the ignition
device, the warning light (set on engine
oil temperature gauge) turns on but it
should go off after a few seconds. Warning light turning on when travelling (on
certain versions together with the message on the display) indicates that engine oil is too hot; switch the engine off
and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
If warning light `
starts flashing when
travelling contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Fitting the key into the ignition device,
the warning light (set on engine coolant
gauge) turns on but it shall go off after
a few seconds.
– Car heavy duty (e.g.: towing trailer uphill or fully laden car): decrease
speed, if the warning light stays on, stop
the car. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes leaving
the engine on and slightly accelerated to
further activate the circulation of the
coolant fluid, then switch the engine off.
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
ENGINE COOLANT
HIGH TEMPERATURE
(red)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 169
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
u
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
169
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
170
k
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 170
MINIMUM ENGINE
OIL LEVEL (RED)
When the electronic key is inserted into the starting device the
display will show the engine oil level for
a few seconds.
On some versions the display will show
a message and a symbol if the engine oil
level is too low. In this case, top up the
engine oil to the correct level (see “Checking fluid levels” in “Car maintenance”
chapter).
v
LIGHT STAYS ON:
LOW ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE (red)
FLASHING LIGHT:
EXHAUSTED ENGINE
OIL
(only Diesel versions
with DPF - red)
When the electronic key is inserted into
the starting device, the warning light switches on and should go out as soon as the engine is started.
1. Low engine oil pressare
The warning light turns on and stays on constantly (for versions/markets, where provided) along with the message on the display when the system detects that engine
oil pressure is low.
WARNING
If the warning light v
turns on when the vehicle
is travelling (on certain versions
together with the message on the
display) stop the engine immediately and contact a Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
2. Exhausted engine oil
(only Diesel versions with DPF)
The warning light will flash and a specific message will appear on the display (for versions/markets, where provided). The warning light may flash in the following ways, depending on the version:
– for 1 minute every two hours;
– for 3 minute cycles with the warning light
off for intervals of 5 seconds until oil is
changed.
After the initial warning, each time the engine
is started up, the warning light will continue
to flash in the above mentioned modes, until the oil is changed. A specific message will
appear on the display (for versions/markets,
where provided) in addition to the warning
light. If the warning light flashes, this does
not mean that the car is defective but simply informs the driver that it is now necessary
to change the oil as a result of regular vehicle use.
Note that engine oil is exhausted faster under the following circumstances:
– use of the vehicle prevalently for city driving,
requiring more frequent regeneration of DPF
– use of the vehicle for short drives, in which
the engine does not have time to reach its
regular operating temperature
– repeated interruption of the regeneration
process, signalled by the DPF warning light
coming on.
WARNING
Exhausted engine oil
should be replaced as soon
as possible after the warning light
comes on, never more than 500
km after the warning light first
comes on. Failure to change the oil
within the first 500 km may result
in severe damage to the engine
and will result in forfeiture of the
warranty. Remember that when
the warning light flashes, it does
not mean that the level of engine
oil is low, so if the light flashes you
must not top up.
w
LOW BATTERY
CHARGE (red)
The warning light (where provided) turns on, but it should go
off as soon as the engine has started (with
the engine running at idle speed a brief delay in going out is allowed).
If the warning light (or as an alternative, on
certain versions, a symbol and a message
are displayed) stays on glowing steadily or
flashing contact immediately Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
S
BONNET OPEN
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
On certain versions message and symbol S (red) are displayed to indicate
that bonnet is open.
R
BOOT OPEN
On certain versions message
and symbol R (red) are
displayed to indicate that boot is
open.
U
Injection system failure
Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off when the engine has started.
The warning light stays on or it turns on
when travelling to indicate a malfunction in the injection/exhaust system
with possible lack of performance, poor
driveability and high consumption.
In these conditions it is possible to continue driving without however requiring
heavy effort or high speed from the engine. In any case, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.
EOBD system failure
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Under normal conditions, fitting the electronic key into the ignition device, the
warning light turns on, but it should go
off when the engine has started. This indicates proper operation of the warning light.
If the warning light stays on or turns on
when travelling:
– glowing steadily (on certain versions together with the message on the
display): means a fault in the supply/ignition system which could cause
high emissions at the exhaust, possible
lack of performance, poor handling and
high consumption levels. In these conditions it is possible to continue driving
without however requiring heavy effort
or high speed from the engine. Prolonged use of the car with the warning
light on may cause damages. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.
The warning light goes off if the fault
disappears, but it is however stored by
the system.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The warning light (where provided) (or symbol on the display) turns
on when one or more doors, the boot or
the bonnet (where provided) are not
properly shut.
INJECTION SYSTEM
FAILURE (diesel
versions - amber)
EOBD SYSTEM
FAILURE
(petrol versions amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
INCOMPLETE DOOR
LOCKING (red)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 171
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
´
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
171
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
172
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 172
– flashing: indicates the possibility of
damage to the catalyst (see “EOBD system” in section “Dashboard and controls”). If the light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to
lower the speed of the engine until the
warning light stops flashing; continue
the journey at moderate speed, trying
to avoid driving conditions that may
cause further flashing and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as soon as
possible.
If when fitting the key into the ignition device, the
warning light U does
not turn on or if turns on with
fixed light or flashing when the
car is travelling, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as
soon as possible. Warning light
U operation can by checked by
traffic agents by proper equipment therefore, comply with
laws and regulations in force in
the country where you are driving.
>
CAR PROTECTION
SYSTEM FAILURE
(amber)
STEERING LOCK
INHIBITION
(amber)
Car protection system failure
Warning light (where provided) coming
on (on certain versions a message is displayed) indicates car protecting system
failure: in this event contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.
Steering lock inhibition
Warning light (where provided) turns on
(on certain versions a message is displayed) when removing the electronic
key from the ignition device when the
car has turned off while travelling.
Y
ALARM FAILURE
(amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
(amber)
ELECTRONIC KEY
NOT RECOGNIZED
(amber)
Alarm failure
The turning on of the warning light
(where provided) (on certain versions a
message is displayed) indicates that
there is a failure in the alarm system.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible.
Break-in attempt
The turning on of the warning light (where
provided) (on certain versions a message
is displayed) indicates an attempt of
break-in. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.
Electronic key not recognized
The turning on of the warning light (where
provided) (on certain versions a message
is displayed) indicates that the electronic
key being used is not enabled.
On certain versions, once the above
warning indication cycle is over or when
pressing briefly the button MENU:
– the displayed message goes off and
previously active screen is displayed
again;
– temperature indication stops flashing;
– symbol √ stays displayed at the bottom right of the screen (until outside
temperature is lower than or equal to
6°C).
IMPORTANT In the event of outside
temperature sensor failure, the display
will show dashes instead of the value.
m
PRE-HEATING
GLOW PLUGS
(diesel versions amber)
PRE-HEATING
GLOW PLUGS
FAILURE (diesel
versions - amber)
Pre-heating glow plugs
Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on and it will turn
off when glow plugs reach the preset
temperature. Start the engine immediately after warning light switching off.
IMPORTANT With mild or hot ambient temperature, warning light stays on
for very short time.
SAFETY
DEVICES
When the outside temperature reaches
or falls below 3°C, the display will show
a warning message, symbol √ to warn
the driver of the possible presence of ice
on the road.
This cycle is performed only once when
the outside temperature read is lower
than or equal to 3°C and it can be repeated only when outside temperature
exceeds
6 °C and then falls down to 3 °C or below.
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE
ON THE ROAD
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 173
IN AN
EMERGENCY
8:23
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
16-03-2010
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
173
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
174
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 174
Pre-heating glow plugs failure
The warning light (on certain versions
together with the message on the display) will flash to indicate a failure in
the pre-heating glow plugs system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as
soon as possible to have the failure eliminated.
c
WATER IN
FUEL FILTER
(diesel versions amber)
The warning light turns on glowing
steadily when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the
display) to indicate that there is water
in the diesel fuel filter.
The presence of water in
the fuel circuit may
cause serious damage to
the entire injection system and
cause irregular engine operation. If the warning light c on
the dial turns on (on certain versions together with the message on the display) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to have the
system relieved. If the above
indications come on immediately after refuelling, water has
probably been poured into the
tank: turn the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
s
INERTIAL FUEL CUTOFF SWITCHED ON
On certain versions, the intervention of the inertial fuel cut-off switch
is indicated by a message + symbol
(amber) on the display.
WARNING
If, after a crash, you
smell fuel or see leaks
from the fuel system, do not
reset the switch to avoid fire
risk.
The warning light turns on (on certain
versions a dedicated message is displayed) when the system is inefficient.
In this case the braking system keeps
its effectiveness unchanged, but without
the potential offered by the ABS system.
Drive carefully and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.
x
>
á
VDC SYSTEM
(amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
With the engine running the
turning on at the same time of
the > and x warning lights (on certain versions together with the message
on the display) indicates that the EBD
system is inefficient; in this case heavy
braking may cause the rear wheels to
lock before time, with the possibility of
skidding.
Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off after few seconds.
Drive with the utmost care to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service to
have the system checked.
When the VDC is deactivated manually
(pressing the ASR/VDC button for 2 seconds) (see paragraph “VDC system” in
section “Dashboard and controls”) the
instrument panel warning light turns on
(on certain versions a message is displayed).
The warning light flashes when the VDC
cuts in, to alert the driver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip
conditions.
VDC deactivation
VDC failure
In case of failure, the VDC system will
deactivate automatically and the instrument panel warning light á will turn
on glowing steadily (on certain versions
a message will also be displayed). In
this case contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Fitting the key into the ignition
device the warning light turns on, but
it should go off after few seconds.
EBD SYSTEM
FAILURE
(red)
(amber)
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
ABS SYSTEM
FAILURE (amber)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 175
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
>
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
175
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
176
*
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 176
HILL HOLDER
FAILURE
(amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
Fitting the key into the ignition device,
the warning light (where provided) turns
on, but it should go off after a few seconds.
If the warning light stays on (on certain
versions a message is displayed) there
is a failure in the Hill Holder system. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
á
ASR SYSTEM
(WHEEL ANTISKID
SYSTEM)
(amber)
Fitting the key into the ignition device
the warning light turns on, but it should
go off after few seconds. The warning
light flashes when the system cuts in, to
alert the driver that the system is adapting to the road surface grip conditions.
ASR deactivation
When the ASR is deactivated manually
(pressing the ASR/VDC button) (see
paragraph “ASR system” in section
“Dashboard and controls”) the
ASR/VDC button turns on (on versions
fitted with “Reconfigurable multifunction
display” symbol V is also displayed).
ASR failure
In the event of a failure the ASR system
is deactivated automatically and on versions fitted with “Reconfigurable multifunction display” the symbol V is displayed. In this case contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services as soon as possible.
W
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
FAILURE
(amber)
The warning light (where provided)
turns on (on certain versions a message
is displayed) when one of the following
lights is failing:
– sidelights
– direction indicators
– rear fog guards
– number plate lights.
The failure referring to these lights could
be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown
protection fuse or an electric connection
cut-off.
FOLLOW ME HOME
(green)
1
The warning light turns on
when the main beams are turned on.
Sidelights
The warning light turns on when
side/taillights are turned on.
R
Follow me home
4
REAR FOG LIGHTS
(amber)
The warning light turns on
when the rear fog lights are turned on.
5
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(green)
The warning light turns on
when the front fog lights are turned on.
The warning light comes on (together with
the message on the display) when the
Follow me home device is activated (see
paragraph “Follow me home” in section
“Dashboard and controls”).
2
DIPPED BEAM
HEADLIGHTS
(green)
The warning light turns on when the
dipped beams are turned on.
MAIN BEAM
HEADLIGHTS (blue)
LEFT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR
(green)
The warning light turns on when the direction indicator stalk is moved downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard light button is
pressed.
E
RIGHT-HAND
DIRECTION
INDICATOR (green)
The warning light turns on when the direction indicator stalk is moved upwards
or, together with the left indicator, when
the hazard light button is pressed.
SAFETY
DEVICES
The warning light (where provided) turns
on (on certain versions a message is displayed) when a failure at brake lights
(stop) is detected. The failure could be
due to: blown bulb, blown protection fuse
or electric connection cut-off.
3
SIDE/TAILLIGHTS
(green)
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
BRAKE LIGHTS
FAILURE
(amber)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 177
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
T
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
177
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
178
1
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 178
LIGHT SENSOR
FAILURE (amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The warning light (or as an alternative, on
certain versions, a symbol and a message
are displayed) turns on to indicate a failure
at the light sensor.
u
The warning light on the fuel level
gauge turns on when about 10 litres fuel are
left in the tank. On certain versions. the display will show a warning message when the
cruising range is less than 50 km (or 31 mi).
If warning light K starts
flashing when travelling
contact
Alfa
Romeo
Authorized Services.
RAIN SENSOR
FAILURE (amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The warning light (where provided) turns on
(on certain versions a message is displayed)
when the rain sensor is failing.
t
K
PARKING SENSOR
FAILURE (amber)
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The warning light (or as an alternative, on
certain versions, a symbol and a message
are displayed) turns on to indicate a failure
at parking sensors.
FUEL RESERVE –
LIMITED CRUISING
RANGE (amber)
Ü
CRUISE CONTROL
(green)
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
The warning light turns on (on certain versions a dedicated message is displayed)
when turning the the knurled ring of the
Cruise Control to Ü.
CLEANING DPF
(PARTICULATE FILTER)
h IN
PROGRESS (only
Diesel versions with
DPF - amber)
When the electronic key is inserted into
the starting device, the warning light switches on but it must switch off after a few seconds. The warning light comes on constantly
to notify the driver that the DPF system
needs to eliminate captured pollutants (particulate) by the regeneration process. The
warning light does not come on during every
DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require notification of the driver. To
switch the warning light off, the car must
stay in motion until regeneration has been
completed. The process normally takes
about 15 minutes. The optimum conditions
to end the process are achieved by keeping the car in motion up to 60 km/h with
an engine speed higher than 2,000 rpm.
This light coming on is not a car defect and
therefore the car does not need to go to the
workshop. A specific message will appear
on the display when the warning light comes
on (for versions/markets, where provided).
WARNING
Always drive at a speed
appropriate to the traffic
conditions, the weather and
speed limits. The engine may be
turned off while the DPF light is
on; however, repeated interruption of the regeneration process
may result in premature exhaustion of engine oil. For this reason
it is always advisable to wait for
the light to go off before turning
off the engine, following the instructions appearing above. It is
not advisable to complete DPF regeneration with the vehicle stationary.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
)
WINDSCREEN
WASHER FLUID
LOW LEVEL (amber)
The warning light (where provided)
turns on (on certain versions a message
is displayed) when the windscreen
washer fluid level falls down the preset
min. level.
The display will show a warning message + symbol (red) and the
buzzer will sound when the car exceeds
the speed limit set through the “Setup
menu” (e.g.: 120 km/h) (see paragraphs “Multifunction Display” or “Reconfigurable Multifunction Display” in
section “Dashboard and controls”).
T.P.M.S. SYSTEM
FAILURE
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
n
On certain versions the display will show
a warning message + symbol (amber)
when a failure is detected in the T.P.M.S.
system (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services as soon as possible.
Should one or more wheels without sensor be fitted, the display will show a
warning message until initial conditions
are restored.
CHECK TYRE
PRESSURE
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
n
On some versions, the display shows a
message + symbol (amber) to indicate
that the tyre pressure is below the recommended value which ensures the
long life of the tyre and optimum fuel
consumption, and/or to indicate a slow
pressure leak. If two or more tyres are
in one of the above-mentioned conditions, the display will show the message
relating to each tyre in succession. In
this case, it is advisable to check and adjust the tyre pressures (see “Technical
Specification” section).
SAFETY
DEVICES
The warning light (or as an alternative,
on certain versions, a symbol and a message are displayed) turns on when a failure is detected in the antipinch system.
X
SPEED LIMIT
EXCEEDED
WARNING CORRECT USE
LIGHTS AND OF THE CAR
MESSAGES
ANTIPINCH SYSTEM
FAILURE
(amber)
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 179
IN AN
EMERGENCY
14:09
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
5
3-12-2009
INDEX
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
179
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND CORRECT USE
MESSAGES
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
165-180 Alfa 159 GB
180
3-12-2009
14:09
Pagina 180
LOW TYRE
PRESSURE
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
n
On certain versions the display will show
a warning message + symbol (red) (and
buzzer will sound) when the pressure of
one or more tyres falls below the preset
threshold. In this way the T.P.M.S. system warns the driver that tyre/s is/are
dangerously flat; possible puncture.
IMPORTANT Stop immediately with
one or more tyres flat, avoid braking
sharply and abrupt turns. Replace immediately the punctured tyre with the
space-saver spare wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) or repair the puncture tyre using the proper kit
(see paragraph “If a tyre is punctured”
in section “In an emergency”) and then
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible.
TYRE PRESSURE
UNSUITABLE FOR
SPEED
(for versions/markets, where
provided)
IMPORTANT In this case slow down
immediately since tyre overheating could
impair tyre performance and life beyond
repair, and even make the tyre to blowout.
Should it be required to journey at a
speed higher than 160 km/h, inflate
tyres at full load pressures (see paragraph
“Cold inflation pressures” in section "Technical Specifications").
IMPORTANT Should you have to journey anyway a speed higher than 160
km/h, stop the car when the display
shows the warning symbol to inflate tyres
to the proper pressure values (see paragraph "Cold inflation pressures" in section
"Technical Specifications ").
n
On certain versions, if the T.P.M.S. system detects that the pressure of one or
more tyres is unsuitable for the current
speed the display will show a message +
symbol (amber) that will stay on until the
car speed slow downs below the preset
threshold.
JUMP STARTING ............................................... 182
IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED ................................... 183
QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT
FIX&GO automatic ............................................ 190
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB ................... 196
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ...................... 199
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ...................... 205
IF A FUSE BLOWS ............................................. 209
IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT...................................... 219
JACKING THE CAR.............................................. 220
TOWING THE CAR ............................................. 221
SAFETY
DEVICES
In an emergency we recommend that you call the toll-free number found
on the Warranty Booklet. You can also connect to the site www.alfaromeo.com
to search for the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services point.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IN AN EMERGENCY
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 181
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
181
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 182
JUMP STARTING
Under no circumstances
should a battery charger
be used to start the engine: it could damage the electronic systems and in particular
the ignition and injection control
units.
If the battery is flat, it is possible to start
the engine using an auxiliary battery
with the same capacity or a little higher than the flat one.
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Proceed as follows fig. 1:
182
❒ Connect positive terminals (+ near
the terminal) of the two batteries
with a jump lead;
❒ With a second lead, connect the negative terminal (–) of the auxiliary
battery and to an earthing point E
on the engine of the car to be started;
❒ Start the engine;
❒ When the engine has been started,
remove the leads reversing the order above.
fig. 1
A0E0201m
If after a few attempts the engine does
not start, do not insist but contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Service.
IMPORTANT Do not directly connect
the negative terminals of the two batteries: sparks could ignite the flammable gas from the battery. If the other battery is fitted in another car, prevent accidental contacts between the metal
parts of the two cars.
WARNING
Do not carry out this
procedure if you lack
experience; if it is not done
correctly it can cause very intense electrical discharges. In
addition, the fluid contained in
the battery is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with
skin and eyes. You are also advised not to put naked flames
or lighted cigarettes near the
battery and not to cause
sparks.
WARNING
Remember that the
brake booster and the
power steering system are not
operating until the engine is
started, a greater effort will
therefore be required to press
the brake pedal or turn the
steering wheel.
IF A TYRE
IS PUNCTURED
For versions/markets, where provided
applicable, the car can be equipped with
the “Quick tyre repair kit Fix&Go automatic“. Operations required to change
a wheel are described in the following
chapter.
As an alternative to the kit “Fix & Go
automatic”, the car can be provided (upon request) with space-saver spare
wheel or standard size spare wheel;
wheel changing and correct use of the
jack and space-saver spare wheel call for
some precautions as listed below.
WARNING
Alert other drivers that
the car is stationary in
compliance with local regulations: hazard warning lights,
warning triangle etc. Any passengers on board should leave
the car, especially if it is heavily laden. Passengers should
stay away from oncoming
traffic while the wheel is being changed on. If the wheel is
being changed on a steep or
badly surfaced road, place the
wedges or other suitable material under the wheel to stop
the car. Never start the engine
when the car is jacked up. If
you were towing a trailer, uncouple the trailer before jacking the car.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Never bump start the engine (by pushing, towing, or coasting downhill) as this
could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic
exhaust system and damage it beyond
repair.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
BUMP STARTING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 183
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
183
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
184
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 184
WARNING
The space-saver spare
wheel (for versions/
markets, where provided) is
specific to your car; do not use
it on other models, or use the
spare wheel of other models
on your car. The space-saver
spare wheel shall only be used
in an emergency. It shall only
be used for the distance necessary to reach a service point
and the car speed shall not exceed 80 Km/h. The spare
wheel has a sticker that summarises the main cautions for
use and limitations. The sticker should never be removed or
covered!. Never fit a wheel
cap on a space-saver spare
wheel.
WARNING
When driving with a
space-saver
spare
wheel fitted, the driving performance of the car changes.
Avoid accelerating or braking
sharply, abrupt turns or fast
cornerings. The life of the
spare wheel is approx. 3000
Km, after this distance it
should be replaced with another of the same type. Never attempt to fit a conventional tyre on a rim designed
for use as a space-saver spare
wheel. Have the punctured
wheel repaired and refitted as
soon as possible. Two or more
space-saver spare wheels
should never be used together. Do not grease the threads
of bolts before installing them:
they might slip out.
WARNING
The jack shall only be
used for changing
wheels on the car with which
it is provided or on cars of the
same model. It must not be used
for other purposes such as for
instance raising cars of other
models. In no case should it be
used for repairs under the car.
Incorrect positioning of the jack
may cause the jacked car to fall.
Do not use the jack for higher
capacities than stated on its label. Snow chains cannot be fitted to the space-saver spare
wheel. So, if a front (drive)
wheel is punctured and chains
are needed, a rear wheel should
be fitted to the front of the car
and the spare wheel should be
fitted to the rear. This way with
two normal drive wheels, snow
chains can be fitted to them to
solve an emergency.
Pagina 185
fig. 2
A0E0132m
fig. 3
A0E0133m
Please note:
To change a wheel proceed as follows:
❒ the jack weight is 1.76 kg;
❒ Stop the car in a position that is not
dangerous for oncoming traffic where
you can change the wheel safely. The
ground should be flat and adequately firm;
❒ the jack requires no adjustment;
❒ the jack cannot be repaired. If it
breaks it must be replaced with a
new jack;
❒ no tool other than its cranking device
may be fitted on the jack.
❒ Turn the engine off, pull up the handbrake and engage first gear or reverse;
❒ Using handle A-fig. 2, lift the stiff
cover B and secure it as shown in
fig. 3;
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
WARNING
Never tamper with the
inflation valve. Never
place tools between the rim
and tyre. Check and restore, if
required, the pressure of tyres
and spare wheel to the values
given in section “Technical
Specifications”.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
185
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 186
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
186
fig. 4
A0E0134m
fig. 5
A0E0206m
❒ Take out the tool container fig. 4;
fig. 7
A0E0195m
❒ The jack shall be fitted as shown in
fig. 7 (for versions fitted with
sideskirts, before fitting the jack, remove cover A-fig. 9 set on the
sideskirt as shown in the figure);
❒ Loosen the bolts of the wheel to be
replaced by about one turn with the
wrench provided A-fig. 5; if the car
is fitted with alloy rims, shake the car
to facilitate removing this rim from
the wheel hub;
fig. 6
A0E0207m
❒ Remove the wheel cap A-fig. 6
(only versions with steel rims);
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 187
A0E0049m
❒ Fit the handle L-fig. 8 to operate
the jack and lift the car until the
wheel to be changed is several centimetres off the ground;
❒ Loosen the fastening bolts and then
remove the wheel;
❒ Make sure the contact surfaces between space-saver spare wheel and
hub are clean so that the fastening
bolts will not come loose;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ Warn anybody nearby that the car is
about to be lifted. They must stay
clear and not touch the car until it
is back on the ground;
fig. 9
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
❒ Operate the device F-fig. 8 to extend the jack until the top of the jack
G fits correctly into catch H;
A0E0208m
INDEX
fig. 8
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
187
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 188
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
REFITTING A
NORMAL WHEEL
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
Following the procedure described previously, raise the car and remove the
spare wheel.
188
Versions with steel rims
fig. 10
A0E0209m
❒ fit the space-saver spare wheel making one of the holes A-fig. 10 coincide with the relevant pin B;
❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the five fastening bolts;
fig. 11
A0E0210m
❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;
❒ Use the wrench provided to fasten
the bolts completely in a criss-cross
fashion according to the sequence
shown in fig. 11.
Proceed as follows:
❒ Make sure the contact surfaces between standard wheel and hub are
clean so that the fastening bolts will
not come loose;
❒ Fit the standard wheel taking into account that pin B-fig. 10 shall coincide with one of the holes A;
❒ Place the wheel cap on the wheel rim
making symbol C, (marked inside the
wheel cap), coincide with the inflation
valve fig. 12;
❒ Using the wrench provided, tighten the
fastening bolts;
❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;
❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the bolts in the sequence shown
in fig. 11;
fig. 13
A0E0211m
Versions with alloy rims
Proceed as follows:
❒ tighten pin A-fig. 13 in one of the
holes of the wheel hub fastening
bolts;
❒ insert the wheel on the pin and, using the wrench provided, tighten the
four bolts available;
❒ loosen pin A-fig. 13 and tighten
the last fastening bolt;
❒ lower the car and remove the jack,
then, using the wrench provided tighten the bolts according to the sequence
previously shown for the space-saver
spare wheel fig. 11.
SAFETY
DEVICES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
A0E0236m
When you have finished:
❒ Stow the spare wheel in the space
provided in the boot;
❒ Fit the jack partially open in its container forcing it lightly to prevent it
from vibrating when travelling;
❒ Put the tools back into their places in
the container;
❒ Arrange the container complete with
tools on the space-saver spare wheel;
❒ Reposition properly the boot stiff covering.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 189
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
fig. 12
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
189
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
190
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 190
QUICK TYRE REPAIR
KIT FIX&GO
automatic
The car is provided with the quick tyre
repair kit “FIX&GO automatic”, instead
of the traditional tool kit and space-saver
spare wheel.
The kit fig. 14 is placed in the boot. In
this container are also housed the screwdriver and the tow hitch.
fig. 14
A0E0114m
The quick tyre repair kit includes:
❒ a bottle A-fig. 14 containing the
sealer, fitted with:
- filling pipe B
- sticker C bearing the notice “max.
80 km/h”, to be placed in a position visible to the driver (on the instrument panel) after fixing the tyre;
❒ compressor D with pressure gauge
and fittings;
fig. 15
A0E0048m
❒ instruction brochure fig. 15, to be
used for prompt and proper use of the
quick repair kit and to be then handed to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit;
❒ a pair of protection gloves located in
the side space of the compressor;
❒ adapters for inflating different elements.
The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair kit is effective with external temperatures between –20°C and +50°C.
The sealing fluid has limited life.
WARNING
In the event of a puncture caused by foreign
bodies, it is possible to
repair tyres showing damages
on the track or shoulder up to
max 4 mm diameter.
Holes and damages on
the tyre side walls cannot be repaired. Do not use the
quick tyre repair kit if damaging is due to running with flat
tyre.
WARNING
Repairs are not possible in case of damages
on the wheel rim (bad groove
distortion causing air loss). Do
not remove foreign bodies
(screws or nails) from the
tyre.
WARNING
The cylinder contains
ethylene glycol. The
cylinder contains latex: it can
cause allergic reactions. It is
harmful if ingested or inhaled
and irritant for the eyes and in
case of contact. In case of contact rinse immediately with
water and take off contaminated clothes. If swallowed,
do not induce vomit, rinse out
the mouth, drink a lot of water and call the doctor immediately. Keep away from children. This product must not be
used by asthmatics. Do not inhale vapours. Call the doctor
immediately in case of allergic reactions. Keep the cylinder in the space provided for
the purpose and far from heat.
The sealing fluid has limited
life.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Hand the instruction
brochure to the personnel charged with treating
the tyre repaired with the kit.
It should be noticed that:
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 191
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
191
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 192
WARNING
The compressor shall
not be operated for
more than 20 minutes. Risk of
overheating!. Tyres repaired
with the quick tyre repair kit
shall be used temporarily only.
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
192
A0E0212m
fig. 16
fig. 17
A0E0116m
fig. 18
A0E0214m
INFLATING PROCEDURE
WARNING
Replace the cylinder if
sealer has run out. Do
not throw away the
cylinder and the sealing fluid.
Have the sealing fluid and the
cylinder disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations.
Put on the protection
gloves provided together with quick tyre repair
kit.
Proceed as follows:
❒ set the wheel to be repaired with
valve A-fig. 16 in the position
shown in the figure, then pull up
the handbrake, take the quick
tyre repair kit and put it on the
ground near the wheel to be repaired;
❒ loosen tyre inflation valve cap, take
out the filler hose A-fig. 17 and
screw the ring nut B-fig. 18 on the
tyre valve;
fig. 19
A0E0213m
❒ make sure the compressor switch Afig. 19 is set to 0 (off), start the
engine and fit plug A-fig. 20 into
the outlet/cigar lighter on the front
console and then turn on the compressor by setting switch A-fig. 19
to I (on);
❒ Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in paragraph “Wheels” in section
“Technical Specifications”. Check tyre
pressure on gauge B-fig. 19 with
compressor off to obtain precise reading;
fig. 20
A0E0217m
❒ if after 5 minutes it is still impossible to reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage compressor from valve and current outlet, then move the car forth
for approx. 10 metres in order to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tyre
evenly, then repeat the inflation operation;
❒ If after this operation it is still impossible after 5 minutes to reach at
least 1.8 bar, do start driving since
the tyre is excessively damaged and
the quick tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suitable sealing, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services;
Apply the sticker in a
visible position for the
driver to indicate that the tyre
has been treated with the
quick tyre repair kit. Drive
carefully especially when cornering and do not exceed 80
km/h. Avoid heavy braking
and accelerating.
❒ after driving for about 10 minutes
stop and check again the tyre pressure; pull up the handbrake;
SAFETY
DEVICES
WARNING
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
❒ after reaching the tyre pressure specified in paragraph “Wheels” in section “Technical Specifications”, start
driving immediately;
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 193
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
193
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
194
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 194
WARNING
If pressure falls below
1.8 bar, stop the car
since the tyre is excessively
damaged and the quick tyre
repair kit Fix & Go automatic
cannot guarantee suitable
sealing, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
A0E0215m
fig. 21
WARNING
❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, restore proper pressure (with engine
running and handbrake on) and
restart;
❒ drive with the utmost care to the
nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service.
You shall absolutely
communicate that the
tyre has been repaired with
the quick tyre repair kit. Hand
the instruction brochure to the
personnel charged with treating the tyre repaired with the
kit.
fig. 22
A0E0216m
CHECKING AND RESTORING
PRESSURE ONLY
The compressor can be also used just for
restoring pressure.
Disconnect the quick connection A-fig.
21 and connect it directly to the tyre
valve fig. 22; in this way the cylinder
is not connected to compressor and the
sealing fluid will not flow into the tyre.
❒ disconnect connection A-fig. 23
and hose B;
fig. 23
A0E0047m
❒ turn counter-clockwise the cylinder to
replace and raise it;
❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clockwise;
❒ refit connection A or connect hose
B into its seat.
SAFETY
DEVICES
To replace the cylinder proceed as follows:
WARNING
Inform other people
driving the car that the
tyre has been repaired using
the quick tyre kit. Hand the
sticker to the personnel that
will carry out restoring operations.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
CYLINDER REPLACEMENT
PROCEDURE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 195
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
195
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
196
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 196
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
❒ When a light is not working, check
that the corresponding fuse is intact
before changing a bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph
“If a fuse blows” in this section;
❒ Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation;
❒ Burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power;
WARNING
Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only
the metallic part. If the transparent bulb is touched with the
fingers, its lighting intensity is
reduced and life of the bulb
may be compromised. If
touched accidentally, rub the
bulb with a cloth moistened
with alcohol and allow to dry.
❒ Always check the height of the headlight beam after changing a bulb.
IMPORTANT The headlight inner surface may be lightly misted over: this is
not a fault but a natural fact due to low
temperature and the level of air humidity. It will disappear as soon the headlights are turned on. The presence of
drops inside the headlights means water infiltration, therefore contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Modifications or repairs to the electrical
system (electronic control
units) carried out incorrectly
and without bearing the features of the system in mind
can cause malfunctions with
the risk of fire.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain
pressurised gas which,
if broken, may cause small
fragments of glass to be projected outwards.
WARNING
Due to high voltage,
the bulb of (Bixenon)
gas-discharge headlights must
only be replaced by experts:
danger of death! Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 197
Bayonet type bulbs: press the
bulb, turn counter-clockwise to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.
C
Tubular bulbs: release them
from their contacts to remove.
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your
car:
A
Glass bulbs: clipped into position. Pull to remove.
D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove the
bulb, release the clip holding the
bulb in place.
F
Gas-discharge bulbs
(Bixenon).
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
B
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
TYPES OF BULBS fig. 24
A0E0117m
INDEX
fig. 24
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
197
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
198
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 198
BULBS
FIGURE 24
TYPE
POWER
Main beam headlights
D
H7
55W
Dipped beam headlights
D
H7
55W
Main beams/Dipped beams
(versions with Bixenon headlights) (where provided)
F
D1S
55W
Additional main beams (where provided)
D
H1
55W
Front sidelights (1 per headlight)
A
W5WB
5W
Taillights
(1 on fixed light unit - 1 on mobile light unit)
B
P21/5W
5W
Front fog lights
E
H7
55W
Front direction indicator
B
PY21W
21W
Side direction indicator
A
W5W
5W
Rear direction indicator
B
P21W
21W
Brake lights
B
P21/5W
21W
Third brake light
A
W2,3W
2,3W
Reversing light
B
P21W
21W
Rear fog lights
B
P21W
21W
Number plate lights
A
W5W
5W
2xA+1C
2xW5+10W
5+5+10W
Boot light
C
10W
10W
Rear ceiling light
A
2xW5W
5+5W
Courtesy mirror lights
A
1,5W
1.5W
Glovebox light
A
W5W
5W
Puddle/door lights
A
W5W
5W
Front ceiling light
Pagina 199
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
FRONT LIGHT UNITS
The front light units contain main beam,
sidelights, direction indicator and dipped
beam bulbs.
To change the bulbs, turn cap counterclockwise and then remove it.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light
unit fig. 25/a as follows:
A Main beam headlights
A0E0540m
fig. 25
Main beam headlights
(halogen bulbs)
On some versions a special brake servo vacuum unit is fitted which has to be
removed in order to be able to replace
the left main beam headlamp halogen
bulb. The vacuum unit is located next to
the battery drip tray (fig. 25).
B Sidelights/direction indicators
C Dipped beam headlights
WARNING
After replacement, refit the covers correctly
checking that they are properly secured.
WARNING
It should be remembered that the vacuum
unit operates at high temperatures: avoid touching it with
your hands, danger of scalding!
Any operations not carried out
following the rules could adversely affect the operation of
the braking system and therefore the safety of the vehicle.
fig. 25/a
A0E0191m
On versions with a brake servo vacuum
unit, the description is given purely as
an example; this operation must be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove cover A-fig. 25/a by turning it counter-clockwise;
❒ disconnect the electric connector Afig. 26;
❒ release the bulb holder catch B;
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
For the type of bulb and power rating,
see “When needing to change a bulb”.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
199
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 200
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
200
fig. 26
A0E0223m
fig. 27
A0E0193m
fig. 28
A0E0194m
❒ remove the bulb and replace it;
Sidelights
Front direction indicators
❒ fit the new bulb and refit bulb holder catch B-fig. 26;
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ turn cover B-fig. 25 counter-clockwise;
❒ turn cover B-fig. 25 counter-clockwise;
❒ press tab A-fig. 27, remove the
bulb and replace it;
❒ turn the bulb holder A-fig. 28 counterclockwise, remove the bulb and replace it;
❒ reconnect the electrical connector A;
❒ refit the protective cover properly.
❒ refit the bulb holder, it shall click into place; look at the light from the
outside to check for proper bulb positioning;
❒ refit the protective cover properly.
❒ refit the bulb holder, it shall click into
place; look at the light from the outside to check for proper bulb positioning;
❒ refit the protective cover properly.
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 201
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ turn cover C-fig. 25 counter-clockwise;
❒ disconnect the electric connector Afig. 29;
❒ release the bulb holder catch B;
❒ remove the bulb and replace it;
❒ fit the new bulb and refit bulb holder
catch B-fig. 29;
Gas-discharge dipped
beam/main beam headlights
(Bixenon) (where provided)
WARNING
Due to high voltage,
the bulb of (Bixenon)
gas-discharge headlights must
only be replaced by experts:
danger of death! Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
A0E0164m
fig. 31
Side direction indicators
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ push the lens by hand in opposite running direction in order to press the
catch A-fig. 30. Release the front
part and remove the unit;
❒ turn the bulb holder B-fig. 31 counterclockwise and remove it from lens
C.
❒ remove bulb D and replace it;
❒ fit the bulb holder B into the lens C
then position the unit, the catch shall
click into place A-fig. 30.
Be careful not to damage the car body or the
lens.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Dipped beam headlights
(halogen bulbs)
A0E0163m
fig. 30
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
A0E0192m
INDEX
fig. 29
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
201
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 202
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
202
fig. 32
A0E0196m
Front fog lights fig. 32
(where provided)
IMPORTANT Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have front fog lights
replaced and adjusted.
fig. 33
A0E0165m
REAR LIGHT UNITS
Rear light units contain: reversing light,
rear fog light, direction indicators, taillights, number plate lights, brake light
and third brake light bulbs.
fig. 34
A0E0166m
Reversing light/rear fog
lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ turn device A-fig. 33 to open lid
B;
❒ lower the lid and remove the bulb
holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs
C-fig. 34;
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 203
D: reversing light bulb on passenger
side (or right side);
D: reversing light bulb on driver side (or
left side)
❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Cfig. 34;
❒ close lid B-fig. 33.
A0E0229m
Taillight bulb on tailgate
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ turn device A-fig. 33 to open lid
B;
❒ lower the lid and remove the bulb
holder unit by pressing the retaining
tabs C-fig. 34;
fig. 37
A0E0170m
❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 36:
D: taillight bulb on right/left headlight
❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Cfig. 34;
❒ close lid B-fig. 33.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 35:
fig. 36
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
A0E0167m
INDEX
fig. 35
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
203
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 204
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
204
fig. 38
A0E0040m
Direction indicators/
Taillights/Brake lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ loosen screw A-fig. 37 and remove
the protection cover B;
❒ remove the bulb holder unit Cfig. 38 by pressing the retaining
tabs D.
fig. 39
A0E0041m
❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counter-clockwise fig. 39:
fig. 40
A0E0168m
Number plate light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
F direction indicator bulb.
❒ operate with a flat blade screwdriver protected by a soft cloth on device A-fig.
40 to remove the light unit B;
❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Dfig. 38;
❒ remove the bulb holder C-fig. 41 by
turning it slightly and replace the snapfitted bulb D.
E taillight/brake light bulb;
❒ refit the protection cover B-fig. 37
and tighten screw A.
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 205
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
SAFETY
DEVICES
For the type of bulb and power rating,
see “When needing to change a bulb”.
A0E0183m
fig. 43
A0E0084m
REAR CEILING LIGHT
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the third brake light replaced.
fig. 42
Versions without sunroof
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ remove the front ceiling light working in the points shown by the arrows
(see fig. 42);
❒ turn the 2 bulb holders A-fig. 43
counter-clockwise, remove and replace bulbs.
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
Additional brake light
(third stop)
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to change the bulb.
INDEX
fig. 41
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
FRONT CEILING LIGHT
A0E0169m
205
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 206
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
206
fig. 44
A0E0098m
Versions with sunroof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ remove the ceiling light A-fig. 44
working in the points shown by the arrows;
fig. 45
A0E0099m
❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 45 releasing it from the side contacts making
sure that the new bulb is correctly
clamped between the contacts.
fig. 46
A0E0118m
COURTESY MIRROR LIGHTS
(where provided)
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ open the mirror cover A-fig. 46;
❒ remove the bulb B levering in the
points shown by the arrows;
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 207
A0E0172m
GLOVEBOX LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ open the glovebox;
❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 48 levering in the point shown by the arrow;
❒ raise protection B-fig. 49 and replace the snap-fitted bulb;
fig. 49
A0E0173m
❒ close protection B-fig. 49 on light
unit A-fig. 48;
❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
❒ replace the bulb C-fig. 47 releasing it from the side contacts making
sure that the new bulb is correctly
clamped between the contacts.
fig. 48
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
A0E0171m
INDEX
fig. 47
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
207
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 208
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
208
fig. 50
A0E0205m
fig. 51
A0E0204m
BOOT LIGHT
PUDDLE LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ open the door and remove lens Afig. 52 levering in the point shown
by the arrow;
❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 50 levering in the point shown by the arrow;
❒ open the protection cover B-fig. 51
and replace the bulb releasing it from
the side contacts making sure that
the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;
❒ re-close the protective cover B;
❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.
fig. 52
A0E0075m
fig. 53
A0E0235m
❒ raise protection B-fig. 53 and replace the snap-fitted bulb;
❒ close protection B-fig. 53 on light
unit A-fig. 52;
❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.
GENERAL
The fuse is a protective device for the
electric system: it comes into action (i.e.
it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or improper action on the system.
When a device does not work, check the
efficiency of its fuse. The conductor element must be intact; if not, replace the
fuse with one of the same amp rating
(same colour).
A0E0119m
fig. 54
Never replace a broken
fuse with anything other than a new fuse.
WARNING
A: undamaged fuse
B: fuse with damaged filament.
To replace a fuse, use the pliers C
hooked to the fusebox on the dashboard.
WARNING
Never change a fuse
with another with a
higher amp rating, danger of
fire.
If the fuse blows again,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
If a general protection
fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking
system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission
system) or steering system is
triggered, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
SAFETY
DEVICES
WARNING
If a general fuse
(MEGA-FUSE, MAXIFUSE) cuts in, do not attempt
any repair and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
Before changing a fuse, check
the ignition key has been removed and that all the other
electric devices have been
turned off/disabled.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IF A FUSE BLOWS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 209
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
209
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 210
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
210
fig. 55
A0E0157m
FUSE LOCATION
Fuses are grouped into four fuse boxes
to be found respectively on the dashboard, on the battery positive pole, near
the battery and inside the boot (righthand side).
fig. 56
Fuse box on the dashboard
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse
box on the dashboard, loosen the fastening screw A-fig. 55 and remove
the cover B.
A0E0124m
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 211
A0E0126m
To gain access to the fuses in the fuse
box on the battery positive pole press
the retainers A-fig. 57 and remove
the protection cover B.
fig. 58
A0E0125m
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Fuse box on the battery
positive pole
INDEX
fig. 57
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
211
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 212
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
212
fig. 59
A0E0128m
Fuse box near the battery
To gain access to the fuses, loosen the
two fastening screws A-fig. 59 and
remove the protection cover B.
fig. 60
A0E0123m
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 213
A0E0129m
To gain access to the fuses, open the lid
on the left side of the boot as shown by
the arrow A-fig. 61.
fig. 62
A0E0224m
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Fuse box in the boot
(left-hand side)
INDEX
fig. 61
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
213
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
214
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 214
FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGTHS
FUSE
AMPERE
FIGURE
Right main beam headlight
F14
7.5
60
Left main beam headlight
F15
7.5
60
Right dipped beam headlight
F12
15
56
Left dipped beam headlight
F13
15
56
Front fog light
F30
15
60
Reversing light/Brake light
F35
7.5
56
Third brake light
F37
7.5
56
Front/rear ceiling light
F39
10
56
Front ceiling light
F49
7.5
56
Direction indicators
F53
10
56
Hazard lights
F53
10
56
FUSE
AMPERE
FIGURE
F70 (MEGA-FUSE)
150
58
Instrument panel control unit
F71
70
58
Additional heater (passenger compartment water heating 600W)
(diesel versions)
F72
50
58
Plug pre-heating control unit (diesel versions)
F73
60
58
F01 (MAXI-FUSE)
60
60
USERS
Engine housing control unit services
Instrument panel control unit
AMPERE
FIGURE
Climate control system fan (1.8 140 HP versions)
F02 (MAXI-FUSE)
40
60
Climate control system fan (2.2 JTS Selespeed versions)
F02 (MAXI-FUSE)
50
60
Electric steering lock
F03 (MAXI-FUSE)
20
60
Brake branch point (pump)
F04 (MAXI-FUSE)
40
60
Brake branch point (solenoid valve) (ABS version)
F05 (MAXI-FUSE)
40
60
Brake branch point (solenoid valve) (VDC version)
F05 (MAXI-FUSE)
20
60
Radiator fan (low speed) (1.8 140 HP, 2.2 JTS Selespeed versions)
F06 (MAXI-FUSE)
40
60
Radiator fan (high speed)
F07 (MAXI-FUSE)
50
60
Additional heater supply (passenger compartment water heating 300W)
(diesel versions)
F08
30
60
Headlight washer
F09
20
60
Horns
F10
15
60
Climate control system compressor
F19
7.5
60
Rear window heating
F20
20
60
SAFETY
DEVICES
FUSE
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
USERS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 215
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
215
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
216
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 216
USERS
FUSE
AMPERE
FIGURE
Fuel pump supply
F21
20
60
Sound system/radionavigation system power/Blue&Me
F23
15
60
Supply + key for relay coils of engine compartment control unit/
dashboard control unit/Body Computer
F31
7.5
56
Driver’s door branch point/passenger’s door branch point/
ignition device
F32
15
56
Rear left window control/boot node
F33
20
56
Rear right window control/boot node
F34
20
56
Water in diesel fuel filter sensor/flow meter/Brake light switch/
central console control panel/Cruise Control/AQS sensor
F35
7.5
56
Supply of boot node/locks actuators
F36
20
56
Positive under key for stop lights/third stop/instrument/
lights direction
F37
7.5
56
Boot opening
F38
15
56
Supply + battery for air conditioner, ceiling lights, volumetric alarm,
EOBD system diagnostic socket
F39
10
56
AMPERE
FIGURE
Heated rear window
F40
30
56
Defrosting of external mirrors/heated windshield relay coil
F41
7.5
56
Windshield wiper/washer
F43
30
56
Front cigar lighter on central console
F44
10
56
Supply of socket in the boot
F45
15
56
Sunroof
F46
20
56
Power supply of driver door node
F47
20
56
Power supply of passenger door nodes
F48
30
56
+ Key for wheel node/Sunroof control unit/
Front and rear ceiling lights/Cvs/Blue&Me node/Volumetric/
Left and right seat
F49
7.5
56
Supply under key for Telematic info node/
Automatic gearbox node/Additional heater/
Left dashboard controls/ START/STOP button,
Parking sensors control unit/Electrochromatic mirror/
Blue&Me node/Car radio prearrangement/AQS/Cruise Control
F51
7.5
56
SAFETY
DEVICES
FUSE
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
USERS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 217
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
217
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
218
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 218
USERS
FUSE
AMPERE
FIGURE
Rear window wiper/Rear lighter
F52
15
56
Instrument panel branch point
F53
10
56
Amplifier Bose audio system
F54
30
62
Front left seat movement control
F56
25
62
Driver’s seat warming left
F57
7.5
62
Front right seat movement control
F60
25
62
Amplifier Bose audio system on rear parcel shelf
F61
15
62
Front passenger’ seat warming right
F67
7.5
62
Free
F58
---
62
Free
F59
---
62
Free
F62
---
62
Free
F63
---
62
Free
F64
---
62
Free
F66
---
62
Free
F68
---
62
Free
F69
---
62
Free
F77
---
62
Free
F78
---
62
Free
F79
---
62
Free
F80
---
62
IMPORTANT The description of the
battery charging procedure is described
only for informative purposes. This operation should be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
❒ connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, observing the poles;
Charging should be slow at a low amp
rating for 24 hours. Charging for a
longer time may damage the battery.
❒ disconnect battery negative terminal
(–);
❒ turn on the charger;
❒ when you have finished, turn the
charger off before disconnecting the
battery;
WARNING
The liquid in the battery
is poisonous and corrosive. Do not let it touch the
skin or eyes. Recharging the
battery should be done in a
well ventilated area away
from naked flames or possible
sources of sparks: explosion
and fire risk.
❒ reconnect battery negative terminal
(–).
SAFETY
DEVICES
Charge the battery as follows:
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
IF THE BATTERY
IS FLAT
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 219
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
WARNING
Do not attempt to
recharge a frozen battery. Thaw it first, otherwise
it could explode. If the battery
froze, make sure the internal
elements are not broken and
that the casing is not cracked:
risk of spilling the poisonous
and corrosive fluid.
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
219
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
220
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 220
WITH THE JACK
JACKING THE CAR
See instructions given in paragraph
“Wheel replacement” in this section
USING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT
Never jack the car from the front side,
the car can only be jacked at the sides,
jack arms or workshop lift shall be
placed as shown in fig. 63. In any
case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
fig. 63
A0E0195m
Pagina 221
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
TOWING THE CAR
To prevent damaging the transmission
components, tow the car only in one of
following ways:
fig. 64
A0E0111m
❒ with front and rear wheels on the
flatbed of a wrecker or maintenance
vehicle.
A0E0176m
TOW RING HOOKING
Front
❒ with front wheels raised and rear
wheels resting on a truck provided for
the purpose;
❒ with rear wheels raised and front
wheels resting on a truck provided for
the purpose;
fig. 66
Proceed as follows:
❒ take the tow hook A-fig. 64 from
the Fix&Go automatic container.
fig. 65
A0E0230m
❒ remove the snap-fitted plug A-fig. 65
from the front bumper. If using the flat
blade screwdriver B-fig. 64 provided
as standard, protect its tip with a soft
cloth to prevent damaging the car.
❒ tighten the tow hook in its seat.
Rear
The tow hook A-fig. 66 for the rear
bumper is fixed.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
PRECAUTIONS FOR
TOWING THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
The tow hook provided with the car is
contained into the Fix&Go automatic
container.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:10
TECHNICAL
CAR
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
221
INDEX
IN AN
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
181-222 Alfa 159 GB
222
3-12-2009
14:10
Pagina 222
WARNING
Before fitting the hook,
clean accurately its
threaded seat. Before starting
to tow, make sure to have
tighten the hook.
WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the car.
WARNING
Before starting to tow,
disengage the steering
lock (see paragraph “Ignition device” in section “Dashboard and
controls”). When towing, remember that without the help of
the brake booster and power
steering, a greater effort is required on the pedal and steering wheel. Do not use flexible cables for towing and avoid jerks.
During towing operations make
sure that fastening the joint to
the car does not damage the
components in contact with it.
When towing the car, you must
comply with the specific traffic
regulations regarding the tow
ring and how to tow on the road.
WARNING
The front and rear tow
hooks must only be
used for emergency situations
on the road. The vehicle may
be towed for short distances
when a dedicated device is
used in compliance with the
Highway Code (rigid bar), in
order to move the vehicle on
the road in preparation for
towing by a tow truck Tow
hooks MUST NOT be used to
tow vehicles off the road or
where there are obstacles
and/or for towing operations
using cables or other non-rigid
devices. Respecting the above
conditions, towing must only
take place with two vehicles
(one towing, the other towed)
travelling as far as possible in
alignment along the same centreline.
SCHEDULED SERVICING...................................... 224
SERVICE SCHEDULE ........................................... 225
PERIODICAL CHECKS .......................................... 227
SAFETY
DEVICES
CAR MAINTENANCE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 223
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS .................................... 228
AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER ................................ 237
BATTERY .......................................................... 237
WHEELS AND TYRES.......................................... 241
RUBBER HOSES ................................................ 243
WINDSCREEN WIPER ........................................ 243
BODYWORK ..................................................... 245
INTERIORS ....................................................... 247
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
USE OF THE CAR UNDER HEAVY CONDITIONS ........ 227
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
223
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 224
Correct maintenance is essential for ensuring long car life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 35,000 km (or 21,000
mi).
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SAFETY
DEVICES
SCHEDULED
SERVICING
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
224
IMPORTANT The actual engine oil and
filter change frequency depends on the
conditions of use of the car and is signalled by means of a warning light or
message (where provided) on the instrument panel.
IMPORTANT At 2,000 km from the
scheduled service, the display will show
a dedicated message.
It is however important to remember that
scheduled servicing does not completely
cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before 35,000 km (or
21,000 mi) service coupon and later, between one coupon and another, ordinary
care is still required such as for example
routine check and topping up the level of
fluids, tyre pressure check, etc...
IMPORTANT The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the
Manufacturer. The failure to have them
carried out may invalidate the warranty.
Scheduled Servicing is performed by all
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, at preestablished times.
If during whatever service operation, in
addition to the ones programmed, the
need arises for further replacements or
repairs, these may be carried out only
with the explicit agreement of the Customer.
IMPORTANT You are advised to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services in
the event of any minor operating faults,
without waiting for the next service
coupon.
If your car is used frequently for towing,
the interval between one service coupon
and the other must be reduced.
35
70
105
140
175
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required
●
●
●
●
●
Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen wiper/washer operation,adjust nozzles if required
●
●
●
●
●
Check windscreen/rear window blade position/wear
●
●
●
●
●
Check front disk brake pad conditions and wear and wear indicator operation
●
●
●
●
●
Check rear disk brake pad conditions and wear
●
●
●
●
●
Sight inspect the conditions of: body external parts, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts
(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness
and lubrication
●
●
●
●
●
Check and top up, if required, fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch,
power steering, windscreen washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke
●
●
Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (except 1.8 140 HP version)
●
Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (1.8 140 HP version)
●
Sight inspect timing belt conditions (1.8 140 HP version)
●
●
●
SAFETY
DEVICES
Thousands of km
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SERVICE SCHEDULE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 225
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
225
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
226
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 226
Thousands of km
Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.9 JTDM 8v version)
Check and adjust tappet clearance, if required (1.8 140 HP version)
Check exhaust emissions (petrol versions)
Check exhaust emissions/smoke (diesel versions)
Check engine control system operation (through diagnosis socket)
Replace accessory drive belt/s (except 1.8 140 HP version)
Replace accessory drive belt/s (1.8 140 HP version)
Replace timing belt (1.8 140 HP version) (*)
Replace timing belt (1750 TURBO BENZINA version) (*)
Replace timing belt (diesel versions) (*)
Change spark plugs (3.2 JTS and 2.2 JTS Selespeed versions)
Change spark plugs (1.8 140 HP and 1750 TURBO BENZINA versions)
Replace diesel fuel filter (diesel versions)
Change air cleaner cartridge
Change front transmission gear oil (3.2 JTS 4x4 versions)
Change engine oil and oil filter (1.8 140 HP versions) (or every 12 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (1750 TURBO BENZINA versions) (**)
(or every 12 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (3.2 JTS and 2.2 JTS Selespeed versions)
(or every 24 months) (***)
Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel versions with DPF) (**)
(or every 24 months)
Change engine oil and oil filter (diesel versions without DPF)
(or every 24 months)
Change brake fluid (or every 24 months)
Change pollen filter (or every 24 months)
35
70
105
140
175
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
(*) Regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city,
idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years.
(**) The engine oil and the filter must be changed when the instrument panel warning light comes on (see “Warning lights and Messages” chapter)
and in all cases every 24 months.
If the car is mainly used for town driving or in particularly harsh climate conditions and has a low annual mileage, the engine oil and filter should
be changed every 12 months.
❒ engine coolant fluid level;
❒ brake fluid level;
❒ windscreen washer fluid level;
❒ tyre pressure and conditions.
❒ check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard
lights, etc.);
❒ check windscreen wiper/washer operation and windscreen/rear window
blade position/wear;
Every 3,000 km check and top up if required: engine oil level.
You are recommended to use
PETRONAS LUBRICANTS products, designed and produced specifically for Alfa Romeo cars (see table “Capacities” in section “Technical specifications”).
❒ sight inspect the conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes
and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes),
rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes,
etc.);
Should prevailing use of the car be under one of the following specially heavy
conditions:
❒ check battery charge and fluid level
(electrolyte);
❒ trailer or caravan towing;
❒ dusty roads;
❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km)
and repeated with external temperatures below zero;
❒ frequently idling engines or long distance low speed driving (e.g.: doorto-door deliveries) or in case of a long
term inactivity;
❒ urban routes;
carry out checks more frequently than
required on Service Schedule:
❒ check front disk brake pad conditions
and wear;
❒ check cleanness of bonnet and boot
locks and lever cleanness and lubrication;
❒ visual check on various drive belt conditions;
❒ change engine oil and oil filter, if required;
❒ check and replace pollen filter, if required;
❒ check and replace air cleaner, if required.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, check and top up if required:
USE OF THE CAR
UNDER HEAVY
CONDITIONS
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
PERIODICAL CHECKS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 227
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
227
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 228
CHECKING
FLUID LEVELS
For refilling amounts refer to Technical
Specifications section.
When topping up take
care not to confuse the
various types of fluids:
they are all incompatible with
one another and could seriously damage the car.
WARNING
Never smoke while
working in the engine
compartment; gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the risk of fire.
6
3
5
2
4
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant 6. Power steering fluid
1
fig. 2 - 1750 TURBO BENZINA version
228
A0E0374m
fig. 1 - 1.8 140 HP version
A0E0854m
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 229
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
A0E0161m
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
fig. 3 - 2.2 JTS Selespeed version
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
INDEX
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
fig. 3/a - 3.2 JTS version
A0E0038m
229
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 230
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
5
6
3
2
4
1
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
fig. 5 - 2.0 JTDM version
230
A0E0162m
fig. 4 - 1.9 JTDM 8v - 1.9 JTDM 16v versions
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
A0E0853m
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 231
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
A0E0203m
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
fig. 6 - 2.4 JTDM version
INDEX
1. Engine oil - 2. Battery
3. Brake fluid - 4. Windscreen washer
fluid - 5. Engine coolant
6. Power steering fluid
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
231
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 232
fig. 7
A0E0400m
fig. 8/a
A0E0018m
fig. 11
A0E0855m
fig. 8
A0E0856m
fig. 9
A0E0069m
fig. 12
A0E0202m
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
232
ENGINE OIL
Checking engine oil
Fig. 7: 1.8 140 HP version
Fig. 8: 1750 TURBO BENZINA version
Fig. 8/a: 2.2 JTS Selespeed version
Fig. 9: 3.2 JTS version
Fig. 10: 1.9 JTDM 8V 1.9 JTDM 16V versions
Fig. 11: 2.0 JTDM version
Fig. 12: 2.4 JTDM version
Check the oil level a few minutes (about
5) after the engine has stopped, with
the car parked on level ground.
fig. 10
A0E0233m
Remove the dipstick A and clean it, put it
back in completely, remove it and check
that the level is within the MIN and
MAX marks on the dipstick. The gap between the MIN and MAX marks corresponds to about one litre of oil.
If the oil level is near or even below the
MIN mark, add oil through the filler
neck B, until reaching the MAX mark.
Oil level shall never exceed the MAX
mark.
Max engine oil consumption is usually
400 grams every 1000 km.
IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals that the oil level is above the
MAX mark, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the correct level restored.
IMPORTANT After adding or changing
the oil, let the engine turn over for a few
seconds and wait a few minutes after
turning it off before you check the level.
When the car is new, the engine needs
to run in, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after the first 5000 - 6000 km.
IMPORTANT The oil consumption depends on driving style and the conditions
under which the car is used.
IMPORTANT Do not add oil with
specifications other than that already
in the engine.
WARNING
When the engine is hot,
take care when working inside the engine compartment to avoid burns. Remember that when the engine is
hot, the fan may cut in: danger
of injury. Scarves, ties and
other loose clothing might be
pulled by moving parts.
Used engine oil and filter contain harmful substances for the environment. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the oil
and filter changed.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Engine oil consumption
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Topping up engine oil
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 233
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
233
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 234
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
WARNING
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
Do not remove the
reservoir cap when the
engine is hot: you risk scalding
yourself.
234
fig. 13
A0E0017m
ENGINE COOLANT FLUID
fig. 13
If the level is low, pour slowly a mixture
of 50% distilled water and 50%
PARAFLU UP through the filler neck
A.
A 50% mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU UP gives freeze protection
to –35°C.
Unter besonders strengen klimatischen
Bedingungen empfehlen wir eine Mischung aus 60% PARAFLU UP und
40% demineralisiertem Wasser.
fig. 14
The cooling system uses
PARAFLU UP that shall
be used for topping up
and that cannot be mixed with
other types of fluids. Should
other fluids be added, do not
start the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible.
WARNING
The cooling system is
pressurised. If necessary, replace the cap only with
another genuine one, otherwise system efficiency could
be compromised.
A0E0029m
WINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHT
WASHER FLUID fig. 14
To top up, remove the cap A and then
pour a mixture of water and TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the following concentrations:
❒ 30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;
❒ 50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter.
In case of temperatures below –20°C,
use undiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35.
Pagina 235
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
WARNING
Certain commercial additives for windscreen
washers are inflammable. The
engine compartment contains
hot components which may set
it on fire.
POWER STEERING FLUID
fig. 15-16
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum level: this operation shall
be carried out with the car on level surface, engine not running and cold.
Check that the fluid level is at the MAX
mark on the reservoir or at the top mark
(maximum level) shown on the dipstick
under the reservoir cap.
A0E0027m
fig. 15 - 1.8 140 CV 1750 TURBO BENZINA 2.2 JTS Selespeed - 2.4 JTDM versions
A0E0234m
fig. 16 - 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8V 1.9 JTDM 16V - 2.0 JTDM versions
If the fluid level in the reservoir is below
the specified level, top up as follows:
IMPORTANT For this operation it is
however recommended to always contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
❒ start the engine and wait until the fluid level in the reservoir has stabilized;
❒ with the engine started, turn repeatedly the steering wheel fully rightwards and leftwards;
❒ top up until reaching the MAX mark
then refit the cap.
WARNING
Do not allow the power steering fluid to
touch the hot parts of the engine: it is inflammable.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
SAFETY
DEVICES
Do not travel with the
windscreen washer
reservoir empty. The windscreen washer is fundamental
for improving visibility.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
235
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 236
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
IMPORTANT For this operation it is
however recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services.
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
From time to time, check the instrument
panel warning light x: pressing on cap
A (with key fitted into the ignition device) the warning light shall turn on.
236
fig. 17
A0E0016m
BRAKE FLUID fig. 17
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir
is at maximum. Top up with the brake
fluid specified in the table “Fluids and
lubricants” (see section “Technical Specifications ").
NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap A
and the surrounding surface. When
opening the cap take the utmost care to
prevent impurities entering the tank.
When topping up, always use a funnel
with built-in filter with mesh equal to
or lower than 0.12 mm.
IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs
moisture. For this reason, if the car is
mainly used in areas with a high degree
of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should
be replaced at more frequent intervals
than specified in the Service schedule.
WARNING
Brake fluid is poisonous
and highly corrosive. In
the event of accidental contact,
wash the parts involved immediately with neutral soap
and water, then rinse thoroughly. Call the doctor immediately if the fluid is swallowed.
WARNING
Make sure that the highly corrosive brake fluid
does not drip onto the
paintwork. If it does, wash it off
immediately with water.
Symbol π on the container indicates synthetic brake fluid, distinguishing it from the mineral kind.
Using mineral fluids irreversibly damages the special
braking system rubber seals.
The battery does not require top ups of
distilled water to replenish the electrolyte. A periodic check carried out at
an Alfa Romeo Authorised Services is,
however, necessary to check efficiency.
IMPORTANT The charge in the battery should be checked at the start of
winter to limit the risk of electrolyte
freezing. This check should be carried
out more frequently if the car is used
mainly for short trips, or if it is fitted with
accessories that permanently absorb
electricity also with the ignition key removed, especially in the case of after
market accessories.
After connecting/disconnecting the battery,
wait for 3 minutes at
least before fitting the electronic
key into the ignition device in
order to allow the climate control system control unit to reset
the positions of the electric actuators that adjust air temperature and distribution.
WARNING
The liquid in the battery is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with
eyes and skin. Do not bring
naked flames or possible
sources of sparks near to the
battery: risk of fire and explosion.
WARNING
Running the battery
with low fluid level can
damage the battery beyond
repair and could also cause its
explosion.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Air cleaner or pollen filter replacement
shall be carried out at Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
BATTERY
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
AIR FILTER/
POLLEN FILTER
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 237
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
237
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
238
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 238
REPLACING THE BATTERY
If required, replace the battery with a
genuine spare part having the same
specifications.
If a battery with different specifications
is fitted, the service intervals given in
the Service schedule in this section will
no longer be valid.
Refer therefore to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer.
Incorrect fitting of electrical and electronic accessories can seriously
damage the car. If after buying
the car, you want to install electric accessories which require permanent electric supply (alarm,
free-hand phone kit, etc.) contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most
suitable devices, will evaluate the
overall electric absorption, checking whether the car’s electric system is capable of withstanding
the load required, or whether it
should be integrated with a more
powerful battery.
Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful for the environment. You are advised to have
the battery changed at Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services,
which is properly equipped for
disposing of used batteries respecting nature and the law.
WARNING
If the car is left inactive
for long periods at cold,
remove the battery and store
it in a warm place to prevent
freezing.
WARNING
When working on the
battery or near it, always wear the proper goggles.
If after buying the car, you want to install electric accessories which require
permanent electric supply (alarm, etc.)
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
whose qualified personnel, in addition
to suggesting the most suitable devices
available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
will evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking whether the car’s
electric system is capable of withstanding the load required, or whether it
should be integrated with a more powerful battery.
In fact, since these devices continue absorbing energy even when the ignition
key is off, they gradually run down the
battery.
The total intake of these systems (factory and after-market) must be less than
0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown
in the following table:
Battery
Maximum admitted
stand-by intake
60 Ah
36 mA
70 Ah
42 mA
90 Ah
54 mA
SAFETY
DEVICES
To avoid draining your battery and
lengthen its life, observe the following
indications:
❒ when you park the car, ensure the
doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed
properly;
❒ the ceiling lights must be off. The car
is however provided with an automatic system for switching off internal lights;
❒ do not keep accessories (e.g.: sound
system, hazard lights, etc.) switched
on for a long time when the engine
is not running;
❒ before performing any operation on
the electrical system, disconnect the
battery negative terminal cable;
❒ battery terminals shall always be perfectly tightened.
IMPORTANT A battery which is kept
at a charge of less than 50% for any
length of time will be damaged by sulphation leading to a reduction in cranking power.
Moreover, this might lead to a higher
risk of the battery electrolyte freezing
(this may even occur at –10°C). If the
car is inactive for a long period of time,
refer to “Car inactivity”, in section “Correct use of the car”.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
USEFUL ADVICE FOR
LENGTHENING THE LIFE
OF YOUR BATTERY
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 239
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
239
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 240
IMPORTANT NOTES
WHEELS AND TYRES
As far as possible, avoid sharp braking
and screech starts, etc. Be careful not to
hit the kerb, potholes or other obstacles
hard. Driving for long stretches over
bumpy roads can damage the tyres.
Check the pressure of each tyre, including the space-saver spare wheel, every
four weeks and before long journeys:
pressure should be checked with the tyre
rested and cold.
fig. 18
A0E0120m
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre
wear fig. 18:
A normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
C high pressure: tread particularly worn
in the centre.
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
For the correct tyre inflation pressure,
see “Wheels” in “Technical specifications” section.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
240
B low pressure: tread particularly worn
at the edges.
Tyres must be replaced when the tread
wears down to 1.6 mm. In any case,
comply with the laws in the country
where the car is being driven.
Periodically check that the tyres have no
cuts in the side wall, abnormal swelling
or irregular tyre wear. If any of these occur, have the car seen to at Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may cause serious damage to
the wheels and tyres; if a tyre is punctured, stop immediately and change it
to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim,
suspensions and steering system.
In the case of replacement, always fit
new tyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve; to allow even wear between the front and rear tyres, it is advisable to change them over every 1015 thousand kilometres, keeping them
on the same side of the car so as to not
reverse the direction of rotation.
WARNING
If the pressure is too
low the tyre overheats
and this can cause it serious
damage.
WARNING
Do not cross switch the
tyres, moving them
from the right of the car to the
left and vice versa.
WARNING
Never submit alloy rims
to repainting treatments requiring to use temperatures exceeding 150°C
since the mechanical properties
of the wheels could be impaired.
SAFETY
DEVICES
WARNING
Remember that road
holding depends also
on the correct tyre inflating
pressure.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Tyres age even if they are not used
much. Cracks in the tread rubber are a
sign of ageing. In any case, if the tyres
have been on the car for over 6 years,
they should be checked by specialised
personnel, to see if they can still be
used. Also remember to check the spacesaver spare wheel.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 241
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
241
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
242
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 242
RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Service schedule in this section.
Indeed ozone, high temperatures and
prolonged lack of fluid in the system
may cause hardening and cracking of
the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful
control is therefore necessary.
WINDSCREEN/REAR
SCREEN WIPERS
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using
special products TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35 is recommended.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn
they should be replaced. In any case
they should be changed once a year.
A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:
❒ if the temperature fall below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen the
rubber against glass. If necessary,
thaw using an antifreeze product;
❒ remove any snow from the glass: in
addition to protecting the blades, this
prevents effort on the motor and
overheating;
❒ do not operate the windscreen wipers
on dry glass.
WARNING
Driving with worn
wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility
is reduced in bad weather.
If the jet of fluid is missing, firstly check
that there is fluid in the reservoir: see
“Checking fluid levels” in this section).
Regularly check that the spray jets are
intact and clean.
Then check that the nozzle holes are not
clogged, if necessary use a needle.
fig. 19
A0E0080m
Changing the windscreen
wiper blades fig. 19
How to remove the blade:
– raise the windscreen wiper arm A;
– turn the blade B by 90° around pin
C, on the final section of the arm;
– remove the blade from the pin C.
How to refit the new blade:
– fit pin C into the hole in the middle
of the blade B;
– refit the arm with the blade on the
windscreen.
Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3
height from the window upper edge.
The headlight washers are automatically switched on when the windscreen
washer is operated and the dipped
beams are on.
SAFETY
DEVICES
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SPRAY NOZZLES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 243
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
243
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
244
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 244
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM
ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are the following:
❒ atmospheric pollution;
❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas,
or hot humid climates);
❒ seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the
abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust and sand and mud and gravel raised by other cars.
On your car, Alfa Romeo implemented
the best manufacturing technologies to
effectively protect the bodywork against
corrosion.
These include:
❒ Painting products and systems which
give the car particular resistance to
corrosion and abrasion;
❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated)
steel sheets, with high resistance to
corrosion;
❒ Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner fender parts,
edges, etc.;
❒ Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of
moisture from triggering rust inside;
❒ use of special anti-abrasion protective
tapes in the most exposed areas
(e.g.: rear mudguard, rear door,
etc.).
BODY AND UNDERBODY
WARRANTY
Your car is covered by warranty against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For the
general terms of this warranty, refer to
the Alfa Romeo Warranty booklet.
Paint
❒ remove the aerial from the roof to
prevent damage to it if the car is
washed in an automatic system;
Paintwork does not only serve an
aestethic purpose, but also protects the
underlying sheet metal.
In the case of deep scrapes or scores,
you are advised to have the necessary
touching up carried out immediately to
avoid the formation of rust. Use only
original paint products for touching up
(see “Bodywork paint identification
plate” in section “Technical specification”).
Normal paint maintenance consists in
washing at intervals depending on the
conditions and environment of use. For
example, in highly polluted areas, or if
the roads are sprayed with salt, it is wise
to wash the car more frequently.
❒ wash the body using a low pressure
jet of water;
❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy
solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing with the sponge;
❒ rinse well with water and dry with a
jet of air or a chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with
the less visible parts like door surrounds,
bonnet and around the headlights where
water may stagnate. The car should not
be taken to a closed area immediately,
but left in the open so that residual water can evaporate.
Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this
may alter the shine of the paintwork.
Detergents cause water
pollution. Therefore the
car should be washed
in areas equipped for collecting
and purifying the liquid used in
the washing process.
To keep intact the aesthetic properties of the
paintwork do not use
abrasive and/or polish products
for cleaning the car bodywork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the car.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release give the paint a dull appearance
and increase the possibility of triggering
rust processes.
IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.
SAFETY
DEVICES
To wash the car correctly proceed as follows:
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
ADVICE FOR PRESERVING
THE BODYWORK
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 245
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
245
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
246
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 246
Windows
Front headlights
Engine compartment
Use specific window cleaner products. Use
also clean cloths to avoid scratching the
glass or damaging the transparency.
Front headlights shall be washed with
soft cloth moistened with water and car
detergent.
At the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed,
without directing the jet against electronic
control units. Contact a specialised workshop to have this done.
IMPORTANT The inside of the
rearscreen should be wiped gently with
a cloth in the direction of the filaments
to avoid damaging the heating device.
IMPORTANT Cleaning headlight lenses with a dry cloth will damage the
headlights with lack of performance as
a consequence. Solvents mat the lenses with lack of performance as a consequence.
IMPORTANT When washing the front
headlights with a water monitor nozzle keep at least 2 cm away from the
lenses.
IMPORTANT The car should be
washed with the engine cold and the key
removed from the ignition device. After
washing make sure that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and various covers) have not been damaged or removed.
Remove dried on dirt with lightly moistened chamois leather or cloth without
pressing too hard.
CLEANING SEATS AND
FABRIC AND VELVET PARTS
Remove liquid or grease stains with a dry
absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap.
Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner to
remove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if
the brush is moistened.
If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions
for use.
Rub the seats with a sponge moistened
with a solution of water and neutral detergent.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.
Upholstery of your car
has been designed to
withstand wear deriving from common use of the car.
You are however recommended
to avoid strong and/or continuous scratching with clothing
accessories such as metallic
buckles, studs, Velcro fastenings and the like, since these
items cause circumscribed stress
of the cover fabric that could
lead to yarn breaking, and damage the cover as a consequence.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Periodically check that water is not
trapped under the mats (due to water
dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.)
which could cause oxidisation of the
sheet metal.
LEANING LEATHER SEATS
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
INTERIORS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 247
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
14:11
CAR
TECHNICAL
IN AN
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
INDEX
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
247
INDEX
CAR
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
223-248 Alfa 159 GB
248
3-12-2009
14:11
Pagina 248
INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
Clean plastic parts with a cloth moistened with water and non-abrasive neutral detergent. To remove grease or hard
stains, use appropriate products designed to preserve the appearance of
components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the instrument panel
or other plastic parts.
WARNING
Never use flammable
products like oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning
car interiors. Electrostatic discharges generated by rubbing
during cleaning operations
could cause fire.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol
cans in the car: they
might explode. Aerosol cans
must never be exposed to a
temperature above 50°C. The
temperature inside the car exposed to the sun may go well
beyond that figure.
STEERING WHEEL/
GEAR LEVER KNOB WITH
GENUINE LEATHER
COVERING
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
These components shall only be cleaned
with water and neutral soap. Never use
spirit or alcohol-based products.
Before using special products for cleaning interiors, read carefully label instructions and indications to make sure
they are free from spirit and/or alcoholbased substances.
If when cleaning the windscreen with
special glass products, some drops fall
on the leather covering of the steering
wheel/gear lever knob remove them
immediately and then clean with water and neutral soap.
IMPORTANT Take the utmost care
when engaging the steering lock to prevent scratching the leather covering.
IDENTIFICATION DATA ........................................ 250
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS............... 252
ENGINE .......................................................... 253
SAFETY
DEVICES
T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 249
BRAKES ........................................................... 256
STEERING ........................................................ 256
SUSPENSIONS.................................................. 256
WHEELS .......................................................... 257
DIMENSIONS.................................................... 261
PERFORMANCE ................................................. 263
WEIGHTS......................................................... 264
CAPACITIES ...................................................... 266
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................... 267
FUEL CONSUMPTION ......................................... 269
CO2 EMISSIONS .............................................. 270
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL:
MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATIONS ............................. 271
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
TRANSMISSION ............................................... 255
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
FUEL FEED/IGNITION ........................................ 255
IN AN
EMERGENCY
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
249
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
250
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 250
IDENTIFICATION
DATA
You are advised to note the identification codes. The identification data
stamped and given on the plates and
their position are the following fig. 1:
1 - Identification label
fig. 1
A0A0045m
2 - Body label
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
3 - Bodywork paint identification label
This is to be found in the engine compartment, aside the upper right shockabsorber connection and it bears the following identification data:
4 - Engine label.
fig. 2
A0E0013m
C. Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national
regulations
D.Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified
A. Space for details of national homologation
E. Space for smoke coefficient (diesel
versions only)
B. Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number
F. Space for punching the Manufacturer’s name.
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 251
ENGINE MARKING
It can be reached by raising cover
A-fig. 3 and it includes:
❒ type of vehicle (ZAR 939000);
❒ Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis number).
BODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
This is located in the inner side of the
tailgate fig. 4 and it includes:
A. Paint manufacturer
B. Name of colour
C. Colour code.
D. Colour code for touching up and respraying.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
This is located on the passenger compartment floor near the front passenger’s seat.
A0A0222m
IN AN
EMERGENCY
BODYWORK LABEL
fig. 4
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
A0A0175m
INDEX
fig. 3
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
Engine marking is stamped on the gearbox side, on the rear left side.
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
251
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
INDEX
Pagina 252
ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS
Versions
Engine code
Bodywork version
1.8 140 HP
1750 TURBO BENZINA (***)
3.2 JTS 4x2
3.2 JTS 4x4
1.9 JTDM 8v
939A4000
939B1000
939A000
939A000
939A1000
939A7000 (Õ)
939AXL1A 21C / 939BXL1A 22C ()
939AXN1B 52 (**) / 939BXN1B 53 () (**)
939AXG1B 44 / 939BXG1B 45 ()
939AXG2B 09B / 939BXG2B 16B ()
939AXE1B 04C
939AXH1B 06D (Õ)
939BXE1B 14C ()
939BXH1B 17D ()(Õ)
939AXE1B 04D ()
939BXE1B 14D () ()
939AXC1B 01E ()
939BXC1B 12G () ()
939AXC1B 01F ()
939BXC1B 12H () ()
939AXF1B 05D () (Õ)
939BXF1B 15F () () (Õ)
939AXP1B 54 (**)
939AXP1B 54B
939BXP1B 55 () (**)
939BXP1B 55B ()
939AXP1B 54C ()
939BXP1B 55C () ()
939AXQ1B 62 () / 939BXQ1B 63 () ()
939AXM1B 39B / 939BXM1B 40B ()
939AXM2B 35B / 939BXM2B 36B ()
1.9 JTDM 16v
939A2000
939A8000 (Õ)
2.0 JTDM (***)
939B3000
2.0 JTDM (***) (Õ)
2.4 JTDM 4x2
2.4 JTDM 4x4
844A2000
939A9000
939A9000
() Sportwagon versions
252
15:51
(Õ) For specific markets
(**) Pack TI
(***) Euro 5 versions
() ECO versions
Engine code
Cycle
Number and layout of cylinders
Valves per cylinder
1.8
140 HP
1750 TURBO BENZINA
2.2 JTS (*)
3.2 JTS
939A4000
939B1000
939A5000
939A000
Otto
Otto
Otto
Otto
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
6 in 60° V
4
4
4
4
Piston bore and stroke
mm
80.5 x 88.2
83.0 x 80.5
86 X 94.6
89 X 85.6
Total displacement
cm3
1796
1742
2198
3195
Maximum power (EEC)
kW
HP
rpm
103
140
6500
147
200
5000
136
185
6500
191
260
6200
Nm
kgm
rpm
175
17.8
3800
320
32.6
1400
230
23.4
4500
322
32.8
4500
BOSCH
FQR8 LEU2
NGK
ILKAR7D6G
NGKFR5CP
BOSCH
HR7MPP152
Unleaded petrol
95 RON
(Specification EN228)
Unleaded petrol
95 RON
(Specification EN228)
corresponding ratio
Maximum torque (EEC)
corresponding ratio
Spark plugs
Fuel
Unleaded petrol
Unleaded petrol
95 RON
95 RON
(Specification EN228) (Specification EN228)
SAFETY
DEVICES
GENERAL
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
ENGINE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 253
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
15:51
IN AN
EMERGENCY
3-12-2009
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
To change plugs contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
INDEX
(*) Selespeed version
253
3-12-2009
1.9
JTDM 8v
(*)
Engine code
939A1000 939A7000 939A2000
Cycle
Number and layout of cylinders
Valves per cylinder
1.9
1.9
JTDM 16v JTDM 16v
(*)
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
5 in line
5 in line
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
82 x 90,4 83.0 x 90.4 82 X 90.4
82 x 90.4
1910
1956
2387
2387
110
150
4000
100
136
4000
120 (*)/125
163 (*)/170
4000
147
200
4000
154
210
4000
280
28.6
2000
320
32.6
2000
305
31
2000
360
36.7
1750
400
40.8
2000
400
40.8
1500
–
–
–
–
–
–
82 x 90.4
Total displacement
cm3
1910
1910
1910
Maximum power (EEC)
kW
HP
rpm
88
120
4000
85
115
4000
Nm
kgm
rpm
280
28.6
2000
–
IN AN
EMERGENCY
82 x 90,4
Fuel
(*) For specific markets
(**) QTronic gearbox versions
939A8000 939B3000 939A3000 939A9000
844A2000 (*)
Diesel
82 x 90.4
Spark plugs
2.4 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
200 HP
210 HP
(**)
Diesel
mm
Maximum torque (EEC)
2.0 JTDM
Diesel
Piston bore and stroke
corresponding ratio
INDEX
Pagina 254
1.9
JTDM 8v
corresponding ratio
254
15:51
GENERAL
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
Diesel fuel Diesel fuel Diesel fuel Diesel fuel Diesel fuel Diesel fuel Diesel fuel
for motor
for motor
for motor
for motor
for motor
for motor
for motor
vehicles
vehicles
vehicles
vehicles
vehicles
vehicles
vehicles
(Specification (Specification (Specification (Specification (Specification (Specification (Specification
EN590)
EN590)
EN590)
EN590)
EN590)
EN590)
EN590))
1750 TURBO BENZINA
2.2 JTS - 3.2 JTS
1.9 JTDM 8V
1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.0 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
Multipoint fuel injection
Direct injection
Direct injection, Common Rail
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Modifications or repairs to the fuel feed system that are not carried out properly or do not
take the system’s technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to
the risk of fire.
TRANSMISSION
1.8 140 HP
1750 TURBO BENZINA
3.2 JTS 4x2 - 1.9 JTDM 8V 1.9
JTDM 16v 2.4 JTDM 200 HP
2.0 JTDM - 2.4 JTDM 210 HP
2.4 JTDM 210 HP 4x4
3.2 JTS 4x4
Five forward gears + reverse
and synchronisers for speeds
Six forward gears + reverse
and synchronisers for speeds
Six forward gears + reverse
and synchronisers for speeds
Clutch
Dry single disk
with hydraulic control
Dry single disk
with hydraulic control
Dry single disk
with hydraulic control
Drive
Front
Front
Four-wheel drive
Gearbox
IMPORTANT In the event of difficult disengagement, due to significant difference of grip between front and rear axle, do
not insist with heavy accelerations: it is actually more effective an attempt of disengagement at medium slow engine rpm,
with pauses of a few seconds if several attempts are necessary.
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Fuel feed
1.8 140 HP
SAFETY
DEVICES
FUEL FEED/IGNITION
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 255
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
255
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
256
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 256
BRAKES
1.8 140 HP - 1750 TURBO BENZINA - 2.2 JTS
1.9 JTDM 8v - 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.0 JTDM
3.2 JTS - 2.4 JTDM
Service brakes:
– front
– rear
Parking brake
Disc, self-ventilating
Disc
Disc, self-ventilating
Disc, self-ventilating
Controlled by hand lever, it works on rear brakes
IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt on roads may deposit on the brake discs thus reducing braking efficiency at first braking.
STEERING
1.8 140 HP - 1750 TURBO BENZINA - 2.2 JTS - 3.2 JTS
1.9 JTDM 8V - 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.0 JTDM - 2.4 JTDM
Type
Turning radius
(between pavements)
Rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering
11.1
SUSPENSIONS
1.8 140 HP - 1750 TURBO BENZINA - 2.2 JTS - 3.2 JTS - 1.9 JTDM 8V
1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.0 JTDM - 2.4 JTDM
Front
High quadrilateral system
Rear
Multi-link system
IMPORTANT In the event of discrepancies between the information provided on this “Owner’s Manual” and the
“Log book”, consider the specifications
shown in the log book only.
On cars fitted with four-wheel drive, all
four tyres should be the same (brand
and track) to prevent damaging the 4WD system. The efficiency of the 4-WD
system however, is not jeopardized if
tyres with different wear conditions are
fitted.
Attaining to the prescribed size, to ensure safety of the car in movement, it
must be fitted with tyres of the same
make and type on all wheels.
IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes
with Tubeless tyres.
SPACE-SAVER SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.
A0E0186m
fig. 5
UNDERSTANDING
TYRE MARKING fig. 5
Example: 205/55 R 16 91 V
205= Nominal width (S, distance between sidewalls in mm).
55 = Percentage height/width ratio
(H/S).
R
= Radial tyre.
16 = Rim diameter in inches. (Ø).
91 = Load rating (capacity).
V
= Maximum speed index.
SAFETY
DEVICES
Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless tyres
with radial carcass. The homologated
tyres are listed in the Log book.
84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
RIMS AND TYRES
60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Load rating (capacity)
WHEELS
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 257
IN AN
EMERGENCY
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
257
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
258
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 258
Maximum speed rating
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R = up to 170 km/h.
S = up to 180 km/h.
T = up to 190 km/h.
U = up to 200 km/h.
H = up to 210 km/h.
V = up to 240 km/h.
W = up to 270 km/h.
Y = up to 300 km/h.
Maximum speed rating
for snow tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 km/h.
T M + S = up to 190 km/h.
H M + S = up to 210 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING RIM
MARKING fig. 5
Example: 7 J x 16 H2 ET 43
7
= rim width in inches 1.
J
= rim drop center outline (side
projection where the tyre bead
rests) 2.
16 = rim nominal diameter in inches (corresponds to diameter of
the tyre to be mounted) (3 =
Ø).
H2 = “hump” shape and number (relief on the circumference holding the Tubeless tyre bead on
the rim).
43 = wheel camber angle (distance
between the disc/rim supporting plane and the wheel rim
centre line).
A0E0788m
fig. 6
RIM PROTECTOR TYRES
fig. 6
ATTENZIONE
If after-sale tyres with
rim protector are used
(fig. 6) and the car has integral cups fixed (by springs) to
the sheet wheel, DO NOT fit
wheel cups. The use of unsuitable tyres and wheel cups
could cause a sudden pressure loss of the tyre.
For versions/markets,
where provided
TI
Versions
tyre
rim
7Jx16” steel
7Jx16” steel
7,5Jx17” (*) alloy
8Jx19" alloy
205/55 R16 91V
205/55 R16 91V
225/50 R17 98W
235/40 ZR19 96Y (▼)
tyre
rim
7Jx16” steel
215/55 R16 93V
7Jx16” steel
215/55 R16 93V
tyre
rim
7Jx16” alloy
215/55 R16 93V
7Jx16” alloy
215/55 R16 93V
tyre
rim
7,5Jx17” (*) alloy
225/50 R17 98W
7,5Jx17” (*) alloy
225/50 R17 98W
tyre
rim
8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W (▼)
Optionals
Space-saver
spare wheel
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
tyre
rim
SAFETY
DEVICES
1750 TURBO BENZINA
3.2 JTS - 2.4 JTDM 200 CV
2.4 JTDM 210 CV
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Standard
tyres
1.9 JTDM 8V ECO
1.9 JTDM 8V (**)
2.0 JTDM ECO
2.0 JTDM (**)
8Jx18” alloy
235/45 R18 98W (▼)
4,00B x17"
T125/80 R17
(*) Tyres that cannot be fitted with traditional snow chains. Only “spider” type chains can be used.
(**) For specific markets
IMPORTANT Snow tyres with speed index H or superior are recommended.
(▼) Unchainable tyres. When using winter tyres, use 225/50 R17 98 tyres or 235/45 R18 98. Vehicles with TI fittings should not use 16”
wheel rims.
Also for 3.2 JTS and 2.4 JTDM 210 HP 4x4 version, snow chains shall be fitted on the FRONT
axle of the car.
Traditional snow chains may not be used on tyres type 225/50 R17” only spider type chains
can be used. Tyres 235/45 R18” and 235/40 ZR19” cannot be fitted with snow chains due
to interference with the fender.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
1.8 140 HP
1.9 JTDM 8V
1.9 JTDM 16V
2.0 JTDM
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 259
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TYRES
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
259
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
205/55 R16 91V
215/55 R16 93V
225/50 R17 98W
235/45 R18 98W (▼)
235/40 ZR19 96Y (▼)
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
average load bar
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.5
2.7
2.5
2.7
2.5
full load
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.5
2.9
2.7
2.9
2.7
3.0
2.8
bar
Space-saver
spare wheel
T125/80 R17
4.2
(▼) Unchainable tyres. When using winter tyres, use 225/50 ZR17 96 tyres or 235/45 R18 98. Vehicles with TI fittings should not use 16” wheel rims.
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
Inflate tyres to full load pressures if driving at continuous speed exceeding 160 km/h.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
– camber
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Pagina 260
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
WHEEL ANGLES
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
15:51
Front
wheels
– caster
– half toe-in
(per wheel)
– camber
Rear
wheels
– half toe-in
(per wheel)
All types
–35’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
4° 15’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 18’
–8’ ± 4’
max. difference
right/left: 4’
–40’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
13’ ± 7’
(total toe-in: 26’ ± 7’)
TI Versions
4x2 Versions
4x4 Versions
–1° 1’± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
4° 15’± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 18’
–7’± 4’
max. difference
right/left: 4’
–1° 3’± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
11’± 7’
(total toe-in: 22’± 7’)
–38’±18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
4° 15’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 18’
–7’ ± 4’
max. difference
right/left: 4’
–1° 3’ ± 18’
max. difference
right/left: 24’
11’ ± 7’
(total toe-in: 22’ ± 7’)
INDEX
VEHICLE GEOMETRY The TI fittings present lower suspensions around of 20 mm with respects to the other versions.
260
Warning: lowered trim car, pay attention when driving on ramps, humps or on particularly
rough routes.
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 261
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
DIMENSIONS
SAFETY
DEVICES
Dimensions are
expressed in mm and
refer to the car
fitted with standard tyres.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Min. size variations
when optional tyres are
fitted.
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The height refers to
the car unladen.
BOOT VOLUME
A0E0044m
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
4660
1000
2700
960
1422
1417 (■)
1578
1593 (■)
1828
1555
1573 (■)
(■) With tyres 215/55 R16”
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Boot volume .............. 405 dm3
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
261
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 262
Dimensions are
expressed in mm and
refer to the car
fitted with standard tyres.
Min. size variations
when optional tyres are
fitted.
The height refers to
the car unladen.
BOOT VOLUME
Boot volume .............. 445 dm3
A0E0307m
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
4660
1000
2700
960
1422
1417 (■)
1578
1593 (■)
1828
1555
1573 (■)
(■) With tyres 215/55 R16”
(*) With roof racks/ski racks (where provided): 1452/1447 (with 215/55 R16" tyres)
262
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h sec.
Kilometer with standing start sec.
208
235
250
244
193
197
194
212
218
215
231
227
10.2
7.7
7.1
7.0
10.7
10.7
11.0
9.2
8.8
9.0
8.1
8.3
31.1
28.9
27.0
27.3
32.6
32.8
33.2
30.6
30.2
30.5
28.7
29.0
Top speed km/h
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h sec.
Kilometer with standing start sec.
206
233
248
242
192
196
193
210
216
213
229
225
10.4
7.9
7.2
7.2
10.9
10.9
11.2
9.4
9.0
9.2
8.3
8.5
31.3
29.2
27.4
27.7
32.9
33.3
33.7
30.9
30.5
30.8
29.0
29.3
(*) For specific markets
SPORTWAGON VERSIONS
1.8 140 HP
1750 TURBO BENZINA
3.2 JTS 4x2
3.2 JTS 4x4
1.9 JTDM 8v
1.9 JTDM 8v ECO
1.9 JTDM 8v ECO (*)
1.9 JTDM 16v
2.0 JTDM/2.0 JTDM ECO
2.0 JTDM ECO (*)
2.4 JTDM 4x2
2.4 JTDM 4x4
(*) For specific markets
SAFETY
DEVICES
1.8 140 HP
1750 TURBO BENZINA
3.2 JTS 4x2
3.2 JTS 4x4
1.9 JTDM 8v
1.9 JTDM 8v ECO
1.9 JTDM 8v ECO (*)
1.9 JTDM 16v
2.0 JTDM/2.0 JTDM ECO
2.0 JTDM ECO (*)
2.4 JTDM 4x2
2.4 JTDM 4x4
Top speed km/h
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SALOON VERSIONS
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
PERFORMANCE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 263
IN AN
EMERGENCY
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
263
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 264
1750
TURBO
BENZINA
3.2 JTS
4x2
3.2 JTS
4x4
1.9
JTDM 8v
1.9
JTDM 16v
2.0 JTDM
Weight empty
(including fluids, 90%
fuel in the tank and
no optional)
1385
1430
1540
1610
1480
1490
1585
1645
Maximum
admitted load (*)
– front axle
– rear axle
– total
1100
1050
1935
1100
1050
1980
1220
1050
2090
1220
1050
2160
1150
1050
2030
1130 (Õ)/1150
1050
2040
1220
1050
2135
1220
1050
2195
Payload including
driver (**)
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
Towable loads
1400
1500
1700
1700
1500
1500
1500
1500
Max. load on ball
60
60
70
70
60
60
60
60
Maximum load
on roof
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
INDEX
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
1.8
140 HP
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WEIGHTS
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
264
Weights (kg)
Saloon versions
2.4 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
4x2
4x4
(*)
Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so
that they comply with these limits.
(**)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in
the maximum weight allowed.
(Õ)
2.0 JTDM versions
Pagina 265
1750
TURBO
BENZINA
3.2 JTS
4x2
3.2 JTS
4x4
1.9
JTDM 8v
1.9
JTDM 16v
2.0 JTDM
2.4 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
4x2
4x4
Weight empty
(including fluids, 90%
fuel in the tank and
no optional)
1435
1480
1590
1660
1530
1540
1635
1695
Maximum
admitted load (*)
– front axle
– rear axle
– total
1100
1050
1985
1100
1050
2030
1220
1050
2140
1220
1100
2210
1150
1050
2080
1130 (Õ)/1150
1050
2090
1220
1050
2185
1220
1100
2245
Payload including
driver (**)
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
550
Towable loads
1400
1500
1800
1800
1500
1500
1500
1500
Max. load on ball
60
60
75
75
60
60
60
60
Maximum load
on roof (***)
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
(*)
Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so
that they comply with these limits.
(**)
If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in
the maximum weight allowed.
(***) Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg.
(Õ)
2.0 JTDM versions
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
1.8
140 HP
Weights (kg)
Sportwagon versions
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
265
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 266
CAPACITIES
1.8
1750
140 HP TURBO
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
BENZINA
266
3.2 JTS 1.9 JTDM 1.9 JTDM 2.0 JTDM 2.4 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
8v
16v
210 HP
4x4
litres
70 ●
70 ●
70 ●
70 ❍
70 ❍
70 ❍
70 ❍
litres
10 ●
10 ●
10 ●
10 ❍
10 ❍
10 ❍
10 ❍
Engine cooling
system
litres
8.0
6.6
10.3
7.5
7.5
6.1
7.35
Lubrication system
engine
litres
4.5 ■
5.0 5.4 ■
4.6 4.6 4.9 6.4 ❑
Mechanical gearbox/
differential
litres
1.6
2.0
2.8 (Õ)
2.3
2.3
2.8
2.8
Windscreen/headlight
washer fluid reservoir: litres
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
6.0
Fuel tank:
– including
a reserve of
Specified fuels and original
lubricants
● Unleaded petrol
with no less than 95 R.O.N.
(EN228 Specification)
❍ Diesel fuel for motor
vehicles (EN590 Specification)
Mixture of 50% water and
PARAFLUUP (▲)
■ SELENIA StAR
❑ SELENIA WR
SELENIA StAR P.E.
(1750 TURBO BENZINA versions)
SELENIA WR P.E.
TUTELA CAR MATRYX
(Õ) TUTELA MULTIAXLE
Mixture of water and liquid
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35
(▲) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
Pagina 267
Lubricants for petrol
engines (1.8 140 HP,
2.2 JTS and 3.2 JTS
versions)
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct car operation
Original fluids
and lubricants
Change
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40,
FIAT 9.55535-H2 qualification
SELENIA StAR
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F216.D05
According to
Service Schedule
Lubricants
for petrol engines
(1750 TURBO
BENZINA versions)
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40, ACEA C3.
FIAT 9.55535-S2 qualification.
SELENIA StAR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F603.D08
According to
Service Schedule
Lubricants for
diesel engines
(2.4 JTDM versions)
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-40
FIAT 9.55535-N2 qualification.
SELENIA WR
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F515.D06
According to
Service Schedule
Lubricants for diesel
engines (1.9 JTDM 8V,
1.9 JTDM 16V,
2.0 JTDM versions)
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 5W-30.
FIAT 9.55535-S1 qualification.
SELENIA WR P.E.
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F510.D07
According to
Service Schedule
For diesel engines, in emergency cases where genuine products are not available, lubricants with min. performance ACEA B4 and ACEA C2 are
accepted. If this is the case, the best engine performance is not guaranteed. We however recommend replacing the lubricant with those recommended
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Use of products with low-quality properties than ACEA A3 and ACEA B4 could cause damages to the engine that are not covered by the warranty.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
Use
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
IN AN
EMERGENCY
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
267
3-12-2009
Use
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
INDEX
Pagina 268
Fluid and lubricant specifications
for correct car operation
Original fluids
and lubricants
Applications
TUTELA CAR
MATRYX
Mechanical gearbox
and differential
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-90 that passes
API GL-5 specifications, ZF-TE ML 18.
Qualification FIAT 9.55550-DA3
TUTELA
MULTIAXLE
Synthetic fluid for hydraulic and electrohydraulic systems.
Qualification FIAT 9.55550-AG3.
TUTELA GI/R
Rear differential and
transmission unit
(3.2 JTS 4X4 and
2.4 JTDM 4x4 version)
Power steering
Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperature
appliances. NLGI 1-2 consistency.
Qualification FIAT 9.55580.
Grease for homokinetic joints with low friction coefficient.
NLGI 0-1 consistency.
Qualification FIAT 9.55580.
TUTELA ALL STAR
CV joints
on wheel side
TUTELA STAR 700
CV joints
on differential side
Synthetic fluid for Brake and clutch controls FMVSS n° 116
DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01
Qualification FIAT 9.55597.
Protective with antifreeze action, red colour based on inhibited
monoethylen glycol and organic formula, that passes
CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.
Qualification FIAT 9.555523.
TUTELA TOP 4
Brake and clutch
hydraulic controls
PARAFLUUP (●)
Radiator antifreeze
Additive for
diesel fluid
Additive for diesel fuel with anti-freeze action,
protecting Diesel engines.
TUTELA DIESEL ART
50% PARAFLUUP (❏)
To be mixed with fuel oil
(25 cc per 10 litres)
Windscreen/
headlight washer
fluid
Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11.
Qualification FIAT 9.55522.
Lubricants and
greases
for transmission
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
IN AN
EMERGENCY
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
268
15:51
Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85
that passes API GL 4 specifications.
Qualification FIAT 9.55550-MZ1
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
Brake fluid
Protective agent
for radiators
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F108.F02
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F426.E06
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F428.H04
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F702.G07
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F701.C07
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F001.A93
proportion:
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F101.M01 50% water and
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F601.L06
To be used diluted
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL SC 35 or undiluted
Contractual Technical
Reference N° F201.D02
(●) IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with fluids having different specifications from those described here.
(❏) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralized water mixture.
FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO EUROPEAN
DIRECTIVE IN FORCE (litres x 100 km)
1.8 140 HP
1750 TURBO BENZINA
3.2 JTS 4x2
3.2 JTS 4x4
1.9 JTDM 8v
1.9 JTDM 16v
2.0 JTDM
2.4 JTDM 4x2
2.4 JTDM 4x4
(❏) Saloon versions
Urban
Extra-urban
Combined
10.3 ()
6.0 ()
7.6 ()
10.7 (Õ)
6.1 (Õ)
7.8 (Õ)
6.0 ()
8.1 ()
11.8 ()
12.0 (Õ)
6.2 (Õ)
8.3 (Õ)
16.4 ()
7.9 ()
11.0 ()
16.5 (Õ)
7.9 (Õ)
11.0 (Õ)
8.3 ()
11.4 ()
16.7 ()
17.0 (Õ)
8.3 (Õ)
11.5 (Õ)
7.8 ()/6.6 () () 4.8 ()/4.4 () () 5.9 ()/5.2 () ()
7.9 (Õ)/6.7 (Õ) () 4.9 (Õ)/4.5 (Õ) () 6.0 (Õ)/5.3 (Õ) ()
7.5 ()
4.6 ()
5.7 ()
7.6 (Õ)
4.7 (Õ)
5.8 (Õ)
7.1 ()/6.6 ()() 4.4 ()/4.3 ()() 5.4 ()/5.1 ()()
7.2 (Õ)/6.7 (Õ)() 4.5 (Õ)/4.4 (Õ)() 5.5 (Õ)/5.2 (Õ)()
9.2 ()
5.4 ()
6.8 ()
9.2 (Õ)
5.5 (Õ)
6.9 (Õ)
9.7 ()
5.8 ()
7.2 ()
9.9 (Õ)
5.9 (Õ)
7.4 (Õ)
(Õ) Sportwagon versions
() ECO versions
SAFETY
DEVICES
– combined consumption: is calculated weighing about 37% of urban
cycle consumption and about 63% of
extraurban consumption.
IMPORTANT The type of route,
traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the car, trim level/
equipment/accessories, load, climate control system, roof rack,
other situations that affect air
drag may lead to different fuel
consumption levels than those
measured.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
The fuel consumption figures given in
the table below are determined on the
basis of the homologation tests set
down by specific European Directives.
The procedures below are followed for
measuring consumption:
– urban cycle: cold starting followed
by driving that simulates urban use of
the car;
– extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extraurban use of the car; the speed varies
between 0 and 120 km/h;
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
FUEL CONSUMPTION
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 269
IN AN
EMERGENCY
15:51
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
3-12-2009
INDEX
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
269
3-12-2009
15:51
Pagina 270
CO2 EMISSIONS
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO EUROPEAN DIRECTIVE IN FORCE (g/km)
Saloon versions
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
SAFETY
DEVICES
The CO2 emission levels given in the following tables refer to combined consumption.
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
249-270 Alfa 159 GB
270
1.8
1750
140 HP TURBO BENZINA
179
189
3.2 JTS
4X2
3.2 JTS
4X4
1.9 JTDM
8v
1.9 JTDM
16v
2.0 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
4X2
2.4 JTDM
4X4
260
270
157/138 (*)
150
142/136 (*)
179
192
3.2 JTS
4X2
3.2 JTS
4X4
1.9 JTDM
8v
1.9 JTDM
16v
2.0 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
4X2
2.4 JTDM
4X4
262
272
159/140 (*)
153
145/139 (*)
181
194
(*) ECO versions
Sportwagon versions
1.8
1750
140 CV TURBO BENZINA
183
(*) ECO versions
194
Pagina 271
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: Ministerial Certifications
Certification number
T939
European Union and
Countries applying
EC directive
NTR939
0523
0523
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
10:55
SAFETY
DEVICES
8-04-2009
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
–
N15278
Brazil
❒
HHHH-AA-FFFF
❒
HHHH-AA-FFFF
Bulgaria
China
CMII ID : 2006DJ0352
❒ Data unavailable at the time of printing.
CMII ID : 2006DJ0351
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Australia
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
❒
INDEX
❒
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Argentina
271
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 272
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Certification number
272
T939
NTR939
Malaysia
❒
Mexico
AA 000000 E
❒
Morocco
Singapore
YYYYXXXX-XXX
YYYYXXXX-XXX
❒
AA 000000 E
❒
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément : MR 2395 ANRT 2006
Date d’agrément : 13/01/2006
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément : MR 2394 ANRT 2006
Date d’agrément : 13/01/2006
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA 104022
Complies with
IDA Standards
DA 104022
South Africa
Taiwan
❒ Data unavailable at the time of printing.
TA-2005/701
APPROVED
TA-2005/702
APPROVED
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
10:55
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
8-04-2009
INDEX
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
Pagina 273
273
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
274
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 274
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 275
A L FA 1 5 9 S P O R T WA G O N
REARSCREEN WIPER ......................................... 276
BOOT .............................................................. 277
ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ...................................... 284
PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE
"UNIVERSAL ISOFIX" CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ... 285
IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ..................... 288
IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT ..................... 290
IF A FUSE BLOWS ............................................. 292
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
275
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 276
REARSCREEN WIPER
OPERATION
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
Rear window wiper
activation/deactivation
Turning the unstable ring nut A-fig. 1
to position ' ON/OFF will obtain flick
wipe of the rear window wiper. To turn
it off, turn the ring nut back to position
' ON/OFF.
The activation of the rear windshield
wiper occurs also with the front windshield wipe on and reverse gear inserted.
Rear window "smart"
washing
Turning the unstable ring nut A-fig. 1
to position & will obtain rear window
washing. Keeping the unstable ring nut
at position & it will be possible to activate with just one movement both the
windscreen wiper and the rear window
wiper; the latter comes actually into action automatically when the unstable
ring nut is kept at position & for over
half a second.
276
fig. 1
A0E0264m
fig. 2
A0E0267m
The rear window wiper stops working
a few strokes after releasing the ring
nut; a further stroke after about 6 seconds completes the wiping operation.
HANGING THE REARSCREEN
WIPER BLADE
Never use the wiper to
remove ice or snow from
the rear window. In these
conditions, the wiper is submitted
to excessive effort that results in
motor protection cutting in and
wiper operation inhibition for few
seconds as a consequence. Should
it be not possible to restore its
operation, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service.
❒ position the new arm correctly, fully tighten the nut B and then lower
the cover A.
Proceed as follows:
❒ raise the cover A-fig. 2, slacken
the nut B and remove the arm C;
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 277
BOOT
fig. 3
A0E0268m
SPRAY NOZZLE
If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly
check that there is fluid in the reservoir
(see "Checking fluid levels" in section
"Car maintenance").
Then check that the nozzle holes Afig. 3 are not clogged, if necessary use
a needle to clean them.
To open the tailgate from the inside if
the battery is flat or the electric tailgate
lock is failing, proceed as follows:
❒ tilt the rear seats completely (see
paragraph "Extending the boot" in
section "Dashboard and controls");
fig. 4
A0E0269m
fig. 5
A0E0263m
❒ remove the rear head restraints;
❒ take the screwdriver from the tool
container and working inside the
boot (on the rear part), fit it into seat
A-fig. 4 and then operate lever Bfig. 5.
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
TAILGATE EMERGENCY
OPENING FROM THE INSIDE
277
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 278
EXTENDING THE BOOT
The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3)
or totally extended splitting the rear
seat.
Proceed as follows:
❒ lower completely the rear seat head
restraints;
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
❒ check that the seat belt is not twisted;
278
❒ lift seat back lever A-fig. 6 to unlock respectively the left or right section of the backrest and tilt the seat
back forward. Lever raising is indicated by a “red band” B.
fig. 6
A0E0085m
The boot extension to the right makes
it possible to carry two passengers on
the rear seat left-hand side. The boot extension to the left makes it possible to
carry one passenger on the rear seat
right-hand side.
IMPORTANT
❒ before performing the operation of
folding the backrest over, make sure
that the rear head restraints are in
the “rest” position (completely lowered). The head restraints can be removed to improve the load carrying
capacity;
❒ before tilting the backrest, ensure
that the rear armrest is not lowered.
Otherwise, insert it in its seat (see
section “Internal equipment” in
chapter “Dashboard and controls”).
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 279
To return the rear seat back
to its original position
Raise the seat backrests and push them
back until hearing the locking click of
both retainers.
Position seat belt buckles upwards.
ANCHORING THE LOAD
Make sure the backrest is properly secured at both sides (red bands not visible) to prevent it moves forward in the
event of sharp braking causing injuries
to passengers.
Hooks shall also be used to secure the
luggage retaining net (for versions/
markets, where provided where applicable, at Alfa Romeo Authorised Services).
fig. 8
A0E0270m
The boot houses 4 hooks (see fig. 8
and fig. 9) for anchoring ropes in order to guarantee perfect load anchoring.
A0E0271m
fig. 9
WARNING
A heavy load that has
not been secured may
cause serious harm.
WARNING
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
IMPORTANT When the backrest is
properly secured, the “red band” Bfig. 6 on levers A shall no longer be
visible. The “red band” actually indicates
that the backrest is not properly secured.
Make sure the head restraints are properly positioned.
If you want to carry
reserve fuel in a can,
follow law regulations, only
using a certified can, suitably
fastened to the load securing
eyelets. Even in this way the
risk of fire is increased in the
case of an accident.
279
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
fig. 10
280
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 280
A0E0273m
ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS
fig. 10 - 11
The boot sides are equipped with two oddment compartments closed by a cover.
To open the cover press button A and
turn it downwards.
fig. 11
A0E0272m
CURRENT OUTLET
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The current outlet is located on the left
side of the boot.
To use the current outlet, open the lid
A-fig. 12. The current outlet only
works with the key fitted into the ignition device and can only be used to power accessories having max. 15A intake
(180 W).
fig. 12
A0E0274m
Never use the outlet for
accessories with power
over the max. specified
one. Long power intake can run
down the battery and inhibit
engine starting.
8-04-2009
fig. 13
10:55
Pagina 281
A0E0281m
LUGGAGE NET
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
The left and right sides of the boot are
quipped with a luggage retainer net.
– fig. 13 - version with side lid
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
fig. 14
A0E0282m
fig. 15
A0E0476m
fig. 16
A0E0275m
Using seats B-fig. 17 to secure the net
to the rear side of the boot.
To secure the net, fit hooks A-fig. 18
into seats B and press downwards.
To release the net, take it out upwards
while keeping button C pressed.
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
– fig. 14 - version without side lid
– fig. 15 - fixing elastic.
As optional, for versions/markets where
applicable, an additional luggage retainer net can be fitted.
Use the seats A-fig. 16 located in the
front part of the boot to hook the net as
shown in fig. 19.
281
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
fig. 17
10:55
Pagina 282
A0E0308m
fig. 20
A0E0278m
fig. 21
A0E0279m
fig. 22
A0E0280m
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
COVER
The luggage compartment cover
A-fig. 20 can be rolled up and removed.
To roll it up remove the two rear pins
B-fig. 21 from their housings.
fig. 18
fig. 19
282
8-04-2009
A0E0276m
A0E0277m
IMPORTANT Hold the cover by handle C-fig. 20 and guide it during rolling
up.
IMPORTANT To remove the net roll
it up and check whether also the passenger's compartment separation net
(for versions/markets, where provided)
is rolled up (see next paragraph), then
pull up lever D-fig. 23. Raise the net
and take it out from the boot.
To refit the net, proceed as follows:
❒ fit the net into the proper seat on the
left side (side without lever);
❒ keep the lever D-fig. 22 up and fit
the net into the proper seat on the
right side;
❒ release lever D.
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 283
Do not put objects on
the cover which may
damage it.
The objects put on the
cover may be thrown
forwards and injure passengers should you brake sharply
or in the event of an accident.
Your are recommended to use
the passenger's compartment
separation net.
fig. 23
A0E0283m
fig. 24
A0E0287m
fig. 25
A0E0288m
PASSENGER'S
COMPARTMENT UPPER
SEPARATION NET
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
In addition to the luggage compartment
cover, certain versions are also fitted
with a passenger's compartment upper
separation net fig. 23.
The net for separating the passenger's
compartment from the boot is contained
into a special bar.
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
WARNING
To extend it, take it out of the reel by
taking tongue A-fig. 24 and secure
ends B-fig. 25 into the two housings
C-fig. 26 (one per side) located on
the roof of the car.
283
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
fig. 26
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 284
A0E0284m
To roll up the net, release ends Bfig. 25 from housings C-fig. 26 and
guide it during rolling.
fig. 27
A0E0291m
Passenger's compartment
separating net
removal/refitting
To remove the net press button Dfig. 27 as shown in the figure, move
the separating net releasing it from its
seat, on both left and right side. make
the net slide as shown in the figure, removing the pins from their seats.
To refit the net reverse the removal operations described previously.
284
fig. 28
A0E0305m
SOUND SYSTEM
CD Changer (for versions/markets,
where provided)
O certain versions, behind the right boot
lid, is fitted a CD Changer for 10 discs
(see fig. 28).
Amplifier (for versions/markets,
where provided)
Versions equipped with Bose Hi-Fi system also have an amplifier behind the
left boot lid.
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:55
Pagina 285
ROOF RACK/
SKI RACK
(for versions/markets,
where provided)
A0E0285m
FUEL CAP EMERGENCY
OPENING
In the event of a failure, to open the
fuel cap proceed as follows:
❒ open the fuse box lid A-fig. 29 on
the right side of the boot as shown
by the arrow;
❒ pull the string B set aside the use
box.
IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.
permissible loads (see section "Technical Specifications").
fig. 30
A0E0286m
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
fig. 29
The car can be fitted with two longitudinal bars fig. 30 that can be used, by
adding special accessories to carry various objects (e.g.: skis, windsurf, etc.)
285
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 286
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
PRESETTING FOR
MOUNTING THE
"UNIVERSAL
ISOFIX" CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
286
This car is preset for mounting the Universal Isofix child restraint system, a
new European standardised system for
carrying children safely. fig. 31 shows
an example of child restraint system.
The Universal Isofix child's seat covers
weight group 1.
Because of the different attachment system, the child seat must be secured by
the specific bottom metal rings
A-fig. 32, located in the squab upholstery, in the position marked by
isofix flags (accessible by opening the
zips on the covers) to the specific ring
A-fig. 33 located behind the rear seat
squab level with the child seat.
fig. 31
A0E0241m
fig. 32
A0E0174m
fig. 33
A0E0477m
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 287
To use fastener A-fig. 33, proceed as
follows:
❒ tilt the rear set backrest (see paragraph "Extending the boot" in this
section);
❒ pull up fastener A and then secure
the belt to the fastener.
It is possible to mount both the traditional restraint system and the "Universal Isofix" one. Remember that in case
of Universal Isofix child's seats, you can
only use all those seats approved with
the ECE R44/03 writing "Universal
Isofix".
At Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo you can find
the "Universal Isofix" "Duo Plus" child's
seat.
For any further detail on installation
and/or use, refer to the “Instructions
Manual” that must be provided by the
child restraint system's Manufacturer.
WARNING
Mount the child restraint system only
with the car stationary. The
Universal Isofix child restraint
system is properly anchored to
the mounting brackets when
clicks are heard. In any case,
keep to the installation instructions that must be provided by the child restraint
system's Manufacturer.
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
287
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 288
IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating,
see paragraph “When needing to
change a bulb" in section "In an emergency".
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
IMPORTANT Before changing a bulb,
read carefully the instructions given in
section "In an emergency".
fig. 35
A0E0292m
C: reversing light bulb on passenger
side or right side;
Reversing light/
rear fog lights
C: rear fog light bulb on driver side or
left side;
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ remove cover A-fig. 35 working
with a screwdriver in the point indicated by the arrow;
fig. 36
A0E0293m
IMPORTANT To release the inspection lid, protect the screwdriver tip with
a cloth to prevent scratching.
❒ remove the bulb holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs B-fig. 36;
288
A0E0294m
❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 37:
REAR LIGHT UNITS
❒ open the tailgate;
fig. 37
❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Bfig. 36;
❒ close cover A-fig. 35.
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 289
Taillight bulb on tailgate
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ remove the bulb holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs B-fig. 36;
fig. 38
A0E0295m
❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 37:
Direction indicators/
Taillights/Brake lights
D: taillight bulb on right/left headlight
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Bfig. 36;
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ close cover A-fig. 35.
fig. 39
A0E0296m
fig. 40
A0E0297m
❒ on certain versions, open the side lid;
❒ remove the protection cover by operating device A-fig. 38;
❒ remove the bulb holder unit by pressing the retaining tabs B-fig. 39;
❒ remove and replace the burnt-out
bulb by pressing it slightly and turning it counterclockwise fig. 40:
E: taillight/brake light bulb;
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
❒ remove the cover A-fig. 35 working in the point shown by the arrow;
❒ refit the bulb holder unit securing it
properly using the retaining tabs Bfig. 39;
❒ refit the protection cover.
F: direction indicator bulb
289
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 290
IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHT BURNS OUT
For the type of bulb and power rating,
see paragraph “When needing to
change a bulb" in section "In an emergency".
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
fig. 41
290
A0E0298m
ADDITIONAL BRAKE LIGHT
(THIRD STOP)
The additional brake light is made up of
LEDs and it is built into the rear spoiler
fig. 41.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
to have the third brake light replaced.
IMPORTANT Before changing a bulb,
read carefully the instructions given in
section "In an emergency".
fig. 42
A0E0487m
BOOT LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 42 levering in the point shown by the arrow;
fig. 43
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 291
A0E0488m
❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 43 releasing it from the side contacts making sure that the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;
❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.
fig. 44
A0E0301m
TAILGATE LIGHT
To change the bulb, proceed as follows:
❒ open the tailgate;
❒ remove the light unit A-fig. 44
working in the point shown by the
arrow;
fig. 45
A0E0302m
❒ replace the bulb B-fig. 45 releasing it from the side contacts making sure that the new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts;
❒ refit the light unit inserting first one
side and then the other one until
hearing the locking click.
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
291
271-292 Alfa 159 GB
8-04-2009
10:56
Pagina 292
IF A FUSE BLOWS
The fuse specific for the Sportwagon version is located in the fuse box at the
right side of the boot (see “In an emergency” chapter).
IMPORTANT Before changing a bulb,
read carefully the instructions given in
section "In an emergency".
ALFA 159 SPORTWAGON
To open the fuse box, proceed as follows:
❒ use handle B to open the right lid
(for versions/markets, where provided) A-fig. 46;
COMPONENT
Socket
292
A0E0303m
fig. 46
A0E0304m
fig. 47
❒ open the fuse box lid C-fig. 47
working in the point shown by the
arrow.
FUSE
AMPERE
F55
15
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 293
INTRODUCTION .........................................................
Tips ........................................................................
- Road safety ............................................................
- Reception conditions ................................................
- Care and maintenance .............................................
- CD ........................................................................
Technical specifications ..............................................
HI-FI Bose audio system .............................................
295
295
295
295
295
296
297
298
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE ...........................................
Controls on steering wheel ........................................
Introduction .............................................................
- Tuner section ..........................................................
- CD section .............................................................
- CD MP3 section ......................................................
- Audio section ..........................................................
- Media Player section.................................................
299
302
303
303
303
303
303
303
FUNCTIONS AND SETTINGS ........................................
Switching on the car radio .........................................
Switching off the car radio .........................................
Selecting the tuner function ........................................
Selecting CD/CD Changer functions ..............................
304
304
304
304
304
Audio source memory function ....................................
Volume setting .........................................................
Mute/Pause function ................................................
Audio settings ..........................................................
Tone setting .............................................................
Balance setting .........................................................
Fader setting ............................................................
Loudness function .....................................................
Menu.......................................................................
Telephone setup ........................................................
Anti-theft protection....................................................
304
304
305
305
305
305
306
306
307
313
313
RADIO (Tuner) ..........................................................
Introduction .............................................................
Frequency band selection ...........................................
Preset buttons ..........................................................
Storing the last station listened to ................................
Automatic tuning ......................................................
Manual tuning ..........................................................
AutoSTore function ....................................................
Emergency alarm reception ........................................
EON function ............................................................
Stereo stations .........................................................
314
314
314
314
314
315
315
315
316
316
316
SOUND SYSTEM
SOUND SYSTEM
293
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
294
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 294
CD PLAYER ...............................................................
Introduction .............................................................
Selecting the CD player .............................................
Loading/ejecting a CD ...............................................
Error messages .........................................................
Display information ...................................................
Track selection ..........................................................
Fast forward/backward track selection ........................
Pause function .........................................................
317
317
317
317
318
318
318
318
318
MP3 CD PLAYER .......................................................
Introduction .............................................................
MP3 mode ..............................................................
Selecting MP3 sessions with hybrid discs .......................
Display information ...................................................
Select next/previous folder ........................................
Structure of the folders ...............................................
319
319
319
320
320
320
320
CD CHANGER (CDC) .................................................
Introduction .............................................................
CD Changer selection .................................................
Error messages .........................................................
CD selection .............................................................
321
321
321
321
321
TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................. 322
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 295
INTRODUCTION
The car radio is installed in an ergonomically
convenient position for the driver and the passenger; the graphics on the front panel help
to quickly identify the controls and makes
them easier to use.
A CD Changer is available from Lineaccessori
Alfa.
The instructions for use are provided below.
We recommend that you read them carefully. The instructions also refer to how to operate the CD Changer (if present) using the radio. Refer to the specific manual for instructions on how to use of the CD Changer.
TIPS
Road safety
Learn how to use all different radio functions
(e.g. how to save stations) before beginning
to drive.
Reception conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be disturbed
by mountains, buildings or bridges, or when
you are far away from the broadcasting station.
WARNING The volume may be increased
when receiving traffic reports.
WARNING
Excessively loud volume
can be a risk for driver and
other people on the road. The volume must therefore always be adjusted so that you can still hear
noise from the surroundings (e.g.
horns, ambulance sirens, police
sirens, etc.).
Care and maintenance
SOUND SYSTEM
The car radio is equipped with a CD player (radio and CD player) or a CD-MP3 player (radio and CD-MP3) and was designed to combine with the specific features of the passenger compartment. It has a customised design
that integrates the style of the dashboard. The
size of the car radio is compatible with the
car and as it cannot be adapted to any other vehicle, it is fixed.
The radio is designed for a long operational
life and does not require particular maintenance. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services in case of faults.
Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth
only. Cleaning and polishing products may
damage the surface.
295
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 296
CD
Remember that dirt, scratches or distortions
on the CD could cause skipping while it is playing and poor sound quality. Follow these guidelines for optimum playback:
❒ only use branded CDs:
❒ after listening to the CDs, put them back
in their boxes to avoid them being marked
or scratched, which could cause them to
skip during playing;
❒ never expose CDs to direct sunlight, high
temperatures or moisture for extended periods of time, which could cause them to
become distorted;
SOUND SYSTEM
❒ do not stick labels on the CD surface or
write on the recorded surface with pencil
or pen.
296
❒ clean each CD carefully to remove fingerprints or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs
by the outside and clean them from the
middle outwards;
❒ never use chemicals (e.g. antistatic products or thinners or sprays) for cleaning as
they could damage the surface of the CDs;
To remove a CD from its container, press
down in the middle and lift up the disc, holding it carefully around the outside.
Always take the CD by holding it around its
outside circumference. Never touch the surface.
To remove fingerprints and dust, use a soft
cloth starting from the centre of the CD outwards.
Never use CDs that are very scratched,
cracked, distorted, etc. Their use could cause
damage the player or make it malfunction.
The use of original CDs is required for the
best quality audio playback. Correct operation is not guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were not correctly burned
and/or with a maximum capacity above
650 Mb.
WARNING Do not use commercially available protective sheets for CDs or discs with
stabilisers as these could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc.
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 297
WARNING If a copy-protected CD is used, it
may take a few seconds before the system
will start to play it. In addition, since many
new and different protection methods are
continuously being introduced, it is not possible to guarantee that the CD player will be
able to play any protected CD. Information
regarding copy protection is often stated in
fine or difficult to read print on the cover of
the CD itself, or indicated by phrases such
as, for example, “COPY CONTROL”, “COPY
PROTECTED”, “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED
ON A PC/MAC”, or identified by symbols
such as for example:
In addition, protected disks often do not have
the audio disk identifying symbol on the disk
(or on the case) itself:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Car radio
Maximum power: 4x30 W
Speakers
The system includes:
WARNING The CD player can read most of
the compression systems currently on the
market (e.g.: LAME, BLADE, XING, FRAUNHOFER) but as these systems are continually evolving, playback of all compression
formats is not guaranteed.
WARNING If a multisession disc is loaded,
only the first session will be played.
– 2 tweeter speakers, max. power 30 W
each, positioned on the ends of the dashboard;
– 2 mid-woofer speakers, diameter 165
mm, max. power 30 W each, positioned
in the front doors;
– 2 tweeter speakers, max. power 30 W
each, positioned in the rear doors;
– 2 mid-woofer speakers, diameter 165
mm, max. power 30 W each, positioned
in rear doors.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
297
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
298
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 298
HI-FI BOSE AUDIO SYSTEM
(for versions/markets, where provided)
Technical information
The BOSE HI-FI audio system was carefully
designed to provide the best acoustic performance and reproduce sound like a live
concert in all areas of the passenger compartment.
– 2 tweeter speakers, max. power 50 W
each, positioned on the ends of the dashboard;
The system faithfully reproduces crystalline
high tones and provides full and rich bass
tones that make the loudness function superfluous. The full sound range is reproduced
throughout the entire passenger compartment so that the occupants are enveloped
with the feeling of space experienced when
listening to live music.
Components are patented and make use
of the most sophisticated technology whilst
at the same time being easy to use by even
the most inexperienced people.
The system consists of:
– 1 mid-tweeter (Centerfill) speaker, diameter 80 mm, max. power 50 W, positioned in middle of dashboard;
– 1 sub-woofer (Saloon versions), diameter 250 mm, max. power 200 W, positioned on rear window shelf;
– 2 mid-woofer speakers, diameter 165
mm, max. power 90 W each, positioned in
front doors, designed for optimal mediumto-low frequencies;
– 1 bass-box reflex (Sportwagon versions), diameter 130 mm, max. power 200
W, positioned in boot;
– 2 rear tweeter speakers, max. power
50 W each, positioned in the rear doors;
– audio power amplifier, 6 independent
channels, positioned on rear window shelf
for controlling all speakers in the car.
– 2 mid-woofer speakers, diameter 165
mm, max. power 90 W each, positioned in
rear doors, designed for optimal medium-tolow frequencies;
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 299
SOUND SYSTEM
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
A0F0531m
Button
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Mode
ON/OFF
On
Brief press on knob
Off
Long press on knob
Volume adjustment
Turn knob leftwards/rightwards
299
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 300
Button
GENERAL FUNCTIONS
Mode
FMAS
AM
CD
FM1, FM2, FM Autostore radio source selection
MW, MW1, MW2 radio source selection
Repeated brief press on button
Radio CD/CD-Changer/Media Player source selection
(with Blue&MeTM only)
Repeated brief press on button
MUTE
Volume on/off (MUTE/PAUSE)
Brief press on button
AUDIO
Audio settings: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE),
left/right balance (BALANCE),
front/rear balance (FADER)
Activate menu: brief press on button
Select setting type: press buttons N or O
Adjust settings: press buttons ÷ or ˜
MENU
Advanced functions settings
Activate menu: brief press on button
Select setting type: press buttons N or O
Adjust settings: press buttons ÷ or ˜
Button
TUNER FUNCTIONS
Mode
Search radio station:
• Automatic search
• Manual search
Automatic search: press buttons ÷ or ˜
(hold pressed to fast forward)
Manual search: press buttons N or O
(hold pressed to fast forward)
N
÷
˜
O
1 2 3 4 5 6 Store current radio station
Recall stored station
300
Repeated brief press on button
Long press on buttons for memory preset 1 to 6
Brief press on buttons for memory preset 1 to 6
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 301
Button
CD FUNCTIONS
Mode
ı
Eject CD
Brief press on button
Play previous/next track
Brief press on buttons ÷ or ˜
CD track fast forward/backward
Long press on buttons ÷ or ˜
N
O
Play previous/next disc (for CD-Changer)
Brief press on buttons N or O
Play previous/next folder (for CD-MP3)
Brief press on buttons N or O
▲▼
Select previous/next folder/artist/genre/album
according to active selection mode
Brief press on button
÷ ˜
÷ ˜ Play previous/next track
Brief press on button
Button
Media Player FUNCTIONS (with Blue&MeTM only)
Mode
▲▼
Select folder/artist/genre/previous/next album according to the
active selection mode
Brief press on button
÷ ˜ Play previous/next track
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
Brief press on button
301
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 302
CONTROLS ON
STEERING WHEEL
(for versions/markets, where provided)
SOUND SYSTEM
A0E0532m
302
Button
FUNCTION
Mode
^
AudioMute on/off (Radio mode)
or Pause (Media Player mode - with Blue&MeTM only)
Brief press on button
Volume up
Press button
Volume down
Press button
SRC
Select radio frequency range (FM1, FM2, FMT, FMA, MW) or audio source:
Radio - CD - MP3 - CD Changer or Media Player (with Blue&MeTM only)
Press button
N
Radio: recall pre-selected stations (from 1 to 6)
MP3: select next folder
CD Changer: select next CD in CD Changer
Press button
O
Radio: recall pre-selected stations (from 6 to 1)
MP3: select previous folder
CD Changer: select previous CD in CD Changer
Press button
÷
Radio: autosearch previous station
CD player: select previous track
CD Changer: select previous track
Press button
˜
Radio: autosearch next station
CD player: select next track
CD Changer: select next track
Press button
+
–
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 303
INTRODUCTION
CD section
CD MP3 section
The device offers the following functions:
❒ Direct disc select;
❒ MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG);
Tuner section
❒ Track select (forward/backward);
❒ Select folder (previous/next);
❒ Fast track search (forward/backward);
❒ Select track (forward/backward);
❒ CD Display function: disc name/time
elapsed since the start of the track;
❒ Fast track search (forward/backward);
❒ PLL tuning in frequency bands FM/AM/
MW;
❒ RDS (Radio Data System) with TA (traffic information) - TP (traffic programmes)
EON (Enhanced Other Network) - REG
(regional programmes) functions;
❒ AF: alternative frequency search selection
in RDS mode;
❒ emergency alarm set up;
❒ automatic/manual station tuning;
❒ FM Multipath detector;
❒ manual storing of 30 stations: 18 in FM
band (6 in FM1, 6 in FM2, 6 in FMT),
12 in MW band (6 in MW1, 6 in MW2);
❒ automatic storing (AUTOSTORE function)
of 6 stations in the dedicated FM band;
❒ SPEED VOLUME function (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system): speed-dependent automatic volume adjustment;
❒ automatic Stereo/Mono selection.
❒ Play audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW.
❒ MP3 Display function: name of folder,
ID3-TAG information, time elapsed since
start of track, file name;
❒ Play audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW.
Multimedia CDs include data tracks in addition to the
audio tracks. Playing this
type of CD could cause hissing at
a volume that could jeopardise road
safety as well as damage the output stages and the speakers.
Audio section
❒ Mute/Pause function;
❒ Soft Mute function;
❒ Loudness function (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system);
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
❒ 7 band graphic equalizer (excluding versions with Bose HI-FI system);
❒ Separate bass/treble adjustment;
❒ Right/left channel balancing.
Media Player section
(with Blue&MeTM only)
See description in the Blue&MeTM supplement for Media Player operations.
303
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 304
FUNCTIONS AND SETTINGS
SWITCHING ON
THE CAR RADIO
SELECTING THE
TUNER FUNCTION
AUDIO SOURCE MEMORY
FUNCTION
The car radio comes on when the ON/OFF
button/knob is briefly pressed.
Pressing the FMAS button quickly and repeatedly to cyclically select the following audio sources:
If another function (e.g. the radio) is selected whilst listening to a CD, playback is
interrupted and is resumed from the same
point when returning to the CD source.
SOUND SYSTEM
When the car radio is turned on the volume
is limited to 5 if the value was higher than
this when the radio was last used.
When the radio is switched on with the key
off, it switches off automatically after about
20 minutes. After the radio has switched itself off automatically it can be turned on for
a further 20 minutes by pressing the
ON/OFF button/knob.
SWITCHING OFF
THE CAR RADIO
Keep the ON/OFF button/knob pressed.
❒ TUNER (“FM1”, “FM2”, “FMT”);
Press the AM button quickly and repeatedly to cyclically select the following audio
sources:
❒ TUNER (“MW1”, “MW2”).
SELECTING CD/CD CHANGER
FUNCTIONS
Press the CD button briefly and repeatedly
to cyclically select the following audio
sources:
❒ CD (only if a CD is inserted);
❒ CHANGER (CD Changer - only if the CD
Changer is connected).
304
If another function is selected whilst listening to the radio, the last station selected is
tuned into when returning to the Radio
source.
VOLUME SETTING
Turn the ON/OFF button/knob to adjust the
volume.
If the volume level is changed during the
transmission of traffic news, the new setting
will only be maintained until the update is
over.
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 305
MUTE/PAUSE FUNCTION
(zeroing the volume)
Press the MUTE button briefly to activate the
Mute function. The volume will gradually decrease and the words “RADIO Mute” will appear on the display (in tuner mode) or
“PAUSE” (in CD or CD-Changer mode).
Press the MUTE button again to deactivate
the Mute function. The volume will gradually increase until it reaches the level set previously.
When the volume is changed using the dedicated controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the volume is adjusted to the new
selected level.
Mute will be ignored when there is an incoming traffic alert (if the TA function is activated) or if an emergency alarm is received. The function will be reactivated when
the alert is over.
AUDIO SETTINGS
The audio menu functions depend on the activated function: AM/FM/CD/CDC/Media
Player (with Blue&MeTM only).
Press the AUDIO button briefly to change the
Audio functions. After the AUDIO button is
first pressed, the display will show the bass
level value for the source activated at that
time (e.g. in FM mode the display will show
“FM Bass + 2”).
To scroll through the Menu functions use button N or O. To change the setting of the
selected function, use the ÷ or ˜ buttons.
The current status of the function selected
will be shown on the display.
TONE SETTING (bass/treble)
Proceed as follows:
❒ Use button N or O to set the “Bass”
or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu;
❒ press the button ÷ or ˜ to increase/decrease the bass or treble settings.
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. Hold pressed to adjust
the levels faster.
The functions managed by the Menu are:
BALANCE SETTING
❒ BASS (bass adjustment);
Proceed as follows:
❒ TREBLE (treble adjustment);
❒ Use the N or O button to set the “Balance” in the AUDIO menu;
❒ BALANCE (right/left balance adjustment);
❒ FADER (front/rear balance adjustment);
❒ LOUDNESS (excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system) (LOUDNESS function
on/off);
❒ EQUALIZER (excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system) (activation and selection of
factory equalizer settings);
❒ USER EQUALIZER (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI) (customised equalizer
settings).
❒ press the ÷ button to turn up the
sound from the right speakers or the
˜ button to turn up the sound from
the left speakers.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. By pressing them for
longer, the levels will change quickly.
Select the “÷ or ˜” value to set the
right and left audio outputs at the same value.
305
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 306
FADER SETTING
Proceed as follows:
❒ Use the N or Obutton to set the “Fader” in the AUDIO menu;
❒ press the ÷ button to turn up the
sound coming from the rear speakers or
the ˜ button to turn up the sound
coming from the front speakers.
SOUND SYSTEM
By pressing the buttons briefly, the levels will
change progressively. Hold pressed to adjust
the levels faster.
Select the “÷ or ˜” value to set the
same level for the front and rear audio outputs.
LOUDNESS FUNCTION
(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
The Loudness function improves the volume
of the sound whilst listening at low volumes,
increasing the bass and treble.
To turn the function on/off, select “Loudness” in the the AUDIO menu using the N
or O button. The function status (on or off)
is shown on the display for a few seconds
by the words “Loudness On” or “Loudness
Off”.
PRESET/USER*/ CLASSIC/
ROCK/JAZZ functions
(equalizer on/off)
(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated. When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can only be
changed by adjusting the bass and treble settings, whereas when the function is on, the
acoustic curves can be adjusted.
To turn the equalizer off, select the “EQ Preset” function using the ÷ or ˜ buttons.
306
To turn the equalizer on, use the ÷ or
˜ buttons to select one of the settings:
❒ “FM/AM/CD...EQ User” (adjustment of
7 equalizer bands that can be changed
by the user);
❒ “Classic” (optimal equalizer presetting
for classical music);
❒ “Rock” (optimal equalizer presetting for
rock and pop music);
❒ “Jazz” (optimal equalizer presetting for
jazz music);
“EQ” will appear on the display when one of
the equaliser presets is active.
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 307
*USER EQ SETTINGS function
(equalizer settings only if the
USER settings function is
selected) (excluding versions
with Bose HI-FI system)
To set a personalized equalizer adjustment,
point to USER using button N or O and
press button O for a while.
A graph with 7 bars will appear on the display, where each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to adjust using the ÷
or ˜ buttons; the bar selected will start
flashing and can be adjusted using the N
or O buttons.
Press the AUDIO button again to store the
setting. The display will show the source activated at the time followed by the word
User. If the mode is, for example, FM, then
the display will show “FM EQ User”.
MENU
The functions managed by the Menu are:
MENU button functions
❒ AF SWITCHING (ON/OFF)
Press the MENU button briefly to activate
the Menu function. The display will show the
first menu item that can be adjusted (AF)
(“AF Switching On” on the display).
To scroll through the Menu functions use button N or O. To change the setting of the
selected function, use the ÷ or ˜ buttons.
The current status of the function selected
will be shown on the display.
❒ TRAFFIC INFORMATION (ON/OFF)
❒ REGIONAL MODE regional programmes
(ON/OFF)
❒ MP3 DISPLAY (CD MP3 display setting)
❒ SPEED VOLUME (excluding versions with
Bose HI-FI system) (volume setting according to speed)
❒ RADIO ON VOLUME (radio volume maximum limit on/off)
❒ EXTERNAL AUDIO (telephone volume)
❒ RADIO OFF (off mode)
❒ SYSTEM RESET.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
Press the MENU button again to exit the
Menu function.
IMPORTANT AF SWITCHING, TRAFFIC INFORMATION and REGIONAL MODE adjustments are only possible in FM mode.
307
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 308
AF SWITCHING function
(alternative frequency search)
The radio can operate in two different modes
in the RDS mode:
SOUND SYSTEM
❒ “AF Switching On” - search for alternative frequencies activated (the letters
“AF” appear on the display);
308
With the function on, the radio automatically
tunes into the station with the strongest signal broadcasting the same programme. In
this way when driving you can continue listening to the same station without having
to change the frequency when you change
areas.
❒ “AF Switching Off” - search for alternative frequencies not activated.
Obviously, it must be possible to receive the
station that you are listening to in the area
you are driving through.
Proceed as follows to switch the function
on/off:
“AF” will light up in the display when the AF
function is on.
❒ press the MENU button and select “AF
Switching On”;
If the AF function has been activated and the
radio is not able to receive the tuned station,
the radio activates the automatic search, during which “FM Search” appears on the display (for versions/markets, where provided).
❒ briefly press the ÷/˜ buttons to
turn the function on/off.
With the AF function deactivated, the remaining RDS functions, such as the display
of the station name, still remain active.
The AF function can only be activated on FM
bands.
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 309
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
function (traffic announcements)
Some stations on the FM band (FM1, FM2
and FMA) can transmit information about
traffic conditions. The letters “TA” will appear in the display in this case.
Proceed as follows to switch the TA function
on/off:
❒ press the MENU button and select “Traffic Info”;
❒ briefly press the ÷/˜ buttons to
turn the function on/off.
If the TA function is activated, “TA” will light
up on the display.
IMPORTANT If the TA function is activated
with an audio source other than Tuner (Radio) (CD, MP3, Telephone or Mute/Pause),
the radio can carry out an automatic search
and therefore the frequency tuned into may
be different from the one set previously
when selecting the Tuner (Radio) source
again.
With the TA function:
❒ search only for RDS stations that transmit on the FM band, which are enabled
to transmit traffic information;
The volume at which the traffic news is transmitted depends on the listening volume:
❒ listening volume below 5: traffic news
volume 5 (fixed value);
❒ receive traffic information even if the CD
player/CD Changer function is on;
❒ listening volume above 5: traffic news
volume equal to listening volume +1.
❒ receive traffic information at a minimum
preset volume even with the radio volume off.
If the volume is changed during a traffic update, the level will not be shown on the display; the new level will only be maintained
during the update.
IMPORTANT In some countries there are radio stations that do not broadcast traffic information even with the TA function activated (“TA” on the display).
If the radio is tuned to a station in the AM
band, when TA is activated it will tune to the
last selected station in the FM1 band.
While traffic information is being received,
“TRAFFIC INFORMATION” will appear on the
display.
The TA function can be interrupted by pressing any button on the car radio.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
309
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 310
REGIONAL MODE function
(reception of regional
broadcasts)
Some national broadcasters will transmit regional programmes at certain times of the
day (that vary from region to region). This
function makes it possible to tune into local (regional) broadcasters automatically
(see EON function paragraph).
SOUND SYSTEM
If you want the radio to automatically tune
into the regional stations being broadcast on
the network selected, the function must be
activated.
IMPORTANT If the AF and REG functions are
on at the same time, once a border between
two regions is crossed, the radio may not
switch correctly to a valid alternative frequency.
MP3 DISPLAY function
(display of MP3 Compact Disc
information)
This function is used to select the information shown by the display when listening
to a CD containing MP3 tracks.
The function can only be selected if a CD
MP3 is inserted: in this case “MP3 Display”
will appear on the display.
To change the function, use the ÷ or
˜ buttons.
There are six available settings:
To turn the function on/off, use the ÷
or ˜ buttons.
❒ “Title” (if ID3-TAG is available)
The current status of the function will appear
on the display:
❒ “Album” (if ID3-TAG is available)
❒ “Regional Mode: On” - function on.
❒ “Regional Mode: Off” - function off.
310
If the function is deactivated and you have
tuned into a regional station working in a
given area and you enter a different area,
then the regional station received in the new
area will be broadcast.
❒ “Author” (if ID3-TAG is available)
❒ “Folder” name
❒ “File” name
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 311
SPEED VOLUME function
(volume setting according to speed)
(excluding versions with Bose
HI-FI system)
This function automatically adapts the volume level to the speed of the car, turning
up the volume when the speed increases
to maintain the ratio with the noise level
inside the passenger compartment.
To turn the function on/off, use the ÷
or ˜ buttons. The current status of the
function will appear on the display:
❒ Off:
function off
❒ Low:
function on
(low setting)
❒ High: function on
(high setting).
RADIO ON VOLUME function
(radio volume maximum limit
activation/deactivation)
This function is used to turn the maximum
volume limit on/off when turning the radio on.
The display shows the function status:
❒ “On volume limit: on” - when the radio
is switched on the volume level will be:
– the maximum volume if the volume
level is equal to or higher than the
maximum value;
– the same as before it was switched
off if the volume level is between the
minimum and maximum values;
– minimum volume if the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum.
NOTES
❒ The menu can only be used to turn the
function on/off and not to set the minimum or maximum volume.
❒ If the “TA” or “TEL” functions or an outside audio source are activated when the
radio is turned on, the radio will come on
at the volume set for these sources.
When the outside audio source is deactivated, the volume can be adjusted between the minimum and maximum levels.
❒ If the battery charge is low, it will not
be possible to adjust the volume between
the minimum and maximum levels.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
❒ “On volume limit: off” - the radio will
come on at the volume level it was at before switching off. The volume may be
between 0 and 40.
Use the ÷ / ˜ buttons to change the
setting.
311
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 312
EXTERNAL AUDIO function
(telephone volume adjustment)
RADIO OFF function
(on and off mode)
Turn the ON/OFF button/knob or press the
÷/˜ buttons to adjust (settings from
1 to 40) or mute (OFF setting) the volume
of the telephone and the Blue&MeTM (except the Media Player function).
This function is used to select the mode for
switching off the radio between two different procedures. To activate the function, use
the ÷ or ˜ buttons.
The display shows the current function status:
❒ “Extern audio: Off” - function off.
SOUND SYSTEM
❒ “Extern volume: 23” - function on with
volume setting 23.
312
The selected mode will appear on the display:
❒ “Radio off: 00 min”: the radio is turned
off by the ignition key automatically as
soon as the key is extracted;
❒ “Radio off: 20 min”: the radio turns off
independently of the ignition key; it remains on for a maximum period of 20
minutes after the key has been extracted.
IMPORTANT If the radio is turned off automatically after the ignition key is extracted
(immediately or with a delay of 20 minutes), it will come on again automatically
when the key is inserted in the switch again.
On the contrary, if the radio is turned off
by pushing the ON/OFF button, it will remain off when the key is inserted in the ignition switch.
SYSTEM RESET function
This function is used to restore all settings to
their preset factory values. The options are:
❒ NO: no restore intervention;
❒ YES: the default parameters are restored.
During this operation, the message “Resetting” will appear on the display. At the
end of the operation, the source does not
change and the previous situation will be
displayed.
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 313
TELEPHONE SETUP
ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION
If a hands-free kit is installed on the car,
when there is an incoming phone call the
car radio audio will be connected to the telephone output. The incoming telephone
sound is always at a fixed volume, but it can
be adjusted during the conversation using
the ON/OFF button/knob.
The radio is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of information between the car radio and the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) on
the vehicle.
The fixed telephone audio volume can be
adjusted using the External audio function
in the Menu. The word PHONE will appear
on the display when the audio is muted for
the phone call.
This system guarantees maximum security
and avoids having to enter the secret code
every time the radio power supply is disconnected.
If the outcome of the check is positive, the
radio will start to work, whilst if the codes
compared are not the same or if the electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the equipment will notify the user
of the need to enter the secret code following the procedure in the paragraph below.
Entering the secret code
When the radio is switched on, if the secret code is requested, the display will show
the word “Code” for about 2 seconds followed by four dashes “- - - -”.
The code is made up of four digits from 1 to
6, each corresponding to one of the dashes.
To enter the first digit, press the corresponding button of the preset stations (from
1 to 6). Enter the other code numbers in the
same way.
If the four digits are not entered within 20
seconds, the message “Enter code - - -” will
appear again on the display for 2 seconds,
followed by four dashes “- - - -”. This event
is not considered an incorrect entering of the
code.
After entering the fourth digit (within 20 seconds), the car radio will start to work.
If an incorrect code is entered, the radio will
emit a sound and the display will show “Radio blocked/wait” to notify the user of the
need to enter the correct code.
Each time the user enters an incorrect code,
the waiting time will gradually increase (1
min, 2 min, 4 min, 8 min, 16 min, 30 min,
1 h, 2 h, 4 h, 8 h, 16 h, 24 h) up to a maximum of 24 hours. The waiting time will
be shown on the display by “Radio
blocked/wait”. After the message disappears, the code entering procedure may be
started again.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
Code Card
This document certifies ownership of the car
radio. The Code Card contains the model
of the radio, the serial number and the secret code.
IMPORTANT Keep the Code Card somewhere
safe so that the authorities can be supplied
with the relevant information if the radio is
stolen.
313
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 314
RADIO (TUNER)
INTRODUCTION
When the radio is turned on the last function selected before it was switched off is
activated: Radio, CD, CD MP3 or Media
Player (solo con Blue&MeTM).
SOUND SYSTEM
To select the Radio function whilst listening
to another audio source, press the FMAS or
AM buttons briefly, depending on the desired
band.
Once the Radio mode has been activated,
the display will show the name (only RDS
stations) and the frequency of the selected
radio station, the frequency band selected
(ex. FM1) and the preset button number
(ex. P1).
FREQUENCY BAND
SELECTION
With the Radio mode activated, press the
FMAS or AM button briefly and repeatedly to
select the desired reception band.
Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected cyclically:
❒ Pressing the FMAS button: “FM1”,
“FM2”, “FMA”;
❒ Pressing the AM button: “MW1” and
“MW2”.
Each band is identified by the respective
wording on the display.
The last station selected on the respective
frequency band will be tuned into.
The FM band is divided into sections: FM1,
FM2 and FMA; the FMA reception band is reserved for stations stored automatically using the Autostore function.
314
PRESET BUTTONS
The buttons numbered from 1 to 6 can used
to set the following presettings:
❒ 18 in the FM band FM (6 in FM1, 6 in
FM2, 6 in FMT or “FMA” on some versions);
❒ 12 in the MW band (6 in MW1, 6 in
MW2).
To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency band and then briefly press
the corresponding preset button (from 1 to
6).
By pressing the preset button for more than
2 seconds, the station tuned into will be
stored. The storing phase is confirmed by an
acoustic signal.
STORING THE LAST STATION
LISTENED TO
The radio automatically stores the last station that was selected for each reception
band, which is then tuned into when the radio is turned on or when the reception band
is changed.
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 315
AUTOMATIC TUNING
Briefly press the ÷ or ˜ button to start
the automatic tuning search for the next station that can be received in the selected direction.
If the button ÷ or ˜ is pressed down
longer, the fast search starts. When the button is released, the tuning will stop at the next
station that can be received.
If the TA function (traffic information) is on,
the tuner will only search for stations that
broadcast traffic updates.
MANUAL TUNING
This is used to manually search for stations
in the preselected band.
Select the desired frequency band and then
press the N or O buttons briefly and repeatedly to start the search in the desired direction. If the N or O button is pressed
longer, the fast search will start and then stop
when the button is released.
AUTOSTORE FUNCTION
(automatic station storing)
To activate the Autostore function, keep the
FMAS button pressed until the acoustic confirmation signal. With this function, the radio automatically stores the 6 stations with
the strongest signal in a decreasing order on
the FMA frequency band.
During the automatic storing process, “Autostore” will appear flashing on the display.
To interrupt the Autostore function, press the
FMAS button again: the radio will again tune
into the station listened to before the function was activated.
When the Autostore scan is concluded, the
radio will automatically tune into the first
preset station on the FMA band (preset 1).
The stations that have a strong signal at that
moment are then automatically stored in the
preselected band in the buttons numbered
1 to 6.
When the Autostore function is activated in
the MW1 o MW2 band, the FMA band is automatically selected and the scan is started.
IMPORTANT Sometimes Autostore cannot
find six stations with a strong signal. In this
case, the strongest stations will be duplicated
in the free preset buttons.
IMPORTANT When the Autostore function is
activated, the stations that were previously
stored on the FMA band are deleted.
SOUND SYSTEM
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
315
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 316
EMERGENCY ALARM
RECEPTION
EON FUNCTION
(Enhanced Other Network)
The radio can receive emergency alerts in
RDS mode in exceptional circumstances or
when dangerous situations are threatened
(earthquakes, floods, etc.) if these are being transmitted by the broadcaster tuned into.
In some countries, there are circuits that
group multiple broadcasters that transmit
traffic information together. In this case, the
programme on the station that is being listened to will be temporarily interrupted to:
SOUND SYSTEM
This function is activated automatically and
cannot be turned off.
316
The word ALARM will be shown in the display during the transmission of an emergency announcement. The volume of the radio will change during this announcement in
the same way as during a traffic bulletin.
❒ receive traffic information (only with the
TA function on);
❒ listen to regional transmissions each time
they are transmitted by one of the broadcasters in the same circuit.
STEREO STATIONS
If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is automatically switched from
Stereo to Mono.
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 317
C D P L AY E R
LOADING/EJECTING A CD
This chapter describes the variants regarding the operation of the CD player: as far as
the operation of the radio is concerned, refer to the description in the “Functions and
settings” chapter.
To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot
to activate the motorised loading system,
which will position it correctly.
SELECTING THE CD PLAYER
To activate the CD player built-into the equipment, proceed as follows:
❒ load a CD with the equipment switched
on: the first track will start to play;
or
❒ if a CD has already been loaded, turn on
the car radio and then briefly press the
CD button to select the “CD” operating
mode: the last track listened to will start
to play.
The CD can be loaded with the radio
switched off and the ignition key in the MARon position: in this case the radio will remain
off. When the car radio is turned on, the last
source listened to prior to switching off will
be activated.
When a CD is loaded the display will show
“CD-IN” and the words “CD Reading”. They
will remain displayed for the entire time required for the radio to read the CD tracks.
When this time has elapsed the radio will
automatically start to play the first track.
Press the ˚ button, with the device turned
on, to activate the CD motorised ejecting system. After ejection, the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard.
If the CD is not removed from the car radio, it will automatically be reloaded about
20 seconds later and the Tuner mode will
be tuned into (Radio).
The CD cannot be ejected if the car radio is
off.
If the ejected CD is loaded without having
removed it completely from the slot, the radio will not switch to the CD source.
SOUND SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure
optimum playback. If CD-R/RWs are used,
we recommend using good quality disc burnt
at the slowest speed possible.
317
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 318
ERROR MESSAGES
DISPLAY INFORMATION
If the CD cannot be read (for example a CDROM was loaded or a CD was loaded upside
down or there is a playback error), the message “CD Disc error” will appear on the display for approximately 2 seconds.
When the CD player is operating, the following information will appear on the display that has the following meaning:
SOUND SYSTEM
The CD will then be ejected and the audio
source activated prior to the CD mode selection will be heard.
With an external audio source activated (TA,
ALARM or Phone), the CD that cannot be
read will not be ejected until these functions
have ended. At the end, with the CD mode
activated, the display will show the words
“CD Disc error” for a few seconds and then
the CD will be ejected.
“CD Track 5”: indicates the CD track number;
“03:42”: indicates the time elapsed since
the start of the track (if the respective Menu
function is activated).
TRACK SELECTION
(forward/backward)
Briefly press the ÷ button to play the previous CD track and the ˜ button to play
the next track. The tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected after the last
track and vice versa.
If the track has been played for more than
3 seconds, pressing the ÷ button will
cause the track to be started again from the
beginning. In this case, if you want to play
the previous track, press the button twice
consecutively.
318
FAST FORWARD/BACKWARD
TRACK SELECTION
Keep the ˜ button pressed down to fast
forward the selected track and keep the
÷ button pressed down to play the track
fast backward. The fast forward/backward
function will stop once the button is released.
PAUSE FUNCTION
To pause the CD player, press the MUTE button. The words “CD Pause” will appear on
the display.
To resume listening to the track, press the
MUTE button again.
If another audio source is selected, the pause
function is turned off.
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 319
M P 3 C D P L AY E R
MP3 MODE
This chapter describes the operation of the
CD MP3 player variants only. Refer to the
description in the “Functions and Settings“
chapter as far as the operation of the radio
is concerned.
In addition to playing normal audio CDs, the
car radio can also play CD-ROMs on which
MP3 format compressed audio files are
recorded. The radio works according to the
methods described previously (“CD player”)
when an audio CD is inserted.
NOTE MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and
Thomson multimedia.
The use of good quality disc burnt at the
slowest possible speed is recommended for
optimum quality.
The files on the MP3 CD are in folders, with
sequential lists of all the folders containing
MP3 tracks (folders and sub-folders are all
displayed on the same level) and folders
that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be
selected.
The operating conditions and specifications
for playing MP3 files are as follows:
❒ the CD-ROMs used must be burnt in compliance with the ISO9660 Specification;
❒ the music files must have an “.mp3” extension: files with a different extension
cannot be played;
❒ the following sampling frequencies can
be played: 44.1 kHz, stereo (96 to 320
kbit/s) - 22.05 kHz, mono or stereo (32
to 80 kbit/s);
❒ tracks with variable bit-rates can be
played.
SOUND SYSTEM
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT The names of tracks must not
contain the following characters: spaces, ‘
(apostrophes), (and) (open and close brackets). When a CD MP3 is being burnt, make
sure that the file names do not contain these
characters; otherwise, the car radio will not
be able to play those tracks.
319
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 320
SELECTING MP3 SESSIONS
WITH HYBRID DISCS
SOUND SYSTEM
If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files,
the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to move to the
MP3 session whilst playing by keeping the
CD button pressed for more than 2 seconds.
IMPORTANT When the function is activated
the radio may take a few seconds to start
playback. Whilst checking the disc the display will show “CD Reading”: if no MP3 files
are detected, the radio will resume playing
the audio session from the point where it
was interrupted.
DISPLAY INFORMATION
SELECT NEXT/PREVIOUS
FOLDER
ID3-tag information displaying
Press the N button to select the next folder or the O button to select the previous
folder. The name of the selected folder will
be shown on the display.
In addition to the information relating to the
time elapsed, the name of the folder and
the name of the file, the car radio can display ID3-TAG information relating to the track
title, artist and author.
The name of the MP3 folder shown on the
display corresponds to the name with which
the folder was stored on the CD, followed
by an asterisk.
Example of a complete MP3 folder name:
BEST OF *.
If you wish to display ID3-TAG information
(Title, Artist, Album) and this information
has not been recorded for the track played,
the information will be replaced by information relating to the name of the file.
The folders are selected cyclically: the first
folder is selected after the last folder and
vice versa.
If no other folder/track is selected during
the next two seconds, the first track contained in the new folder will be played.
If the last track contained in the currently selected folder is played, the next folder will
be played.
STRUCTURE OF THE FOLDERS
The radio with MP3 player:
❒ only recognises the folders that effectively
contain MP3 format files
❒ if the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in “sub-folders”, their structure is
compressed to a single level structure
where the “sub-folders” are taken to the
level of the main folders.
320
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 321
To install and connect a
Lineaccessori CD Changer
contact only a Alfa Romeo
Dealership.
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the operation of the
CD Changer player variants only (for versions/markets, where provided); refer to
the description in the “Functions and Settings” chapter as far as the operation of the
radio is concerned.
CD CHANGER SELECTION
Turn the radio on and briefly and repeatedly press the CD button until the “CD Changer” function is selected.
ERROR MESSAGES
CD SELECTION
Error messages are shown in the following
cases:
Press the N button to select the next CD
or the O button to select the previous CD.
❒ no CD is inserted in the CD Changer: the
words “NO CD” will appear in the display
until the listening source is changed;
If there is no disc present in the CD changer in the selected position, the words “NO
CD” will appear briefly on the display. The
next disc will then automatically be played.
❒ the CD selected cannot be read (the CD
is not in the position selected or the CD
has been incorrectly loaded) the number of the CD selected followed by the
words “CD error” will appear on the display. The next CD is then selected; if there
are no other CDs or these cannot be read
either, the display will show the words
“NO CD” until the listening source is
changed;
SOUND SYSTEM
CD CHANGER (CDC)
❒ CD reading error: the words “CDC error”
will appear on the display. The next CD
is then selected; if there are no other CDs
in the CD Changer (after the last CD the
search begins again from the first) or
these also cannot be read, the display will
show the words “NO CD” until the listening source is changed;
❒ a CD-ROM is inserted: the next available
CD will be selected.
321
293-318 Alfa 159 GB
18-06-2010
14:11
Pagina 322
TROUBLESHOOTING
GENERAL SECTION
CD PLAYER
MP3 FILE READING
Low volume
The CD does not play
The Fader function should be adjusted to “F”
(front) values to prevent the reduction of radio output power and the cancelling of the
volume if the Fader level adjustment is R+9.
The CD is dirty. Clean the CD.
The CD is scratched. Try and use another CD.
Skips tracks whilst playing
MP3 files.
SOUND SYSTEM
Source cannot be selected
322
Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or
MP3 CD to be played.
The CD cannot be loaded
A CD is already loaded. Press ˚ and remove
the CD.
The CD is scratched or dirty. Clean the CD,
referring to what is described in the paragraph “CD” in the chapter “Introduction”.
The time of the MP3 tracks is
not correctly displayed
In some cases (due to the recording mode)
the duration of the MP3 tracks may be displayed incorrectly.
– use of the car under heavy
– checking the charge ............ 237
conditions .......................... 227
by the owner ........................ 116
– jump starting ..................... 182
– service Schedule ................. 225
Additional heater ..................... 69
– recharging ......................... 219
– scheduled service ................ 224
Air bags ........................... 141-145
– replacing ........................... 238
Carrying children safely ............. 135
Air/pollen filter ........................ 237
– useful advice for
Accessories purchased
– child restraint systems ......... 138
Air vents ................................. 54
lengthening the life ............. 239
– passenger’s seat compliance .. 138
Alarm ..................................... 17
Bodywork (cleaning) ................ 244
Alfa Romeo CODE system .......... 10
Bonnet ................................... 105
Alfa 159 Sportwagon ....... 275
Boot ............................... 101-277
– presetting for mounting the
“Universal Isofix” child
restraint system ........... 140-285
– light replacement ................ 208
Armrest
– central .............................. 82
– rear ...........................
83-84
Ashtray .................................. 87
ASR system ............................ 112
Brakes ................................... 256
Bulb (replacement) .................. 196
– general instructions ............. 196
– types of bulbs .................... 197
Ceiling lights
– front ................................. 78
– rear .................................. 80
Checking fluid levels ................. 228
Child lock device ...................... 97
Cigar lighter ............................ 85
At the filling station .................. 125
Capacities .............................. 266
Climate control system .............. 53
Automatic headlight sensor ........ 71
Car inactivity ........................... 164
– automatic two-/three-zone .. 58
Automatic two/three-zone
Car maintenance ................ 223
– manual ............................. 55
– periodical checks ................ 227
CO2 emissions ......................... 270
climate control system ............ 58
SAFETY
DEVICES
Battery
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
ABS system ............................ 108
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
INDEX
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 323
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:36
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
21-06-2010
INDEX
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
323
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
IN AN
EMERGENCY
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 324
CODE card .............................. 12
– marking ............................ 251
Containing running costs ........... 157
– technical data .................... 253
Controls ................................. 81
INDEX
Fuel
– consumption ...................... 269
Correct use of the car ........ 149
– consumption ...................... 232
– fuel cut-off switch ............... 81
Courtesy mirror light
– level check ........................ 231
– fuel gauge ......................... 22
Fuel cut-off and power supply
– bulb replacement ................ 206
– specifications ..................... 266
Cruise Control .......................... 76
Engine starting ........................ 150
switches ............................... 81
Environment protection ............. 127
Fuel feed ................................ 255
EOBD system .......................... 115
Fuel filler cap .......................... 126
External lights ......................... 70
Fuses (replacement) .......... 209-292
Eyeglasses holder .................... 87
Gearbox (use) ........................ 156
– bulb replacement ................ 201
Fix&Go automatic (device) ....... 190
Glass/can holder ..................... 87
– control .............................. 70
Flashing the headlights ............. 70
Glove compartment .................. 85
Dashboard and controls ....
6
Dashboard buttons ................... 72
Dimensions ............................. 261
Dipped beam headlights
Fluid level checks ..................... 230
Direction indicators
Glove compartment light
– bulb replacement ................ 207
200-201-204
Fluids and lubricants ................. 267
– control .............................. 70
Follow me home (device) ......... 71
Handbrake ............................. 155
Front ceiling lights
Hazard lights ........................... 72
– bulb replacement
Doors ..................................... 96
Electronic key .......................... 12
Engine
– identification code ............... 252
324
Engine oil
– control .............................. 72
– bulb replacement ................ 205
Head restraints .................
– control .............................. 78
Headlight washer
Front fog lights
– bulb replacement ................ 202
48-49
– control .............................. 73
– fluid level .......................... 232
– control .............................. 72
Parking sensors ....................... 118
– headlight adjustment abroad 107
– headlight aiming device ....... 106
Jacking the car ........................ 220
Performance ........................... 263
– front fog light adjustment ..... 107
Labels
Power windows ....................... 99
Hill Holder system .................... 111
– identification data ............... 250
Pretensioners .......................... 132
Homelink ............................... 89
– bodywork paint .................. 251
Protecting the environment ........ 127
Identification data .................... 250
Level checks ........................... 230
If an exterior light burns out .. 196-288
Main beam headlights
– bulb replacement ................ 199
Ignition device ......................... 19
– control .............................. 70
In an emergency ................ 181
Manual climate control system ... 55
Inactivity of the car .................. 164
Inertial fuel cut-off switch .......... 80
Installation of electric/
electronic devices ................... 117
Instrument panel ..................... 7-8
Instruments ............................ 21
Puddle light
– bulb replacement ................ 208
If an interior light burns out .. 205-290
MSR system ........................... 114
Multifunction display ................ 25
Number plate light .................. 204
Quick tyre repair kit
Fix&Go automatic .................. 190
Radio frequency remote control:
ministerial certifications ........... 271
Radio transmitters
and cellular telephones ........... 117
Rain sensor ............................. 74
Oddments compartments .......... 88
SAFETY
DEVICES
(child's seat) .................. 140-286
Parking lights
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
– adjusting headlight beam ..... 106
Isofix universal
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Headlights .............................. 65
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 325
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:36
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
21-06-2010
Rear ceiling lights
Interior fittings ......................... 83
Paint ..................................... 246
– bulb replacement ................ 205
Interiors ................................. 247
Parking .................................. 155
– control .............................. 80
INDEX
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
325
SAFETY
DEVICES
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 326
Rear fog lights
Ski tunnel ............................... 84
– changing ........................... 183
– control .............................. 72
Smart washing ........................ 74
– inflation pressures ............... 260
Rearview mirrors ...................... 50
Snow chains ........................... 163
Reconfigurable multifunction
– snow tyres ........................ 162
Sound system ......................... 293
– Rim Protector ..................... 258
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Right hand drive version .. 297
IN AN
EMERGENCY
Rev counter ............................ 21
INDEX
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
Tyres
– bulb replacement ................ 202
display ................................. 30
Reverse light
– bulb replacement ................ 202
Rim Protector .......................... 258
Rims
Steering ................................. 256
Steering lock ........................... 21
Steering wheel (adjustment) ..... 49
Sun curtains ............................ 88
– standard tyres .................... 259
– understanding tyre marking .. 257
VDC system ........................... 110
Sun visors ............................... 88
Sunroof .................................. 93
Warning lights
Suspensions ............................ 256
and messages ................... 165
Roof rack/ski rack ............ 106-284
Symbols ................................. 10
Weights ................................. 264
Rubber hoses .......................... 242
Technical Specifications ...... 249
– understanding rim marking ... 258
Safe lock device ...................... 14
Third brake light ...................... 204
Safety devices .................... 129
Top speeds .............................. 263
S.B.R. system ......................... 131
Towing the car ......................... 221
Seat belts ............................... 130
Towing trailers
Seats ..................................... 45
Side/taillights
– bulb replacement ......... 200-203
326
– control .............................. 70
Wheel geometry ...................... 260
Wheel rims
– understanding rim marking ... 258
Wheels
– changing ........................... 183
– installing the tow hook ........ 159
– technical data .................... 257
T.P.M.S. system ....................... 122
Wheels and tyres ..................... 240
Transmission ........................... 255
Windows (cleaning) ................. 246
Windscreen wiper
– blades .............................. 242
– control .............................. 73
– nozzle .............................. 243
SAFETY
DEVICES
– fluid level .......................... 232
CORRECT USE
OF THE CAR
– control .............................. 75
WARNING
LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
Windscreen washer
DASHBOARD
AND
CONTROLS
Pagina 327
IN AN
EMERGENCY
10:36
TECHNICAL
CAR
SPECIFICATIONS MAINTENANCE
21-06-2010
INDEX
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
327
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 328
PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE
AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE
For years now Alfa Romeo has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment
through the continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view
to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations imposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Alfa Romeo offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle*
at the end of its life span without additional costs.
The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the
European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002
on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.
Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our customers
by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your nearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Alfa Romeo web site or call
the toll free number 00800 2532 0000.
* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 329
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
DASHBOARD
fig. 1
1. Adjustable swivel side air vents - 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents - 3. Passenger’s air bag - 4. Fuel level gauge/engine coolant temperature gauge/engine oil temperature gauge (petrol versions) or turbocharger pressure
gauge (diesel versions) - 5. Adjustable swivel centre air vents - 6. Upper central vent - 7. External lights control lever 8. Driver’s air bag and horn - 9. Instrument panel - 10. Windscreen wiper control lever - 11. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents - 12. Adjustable swivel side air vents - 13. Switches for external lights, trip meter reset and headlamp
aiming device. - 14. Dashboard fusebox lid - 15. Bonnet opening lever - 16. Sound system controls on the steering wheel
(where provided) - 17. Driver’s knees air bag - 18. Cruise Control lever (where provided) - 19. Ignition device - 20. Engine START/STOP button - 21. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 22. Sound system (where provided) - 23. Glove
box - 24. Passenger’s knees air bag (where provided)
329
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 330
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Multifunction display
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
h c m Warning lights on
diesel versions only
On diesel versions the rev counter
end scale value is at 6000 rpm.
NOTE 1750 TURBO BENZINA versions
have a rev counter with different graphic
fig. 2 - Versions with multifunction display
A0E0309m
A. Speedometer (speed indicator)
B. Warning lights - C. Rev counter D. Reconfigurable multifunction display
c m Warning lights on diesel versions only
On diesel versions the rev counter
end scale value is at 6000 rpm.
NOTE 1750 TURBO BENZINA versions
have a rev counter with different graphic
fig. 3 - Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display
330
A0E0310m
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 331
NOTES
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 332
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:36
Pagina 333
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:37
Pagina 334
Pagine_
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:37
Pagina 335
Oil change? The experts recommend Selenia
The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia.
This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advanced
international specifications. Its superior technical characteristics
allow Selenia to guarantee the highest performance
and protection of your engine.
The Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA SPORT
Fully synthetic lubricant capable of meeting the needs of
high performance engines.
Studied to protect the engine also in high thermal stress
conditions, it prevents deposits on the turbine to achieve
the utmost performance in total safety.
SELENIA StAR PURE ENERGY
Synthetic lubricant designed for petrol engines that need
products with a low ash content. It maximises the
characteristics of engines with high specific power,
protects the parts mostly subjected to stress and helps
to keep modern catalysts clean.
SELENIA WR PURE ENERGY
Fully synthetic lubricant that can meet the requirements of
the latest diesel engines.
Low ash content to protect the particulate filter from the
residual products of combustion. High Fuel Economy
System that allows considerable fuel saving.
It reduces the danger of dirtying the turbine to ensure the
protection of increasingly high performance diesel
engines
SELENIA RACING
This lubricant has been developed as a result of Selenia’s
extensive experience in track and rally competitions,
it maximises engine performance in all kinds of
competition use.
Pagine_ITA.indd 4
The range also includes K Pure Energy, Selenia Digitech,
Selenia Multipower, Selenia 20K, Selenia 20K AR.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web
site www.selenia.com
18-05-2005 11:54:19
323-336 Alfa 159 GB
21-06-2010
10:37
Pagina 336
COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
Tyres
205/55 R16 91V
215/55 R16 93V
225/50 R17 98W
235/45 R18 98W (▼)
235/40 ZR19 96Y (▼)
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
average load bar
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.5
2.7
2.5
2.7
2.5
full load
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.5
2.9
2.7
2.9
2.7
3.0
2.8
bar
Space-saver
spare wheel
T125/80 R17
4.2
(▼) Unchainable tyres. When using winter tyres, use 225/50 R17 98 tyres or 235/45 R18 98. Vehicles with TI fittings should not use 16” wheel rims.
Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.
Inflate tyres to full load pressures if driving at continuous speed exceeding 160 km/h.
ENGINE OIL REPLEACEMENT (litres)
Lubrication system engine
1.8 140 HP
1750
TURBO BENZINA
3.2 JTS
1.9 JTDM 8v
1.9 JTDM 16v
2.0 JTDM
2.4 JTDM
4.5
5.0
5.4
4.6
4.9
6.4
Do not discard used oil in the environment.
REFUELLING (litres)
1.8 140 HP - 1750 TURBO BENZINA - 1.9 JTDM 8v - 1.9 JTDM 16v - 2.0 JTDM - 2.4 JTDM - 3.2 JTS
Fuel tank capacity
70
Reserve
10
For cars with petrol engine, only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N. (Specification EN228).
For cars with diesel engine only use Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590).
CUSTOMER SERVICES
TECHNICAL SERVICES - SERVICE ENGINEERING
Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)
Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
Publication no. 60438278 - 1 Edition - 06/2010
All rights reserved. Reproduction, even in part is prohibited without written permission
from Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A.
SERVICE
Cop Alfa Giulietta GB:Alfa 159 cop. LUM GB
21-01-2010
9:07
Pagina 1
ENGLISH
OWNER HANDBOOK
Alfa Services